Mimaki JV5 Maintenance Manual

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Revision 2.00
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

TKB Gotenyama Building, 5-9-41, Kitashinagawa, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0001, Japan Phone : +81-3-5420-8671 Fax : +81-3-5420-8687 URL : http://www.mimaki.co.jp/
D500306
Color Inkjet Printer
JV5-130S/160S
About this Maintenance Manual

This manual covers the instructions and useful information to be given to the service personnel on maintenance of the color inkjet printer JV5-130S/160S. Perform maintenance work according to the instructions given in this manual and the related documents listed below.
Constitution
This manual consists of the following chapters:
CHAPTER 1 Outline of Maintenance
Describes the specifications and other information of the printer, including precautions to be taken in maintenance work. Explaines the operation of each unit, and describes the functions and setting items of the printer. Describes procedures for removal and reinstallation of major parts. Adjusting or testing methods, or mechanical adjusting methods using jigs and tools are also described. Describes how to determine the cause of trouble and how to repair the printer. Describes information about PCBs and electrical parts.
CHAPTER 2 Operation Principle and Functions
CHAPTER 3 Overhaul / Adjustment
CHAPTER 4 Troubleshooting
CHAPTER 5 Explanation of Electrical Parts
Related Documents
The following documents relate to JV5-130S/160S. Refer to them whenever necessary. OPERATION MANUAL (Packed with main unit) MECHANICAL DRAWING SETUP GUIDE (for Service Engineers)
ii
Safety Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual. Understand the symbols, and be sure to observe the instructions.
In text Name of symbol Meaning
to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in WARNING mark Failure death or serious injuries to personnel. to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in CAUTION mark Failure injuries to personnel or damage to property. IMPORTANT mark Tips mark (P.1-10) Reference page Important notes on maintenance work are given with this symbol. Understand the instructions thoroughly, and perform maintenance work properly. Useful information for maintenance work is given with this symbol. Related description is given on the page shown by this symbol. Be sure to refer to the specified page.
iii
JV5-130S/160S
Caution Label
A caution label is stuck on the printer as shown below. Check the label before work. If it is illegible due to stains or coming off, replace it with a new one after getting user's consent. Locations of labels
~ Front ~ (Reorder: M903239)
(Reorder: M903405)
(Reorder: M903330)
(Reorder: M901549)
~ Rear ~ (Reorder: M903239)
(Reorder: M903968)
(Reorder: M904130)
iv
Contents
Outline of Maintenance
1-1. Precautions in Maintenance ....................................................................... 1-2
1-1-1. Notes on repair ................................................................................. 1-2 1-1-2. Preliminary checks ........................................................................... 1-3 1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly ............................. 1-4 1-2-2. Adjustment tools .............................................................................. 1-4
1-2. Tools required for maintenance work ........................................................ 1-4 1-3. Specifications of the main unit ................................................................... 1-5
Operation Principle and Functions

2-1. Operation Principle ..................................................................................... 2-2
2-1-1. 2-1-2. 2-1-3. 2-1-4. 2-1-5. 2-1-6. 2-1-7. 2-2-1. 2-2-2. 2-2-3. 2-2-4. Sequence at Power-on ...................................................................... 2-2 Origin Point Detection ..................................................................... 2-3 Set Up ............................................................................................... 2-3 Media Detection ............................................................................... 2-4 Sequence of Maintenance Function ................................................. 2-5 Ink System ....................................................................................... 2-9 Nozzle Missing Detection (NCU) Function .................................. 2-20 ADJUST Function ......................................................................... TEST Function ............................................................................... Special Key Function ..................................................................... PARAMETER Function ................................................................ 2-26 2-33 2-48 2-49
2-2. Functions .................................................................................................... 2-26
2-3. Operation Flow .......................................................................................... 2-50

2-3-1. 2-3-2. 2-3-3. 2-3-4. 2-3-5. 2-3-6. 2-3-7. Outline ............................................................................................ SETUP ........................................................................................... MACHINE SET ............................................................................. NCU ............................................................................................... ADJUST ......................................................................................... TEST .............................................................................................. PARAMETER ................................................................................
2-50 2-51 2-52 2-54 2-57 2-61 2-68
Overhaul / Adjustment
3-1. Outline .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3-1-1. Precautions for disassembly and reassembly ................................... 3-2 3-1-2. Tools and jigs ................................................................................... 3-3 3-1-3. Disassembly and Reassembly Procedure ......................................... 3-4 3-2-1. Head Unit ......................................................................................... 3-7 3-2-2. S Pump Assembly .......................................................................... 3-33 3-2-3. Pump Motor Assembly .................................................................. 3-35
3-2. Overhaul of Ink-related Parts .................................................................... 3-6
JV5-130S/160S
3-2-4. 3-2-5. 3-2-6. 3-2-7. 3-2-8. 3-2-9. 3-2-10. 3-3-1. 3-3-2. 3-3-3. 3-3-4. 3-3-5. 3-3-6. 3-3-7. 3-3-8. 3-3-9. 3-3-10. 3-3-11. 3-3-12. 3-3-13. 3-3-14. 3-3-15. 3-3-16. 3-3-17. 3-4-1. 3-4-2. 3-4-3. 3-4-4. 3-4-5. 3-4-6. 3-4-7. 3-4-8. 3-4-9. 3-4-10. 3-4-11. 3-4-12. 3-4-13. 3-4-14. 3-4-15. 3-4-16. 3-4-17. 3-4-18. 3-5-1. 3-5-2. 3-5-3. 3-5-4. 3-5-5. 3-5-6. 3-5-7.
Cap Head assy. ................................................................................ 3-37 Cap Base 1H ................................................................................... 3-38 Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly ............................................... 3-42 Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly ..................................... 3-51 Damper Assembly .......................................................................... 3-57 Sucker BOX .................................................................................... 3-61 NCU ................................................................................................ 3-63 Main PCB ....................................................................................... 3-70 HDC PCB ....................................................................................... 3-77 IO PCB ........................................................................................... 3-78 USB PCB ........................................................................................ 3-79 Head Relay PCB ............................................................................. 3-81 Slider PCB ...................................................................................... 3-82 Power PCB ..................................................................................... 3-85 Heater PCB ..................................................................................... 3-88 BOX Relay PCB ............................................................................. 3-90 Keyboard PCB ................................................................................ 3-92 Dot Detection PCB ......................................................................... 3-96 Ink Unit PCB .................................................................................. 3-98 Side Relay PCB .............................................................................. 3-99 ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge) .................................. 3-101 LED PCB ...................................................................................... 3-103 Take-up PCB ................................................................................. 3-105 Drying Fan Fork PCB ................................................................... 3-106 Origin Sensor ................................................................................ 3-110 Wiper Sensor ................................................................................ 3-112 Clamp Sensor ................................................................................ 3-113 Bottom Point Sensor ..................................................................... 3-115 Cap Sensor .................................................................................... 3-117 Paper Width Sensor ...................................................................... 3-119 Jam Sensor .................................................................................... 3-121 Paper Thickness Encoder .............................................................. 3-125 Y Encoder ..................................................................................... 3-129 Head Up/Down Encoder ............................................................... 3-132 Paper Sensor ................................................................................. 3-136 Media Rotary Encoder Assembly ................................................. 3-139 Front Cover Sensor L ................................................................... 3-147 Front Cover Sensor R ................................................................... 3-149 Maintenance Cover Sensor L ....................................................... 3-151 Maintenance Cover Sensor R ....................................................... 3-152 Ink Leakage Sensor ...................................................................... 3-153 Waste Tank Sensor ........................................................................ 3-158 X-axis Motor Assembly ................................................................ 3-162 X Pulley, X Belt ............................................................................ 3-165 Y-axis Motor Assembly ................................................................ 3-167 Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt ................ 3-171 Y Drive Belt .................................................................................. 3-175 Wiper Motor ................................................................................. 3-179 Station Motor ................................................................................ 3-182
3-3. Overhaul of PCBs ....................................................................................... 3-69
3-4. Overhaul of Sensors ................................................................................. 3-109
3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts ....................................................................... 3-161
vi
3-5-8. Head UD Motor ........................................................................... 3-184 3-5-9. M Motor ....................................................................................... 3-186
3-6. Overhaul of Other Parts ......................................................................... 3-188

3-6-1. 3-6-2. 3-6-3. 3-6-4. 3-6-5. 3-6-6. Cutter Unit Assy. .......................................................................... A Heater Cover Assy. .................................................................. P Heater Cover Assy. ................................................................... R Heater Cover Assy. ................................................................... Wiper Wash Solenoid ................................................................... SSR ..............................................................................................
3-189 3-193 3-198 3-204 3-206 3-209
Troubleshooting
4-1. Outline .......................................................................................................... 4-2
4-1-1. Rough identification of the source of the trouble ............................ 4-2 4-1-2. Checking procedure ......................................................................... 4-2 4-2-1. Error messages and corrective measures ......................................... 4-4 4-2-2. Warning messages and corrective measures .................................. 4-15
4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed ..................................... 4-4
Explanation of Electrical Parts

5-1. Outline .......................................................................................................... 5-2
5-1-1. Operation Explanation ..................................................................... 5-3 5-1-2. Power Supply ................................................................................... 5-4
5-2. Circuit Board Specifications ....................................................................... 5-5

5-2-1. 5-2-2. 5-2-3. 5-2-4. 5-2-5. 5-2-6. 5-2-7. 5-2-8. 5-2-9. 5-2-10. 5-2-11. 5-2-12. 5-2-13. 5-2-14. 5-2-15. 5-2-16. 5-2-17. 5-2-18. 5-2-19. 5-2-20.
Main PCB ......................................................................................... 5-5 USB Board ....................................................................................... 5-6 I/F Connection Board ....................................................................... 5-6 HDC PCB ......................................................................................... 5-7 IO PCB ............................................................................................. 5-7 Ink Unit PCB .................................................................................... 5-8 Slider PCB ....................................................................................... 5-9 Heater PCB .................................................................................... 5-10 Keyboard PCB ............................................................................... 5-10 Dot Detection PCB ......................................................................... 5-11 Encoder PCB ................................................................................... 5-11 Paper Width Sensor PCB ................................................................ 5-11 Take-up PCB ................................................................................... 5-11 Box Relay PCB .............................................................................. 5-12 Side relay PCB ............................................................................... 5-12 Head relay PCB ............................................................................. 5-13 Head memory PCB ........................................................................ 5-13 LED PCB ....................................................................................... 5-13 Ink Leak Sensor PCB ..................................................................... 5-13 Memory PCB ................................................................................. 5-13
5-3. Electronic block diagram .......................................................................... 5-14
vii
JV5-130S/160S
viii
CHAPTER 1 Outline of Maintenance
Contents
1-1. Precautions in Maintenance ...................................... 1-2

1-1-1. Notes on repair ....................................................... 1-2 1-1-2. Preliminary checks ................................................ 1-3 1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly . 1-4 1-2-2. Adjustment tools .................................................... 1-4
1-2. Tools required for maintenance work ....................... 1-4 1-3. Specifications of the main unit .................................. 1-5
1- 1
Color Inkjet Printer JV5-130S/160S
1-1. Precautions in Maintenance

1-1-1. Notes on repair
Be sure to turn the power off and unplug the power cable from the main body inlet before starting work. To prevent the ink from getting into your eyes, be sure to wear safety goggles and gloves when cleaning the print head or replacing the S pump L assembly or if the ink is anticipated to scatter. If the ink sticks to your hand, the skin may be get rough and dry. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacture. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. Take sufficient care so that leaked ink does not adhere to other parts. Ink droplets attached to FPCs or connectors may cause shortcircuit or a bad electric contact at inserting/removing a damper, thereby the ink discharge trouble or breakage of head/PCB may occur. Properly and carefully connect the FPC cable of the slider PCB from the HDC PCB according to the connector number. Failure to do so may cause a breakage of the PCB because of shortcircuit of the power supply. Pay sufficient attention on arrangement of 2 FPC cables connecting the head relay PCB to the head. Wrong arrangement of the FPC cables causes short-circuit of the power supply.Do not turn off the power during firmware upgrading. Doing so may disable restarting.
Observe the following precautions in maintenance work. Be sure to fully understand precautions given in For safe operation in the operation manual for the JV5 series. Some error conditions observed may be due to misoperation. First judge whether or not the error condition is caused by misoperation. Provide adequate space for the maintenance work. When performing tests with the electrical circuit box open, be careful not to receive an electric shock from any live part and not to drop screws or any other parts into the circuit box. Take care to avoid insufficient insertion or skewed insertion of any connector or FPC. In the case where it is necessary to conduct maintenance works with the power on, carefully observe the movement of the head. (Keep any part of your body away from the moving parts.) Shift the media (in the X-direction) and the head (in the Y-direction) using the jog keys. If it is necessary to shift the paper and the head by hand with the power turned off, exercise care to shift them slowly. Do not tilt the printer with the ink cartridges filled with ink. Doing so can give rise to leakage of ink. In principle, the following procedures should be taken in prior to the transportation and the transportation should be conducted using exclusive packaging members. Do not tilt the printer with the ink cartridges filled with ink. Doing so can give rise to leakage of ink. Discharge ink from the tube in accordance with the description given under Discharge cleaning in the maintenance. Detach the waste ink tank. Execute BeforeMovingIt. of the machine. Fix the head with the head stopper. (As for the detail, see Setup Guide)
1. 2. 3.
1- 2
Precautions in Maintenance
If the main unit is removed from the legs and placed directly on the floor, be careful of the following points. Unplug the take-up unit power cord. Remove the ink waste tank and the fitting bracket. (Plug the tube up with a cloth to prevent ink from spilling over.)
1-1-2. Preliminary checks

Before starting work, make sure that the following conditions are all met. The following conditions for the power supply system are all met: The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits. The printer must be grounded properly. The power cable must be free from damage, broken wire, etc. Many cables must not be connected to one outlet. Make sure that the printer is not located under any of the following conditions: In a place where the printer is exposed to direct sunlight. On an inclined surface. In an environment of too high or low temperature, or too high or low humidity, or in a place where temperature or humidity varies significantly. In a place where vibration occurs. In a place where the printer is exposed to direct air flow from an air conditioner or the like. Around a place where flame is used. In a dusty atmosphere. Around a place where strong electromagnetic waves are generated. The media (sheets) to be used must conform to the specifications.
1- 3
1-2. Tools required for maintenance work

The tables below show the tools and measuring instruments required for maintenance work.
1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly

Name Phillips screwdriver
Slotted screwdriver Spanner (Box wrench) Hexagon wrench
Spanner
Tweezers Long-nose pliers Nippers Soldering iron, Solder Scale Loupe Protection glasses Gloves Adhesive agent Insulation lock Nitroflon tape or acetate fabric tape
Remarks Type 1 For M2 Type 2 For M3 to5 (L=260 or more) Type 3 for M3 to 5 Long side 2.5mm for removing E-rings Width across flats: 5 mm Width across flats: 5.5 mm Width across flats: 7 mm 1.5mm for M3 SSWP 2.0mm for M4 SSWP 2.5mm for M3 cap bolts (L=170) 5.0mm for M6 cap bolts 6.0mm for M8 cap bolts Width across flats: 5.0mm Width across flats: 5.5mm for M3 nuts and hexagon stud Width across flats: 7.0mm for M4 nuts To prevent the cable from being pulled when disconnecting the connector.
150, 500mm About 50x to 60x magnification To keep hands clean, and for safety. LOCKTITE242 (for locking screws) L=150 or less (UL-approved product) As required (UL-approved product)
1-2-2. Adjustment tools

Name Trimmer adjustment screwdriver Tester Bar type tension gauge Ink line airtight tester 1.3mm Head gap check tool 1.5mm Head gap check tool All Cap base positioning tool A Cap base positioning tool Media Jam/ Cutter unit height positioning tool Code Remarks For adjustment of trimmers on the power supply PCB.
500 g
OPT-J0094 OPT-J0096 OPT-J0097 OPT-J0098 OPT-J0099 OPT-J0108
1- 4
Specifications of the main unit
1-3. Specifications of the main unit

Basic Specifications of the Unit
JV5-130S JV5-160S Head On demand piezoelectric head (IH47V*4 head stagger array) Printing resolution 540A720A1440 dpi Print mode 720 x 540dpi VD: (Scan x Feed) 540 or 720 x 720dpi VD : 540 x 900dpi VD : 540 or 720 x 1080dpi VD : 720 x 1440dpi VD : 1440 x 1440dpi : Ink 6 color loading K M C Y Lc Lm 4color loading K M C Y Ink supply Supplying by 2 cartridges with toggle switching (replacement of cartrdges at printing is allowed)) Ink end is detected with the cartridge end board detection method. Ink capacity At 6 color load- 2 crtaridges of 440cc for each color. 880cc/1color ing At 4 color load- 4 cartridges of 440cc for each color. 1760CC/1 color ing Avairable media FFATarpaulin, Polyvinyl chloride film (However, tdrying of he media must be allowed in the specified print mode.) Maximum At standard scan drawing range 1365 mm 1620 mm
Media specifica- Maximum width tion Minimum width Thickness Roll O.D. Roll weight 1375 mm 1630 mm 297 mm Less than 1.0 mm Less than 200 mm Less than 38 kg (In the range that feeding error caused by bending with its own weight when both ends of the roll are held does not occur.) Tube I.D. 2 inches, 3 inches Deawing face Outside (over wrap) End of winding Taping or week pasting to the paper tube Maximum 250 mm or less winding O.D. Print margin Roll Left and Right: 15 mm (default value) Top : 150 mm Bottom: 0 mm Leaf Left and Right : 15 mm (default value) Top : 150 mm Bottom : 200 mm Distance accu- Precision 0.3 mm or 0.3% of specified distance, whichever larger racy Repeatability 0.2 mm or 0.1% of specified distance, whichever larger Perpendicularity Media skew Print gap Media heater 0.5 mm/1000mm 5 mm or less /10m 1.5 mm~7 mm non-step user setting (Automatic recognition of media thickness) PRE/PRINT/AFTER (3-system independent control)
Item
Specifications
Notice
Solvant capable head Variable dot capable 1440 x 1440VD Printing with decreasing the number of head because of memory constraint
Total 16 IC chip mounted cartridgs (Special solvant ink)
At 6-color, 1760cc for only CM
Print quality confirmation media is MIMAKI genuin. When left and right drawing margin is set to the minimum, VD data is allowed. At 1440*1440VD, printing is conducted with 3 heads.
Margin of left and right whose tolerance excluding meandering of media is 2mm can be changed. Minimun 5mm Expansion and contraction of test media, photo paper or gloss paper is excluded. Meandering just after the setting is excluded. Any gap position settings are allowed.
1- 5
JV5-130S/160S
JV5-130S JV5-160S Media cutting Cutting in the Y direction with a tool on the head Cutting accuracy (step height) less than 1.0mm Waste ink tank FULL detection with a bottle type (4000cc) sensor Interface Standard equip- USB2.0 ment Command MRL-III Noise At standby Less than 58dB (FAST-A, back and forth and around 1m) Continuous Less than 65dB Temporal Less than 70dB Nozzle check unit Laser type (under class 1)
Compatible specification VCCI Class A FCC Class A UL 60950 CE Marking (EMC Directive, Low Voltage Directive) CB Report RoHS Compliant Single-phase AC200V ~ 240V 10% Lower than 15A 50/60Hz 1Hz Lower than 3600VA 20 C~35 C 35~65%Rh (non condensing) 20 C~25 C Less than 10 C/h Equivalent to office environment Less than 292 kg (324kg) Less than 298 kg (333kg) Less than 2860mm Less than 850mm(1050mm) Less than 1540mm Less than 3120mm Less than 850mm(1050mm) Less than 1540mm
Item
Specifications
Notice
Cutting tool is a consumable *Cables are maintenance supplies.
Installed in the machine (Class 2 as a unit)
Power source specifications Power consumption Environment Operating temperature limit Relative humidity Accuracy assurance temperature Temperature gradient Dust Main body
With the sleep function Main body including heater Excluding optional devices Ink discharge stability declines in an environment out of the range listed in the left.
Weight
Outside dimen- (W) sion (D) (H)
Excluding exhaust fan (including exhaust fan) Including exhaust dryer fan
1- 6
CHAPTER 2 Operation Principle and Functions
Contents
2-1. Operation Principle .................................................... 2-2
2-1-1. 2-1-2. 2-1-3. 2-1-4. 2-1-5. 2-1-6. 2-1-7. 2-2-1. 2-2-2. 2-2-3. 2-2-4. 2-3-1. 2-3-2. 2-3-3. 2-3-4. 2-3-5. 2-3-6. 2-3-7.
Sequence at Power-on .............................................. 2-2 Origin Point Detection ............................................. 2-3 Set Up ...................................................................... 2-3 Media Detection ....................................................... 2-4 Sequence of Maintenance Function ......................... 2-5 Ink System ............................................................... 2-9 Nozzle Missing Detection (NCU) Function .......... 2-20 ADJUST Function ................................................. 2-26 TEST Function ....................................................... 2-33 Special Key Function ............................................. 2-48 PARAMETER Function ........................................ 2-49 Outline ................................................................... 2-50 SETUP ................................................................... 2-51 MACHINE SET ..................................................... 2-52 NCU ....................................................................... 2-54 ADJUST ................................................................ 2-57 TEST ...................................................................... 2-61 PARAMETER ........................................................ 2-68
2-2.
Functions ................................................................... 2-26
2-3.
Operation Flow ......................................................... 2-50
2- 1
JV5-130S/160S
2-1.
Operation Principle
2-1-1.
Sequence at Power-on
The following is the sequence after power-on.
No. 1 2 3
4
Item Initial setting of CPU and H/W BOOT display S-RAM check
F-ROM check
Process content
5 6 7 8
Voltage check FPGA configuration Device configuration decision Version information display
Parameter check
10 11
Initial operation I/F Board Detection
R/W check of S-RAM When an error is detected, the system is brought down with displaying ERROR02 (MAIN RAM) Hashing check of F-ROM <At occurrence of hashing error> Occurrence in boot system area: The system is brought down with displaying ERROR01 (MAIN ROM). Occurrence in main system area: F/W update mode ( See Special Key Function ( p. 2- 48 ) ) starts. Voltage check When an error is detected, the system is brought down with displaying ERROR03. Configuration of PDC and HDC. Checking of a head and memory Machine type name and main body F/W version are displayed. At a maintenance open, revision and PDC/HDC version are also displayed. Key input during the version information displaying starts special mode ( See Special Key Function ( p. 2- 48 ) ). Parameter initialization at the first starting after F/W version-up. (The flowing parameters are initialized.) MAINTE. INKSYSTEM INKinfor. INKSEQUENCE INKTYPE SERVO TEST NCU Checksum of parameter area is executed, and in case of SUM value error, the system is brought down with displaying ERROR04 (Flash ROM). Detection of existence of I/F board and its type (USB2.0 / IEEE-1394: option).
2- 2
Operation Principle
2-1-2.
Origin Point Detection

Detection of each original point of the device
<Operation sequence at original point detection>

No. Item 1 Station original point Content 1. Station down (cap motor drive) 2. Station original point detection (detection by the lowest point sensor) If the detection fails, the system is brought to down (ERROR47). Wiper original point detection (wiper motor drive) If the detection fails, the system is brought to down (ERROR46) Y-original point detection (Y-motor drive) If the detection fails, the system is brought to down. (ERROR51) 1. Moving the carriage to the head up/down position. 2. Head upping (head up/down motor drive) 3. Detection of head top point (detection by the head height sensor) 4. Moving to the set height. 1. Returning the carriage to the Y-original point. 2. Upping the station (cap motor drive) If the station original point detection fails, the system is brought to down.(ERROR45) Notice If an error occurs in each original point detection at maintenance open, inputting of [ENTER] causes retry operation. Also, FUNCTION features can be operated. ( [FUNCTION] effective)
2 Wiper original point 3 Y-original point *2 4 Head height original point *1, *2 5 Cap
*1 The position encoder is tested with up/down operation of the head. If the head height original point detection fails, the system is brought to down. (ERROR53) *2 Retry operation is not conducted even at the Maintenance Open.
2-1-3.
Set Up
Machine Configuration
The following required resources are checked.
<Model determination>
No. Item 1 HDC connection determination
2 Head connection determination 3 Head memory check 4 SDRAM check
Content A normal HDC substrate is determined based on configuration results of HDC 1 ~ 4. When configuration of HDC 1 is not completed, a HDC error (ERROR09) is displayed and the system is brought to down. An effective head connection is determined.
Contents of the head unit memory are checked. If size of SDRAM is 0, ERROR203 (SD-RAM size) is displayed and the system is brought to down. If required SDRAM for the device is not installed, ERROR203 is displayed again at LOCAL REMOTE transition after starting or at starting drawing.
Note: Normal start is executed when all results of check 1~3 above mentioned are normal, and ERROR202 (Device configuration) is displayed when an error is detected. Inputting [ENTER] during ERROR202 displaying causes execution of the following processes. Diagnosis results Head (HDC) determined to have an error in 1 ~ 3 is displayed. Restricted use Head (HDC) determined to have an error in 1 ~ 3 is separated and setting of device start is conducted only with effective heads. Control/Not control is selected on a head determined to have an error. A head selected as Not control is displayed with X in function MAINTENANCE HEAD SELECT, and it is not controlled actually. Setting of restricted use is not stored and the machine configuration determination is always executed at starting.
<Required RAM size> 1GB (2 SDRAM boards in the expansion slot)
2- 3
JV5-130S/160S
I/F Board Detection

Detection of existence of I/F board and its type (USB2.0 / IEEE-1394: option). A type of connected I/F board can be known with the guidance function. When I/F board is not connected, No I/F Board Error (ERROR21) is displayed. The error is displayed again at LOCAL REMOTE transition, and transition to the REMOTE is not executed.
2-1-4. Media Detection

Media width and media thickness are detected.
<Media detection operation sequence>

No. Item 1 Media right end detection 2 Media thickness detection Content After moving the carriage to the media detection position, media right end is detected. (media sensor) 1. Measuring distance of media non-existing part (cutter encoder detection) 2. Measuring distance of media existing part (cutter encoder detection) 3. Media thickness calculation (media existing part - media non-existing part = media thickness) 4. Moving the carriage to the head up/down position 5. The head height is re-calculated based on the media thickness and adjusted to the selected gap of USER TYPE automatically. Notice Up the lever to stop the detection. Up the lever to stop the detection.
* Media thickness 0.0mm:ERROR50 Media thickness detection failure: Input media thickness. (ERROR is displayed after cap ON) Set value: 0.1~1.0mm (unit: 0.1 mm Default 0.1 mm) (Input value is cleared by lever UP) After inputting the media thickness, though the sequence starts from 1, the media thickness detection is skipped. * At cutter control error, the system is brought to down. (ERROR49) or (ERROR59) 3 Media left end detection 1. After moving the carriage, media left end is detected. (media sensor) 2. After measuring the distance between the left end and the right end, media width is calculated (linear encoder)
Up the lever to stop the detection.
4 Media length inputting
* During carriage moving of the media width detection, the linear encoder is tested. If an error is detected, drawing is disabled. (ERROR8) [ERROR8 detailed information] DIRECTION: of counter of the linear encoder is wrong COUNT: Count number of the linear encoder is error SENSOR: Count failure * When the media width can not be detected, ERROR50. (Up the lever to release) Returning the carriage to the Y-original point and cap ON. * Distance accuracy adjusting is automatically executed in the media detection. When MEDIA RESIDUAL of the MAINTENANCE function is set to ON and media return end detection failed, input media length. Set value: 1 ~ 500m (unit:1m)
2- 4
Operation Principle
2-1-5. Sequence of Maintenance Function

CARRIDGE OUT
<CARRIDGE OUT operation sequence>
No. 1 Start Item
1. Cap OFF 2. After moving the carriage to the maintenance position, wiper-ON
Content
Notice
2 Maintenance 3 End
and servo motor-OFF. No action during the maintenance. (Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of maintenance end.) Wiper-OFF and after moving the carriage, initial operation (origin point detection)
Note : In order to avoid dehydration of nozzle surface and inside of the cap, a warning beep is made every 30 seconds. (Only at maintenance closing)
WIPER EXCHANGE
<WIPER EXCHANGE operation sequence>
No. 1 Start Item
Content
Notice
2 Maintenance 2 3 End
and servo motor-OFF. No action during the maintenance. (Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of maintenance end.) Wiper-OFF and after moving the carriage, initial operation (origin point detection)
Note : After finishing, wiping execution number of times of running parameter is cleared. In order to avoid dehydration of nozzle surface and inside of the cap, a warning beep is made every 30 seconds. (Only at maintenance closing)
NOZZLE WASH
<NOZZLE WASH operation sequence>
No. 1 Start Item
Operation content
Notice
2 Maintenance (Wiper) 3 Maintenance (Nozzle wash)
4 Maintenance (End)
No action during the wiper cleaning. (Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of wiper cleaning end.) 1. Wiper OFF 2. The pump tube is locked and a message of Fill the liquid. is displayed. (Waiting for inputting of [ENTER] ). 3. Input being left time. (Waiting for inputting [ENTER] ) Set value: 1 ~ 99 min (time unit: 1 min) 4. After moving the carriage and initial operation (original point detection), no action for designated time. 1. Execution of cleaning. 2. End
3. Pump tube is locked.
and servo motor-OFF.
2- 5
JV5-130S/160S
DISWAY WASH
Cleaning of ink discharge path. Operation sequence is as the following.
<DISWAY WASH cleaning operation sequence>

No. 1 Start Item
1. Cap OFF 2. Moving the carriage to the maintenance position, wiper ON, servo
Operation content
Notice
2 Maintenance (Nozzle wash) 3 End
motor OFF. The following operations are repeated until [ENTER] is input. 1. Pump tube lock 2. 10 seconds No action 3. 5 seconds dry suction 1. 30 seconds dry suction 2. Execution of initial operation (original position detection)
CUSTODY WASH
NOZZLE WASH and DISWAY WASH above mentioned are executed in series.
PUMP TUBE WASH

Cleaning of ink suction pump. Cleaning ink cap, ink discharge path and inside of tube of ink suction pump with driving the cleaning fluid suction pump. When cleaning fluid is not filled, or warning arises in cleaning fluid tank or waste ink tank, the cleaning is not executed.
<PUMP TUBE WASH operation sequence>

No. Item 1 Start 2 Cleaning
3 End
Operation content Cap OFF. Drive cleaning fluid suction pump and ink suction pump for 10 seconds Cap ON to end.
Notice
WIPER WASH
Cleaning of the wiper. When cleaning fluid is not filled, or warning arises in cleaning fluid tank, the cleaning is not executed.
<WIPER WASH operation sequence>

No. Item 1 Start 2 Wiper cleaning
3 Maintenance
4 End
Operation content Placing the wiper in a wiper box (wiper sensor monitoring) Open the wiper cleaning valve to drop cleaning fluid on the wiper. (valve open time is not decided) 1. Cap OFF. 2. After moving the carriage to the maintenance position, wiper-ON and servo motor-OFF. 3. No operation at wiper cleaning. (Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of maintenance end.) After wiper OFF and carriage moving, initial operation (original position detection).
Notice
2- 6
Operation Principle
CR.MAINTENANCE
Execution of carriage maintenance (cleaning in the vicinity of head)
<CR.MAINTENANCE operation sequence>

No. 1 Start Item
1. Cap OFF 2. Move he carriage to the maintenance position in the left end, servo
Content
Notice
2 Maintenance 3 End
motor OFF. No action during the maintenance. (Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of maintenance end.) Move the carriage, and execute initial operation (original position detection)
HD.MAINTENANCE
The following maintenance items of head are executed.
FILL UP INK
Select a head to fill ink
<FILL UP INK operation sequence>

No. 1 Start
2 Filling 3 End
Item
Select a head to be filled Set value: 1234, 12, 34 Filling is not executed when a warning arises in waste ink tank. Open cartridge valve and drive ink suction motor. The operation is stopped when a warning is detected in ink cartridge during the filling. Stop the pump motor.
Content
Notice
Use a cartridge having smaller residual ink quantity.
2- 7
JV5-130S/160S
DISCHARGE&WASH
Ink in head, damper and tube is discharged to execute cleaning.
<DISCHARGE&WASH operation sequence>

No. Item 1 Preparation 2 Ink discharging Operation content Selection of a head to be discharged and cleaned. 1. Taking out cartridges (all slots) (Cartridge sensor monitoring) 2. Discharging ink (Ink suction motor driving) If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed. (waste ink tank sensor monitoring) Cleaning 1. Inserting cleaning fluid cartridges (all slots) (Cartridge sensor monitoring*1) 2. Cleaning inside of tube. (Opening cartridge valve, ink suction motor driving) If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring) 3. Head vibrating operation (Y-motor) is executed. Discharging of cleaning 1. Taking out cleaning cartridges (all slots). fluid (Cartridge sensor monitoring) 2. Discharging cleaning fluid (ink suction pump motor driving) If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring) Repeating 3~4 are executed again. Operation selection [ ] WASH : No.3 4 are executed again [ ] COMPLETED : (to next No.) Confirmation of [ ] No : to No.9 (End) maintenance cleaning [ ] Yes : (to next No.) fluid discharge Maintenance cleaning See the next item, Maintenance cleaning fluid fill/discharge fluid discharge operation sequence End (When cleaning is executed, the state is Not-filling at discharging ink.) Notice
Cartridge valve is closed.
Cartridge valve is closed.
5 6 7 8 9
*1 As an IC chip is not placed in a filling liquid cartridge, it is recognized that IC chip read error means normal.
Maintenance cleaning fluid fill/discharge

<Cleaning fluid filling operation sequence>
No. 1 Start Item
Dedicated cleaning fluid for WIPER WASH and PUMP TUBE WASH is filled.
Operation content Cleaning fluid suction (ink suction motor, cleaning fluid suction motor driving) If a warning arises in the cleaning fluid cartridge, filling is not executed. (cleaning fluid cartridge sensor monitoring) If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, filling is not executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring) 1. Pump stop. 2. Cleaning fluid suction pump blocked 3. Cartridge valve open (until cleaning fluid is filled in the wiper cleaning valve) Notice
2 Filling
Note: At discharging 1. Remove a cartridge 2. Drive the ink/cleaning fluid discharge suction pump to discharge. At filling 1. Set a cartridge 2. Drive the ink/cleaning fluid suction pump to fill.
2- 8
Operation Principle
2-1-6. Ink System
Ink Supply Control

Ink filling method of JV5 is a suction system with roller pump, a pressure damper with a self sealing valve is used. Ink supply at drawing is a siphon supply. The sealing valve is opened by discharging pressure reduction to supply ink, and when the damper ink chamber is filled, the sealing valve is closed. The ink path pressure at carriage moving conveyed to the meniscus of head is eased by the sealing valve. Longer consecutive drawing time than conventional products and replacement of cartridges during the drawing are allowed by toggle switching of 2 cartridges for 1 supply path. During the ink end cartridge replacement, in order to avoid dehydration of ink supply system, a WARNING is displayed if a cartridge is not placed for more than 10 minutes. A supply valve is placed for each cartridge to supply ink at the supply valve OPEN. The supply valve is usually in CLOSE state, and when ink supply is necessary, the supply valve turns to OPEN state. Ink supply is conducted at discharging operation (drawing and flashing) and suction operation (cleaning and filling). The supply valve is not opened for a cartridge having an error not to supply ink. 2 types of LED (Green: control LED / Red: Error LED) are placed for each cartridge to allow a user to check a state of cartridge in visual. JV5 switches the supply valve at occurrence of INK NEAR END or INK END in the cleaning to use a cartridge having smaller residual quantity. As for details, P . 2- 17 )
see Ink wear-up cleaning ( .
Device configuration
The device configuration of ink supply path is shown below.
Fig.2-1 Ink Supply Path Diagrammic Illustration
2- 9
JV5-130S/160S
Flow of the ink supply control

The ink supply control flow can be divided as the followings.
1. 2. 3. 4. Error check of the cartridge. Selection/determination of a supply cartridge (depends on a state of the cartridge). Updating of each LED (depends on a state of the supply/error cartridge). Supply valve open/close operation of the cartridge selected in 2 with a valve operation instruction.
Error check of a cartridge

The error check of a cartridge is executed periodically (every 30 ms) to select a supply cartridge according to an error state and ink residual quantity. The supply cartridge notifies being under control with lighting the control LED (Green). The error cartridge lights/blink the error LED (Red) to urge replacement of cartridges. A valve of the cartridge indicated by lighting of the control LED is opened with a valve-open instruction. When an error occurs in a supply cartridge while the valve is opened (at drawing or at cleaning), if there is a cartridge which can supply ink, the valve is switched to continue the operation, if a supply cartridge is removed, drawing is aborted and cleaning is terminated to return to the local state.
Selection/determination of a supply cartridge

As ink is supplied by toggle switching of 2 cartridges for 1 supply path in JV5, a supply cartridge should be selected. The followings are selection conditions of a supply cartridge.
a) When there is a cartridge having an error in 1 supply path.

If another cartridge can supply, the cartridge is selected. The selection conditions depend on occurrence of an error, contents of the error and ink supply timing. The ink supply is executed at discharging operation (drawing, flushing and so on) or at suction operation (cleaning and filling).
15 )
The followings are cartridge selection conditions. As for errors, see Ink system error monitoring ( P. 2-
<Cartridge selection conditions>

Error content
Normal cartridge Cartridge near end Cartridge ink end Residual quantity 0 cartridge No cartridge InK IC * Note : Supply is effective.
Discharging operation
Suction operation
: Supply is effective when another cartridge is normal.
: Supply is not effective

* Ink IC:
NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE, Expiration:2MONTH
2- 10
Operation Principle
b) When there are plural of effective cartridges in 1 supply path.

Priority Content 1 A cartridge having smaller ink residual quantity. 2 When 1 is the same, a cartridge having closer expiration date. 3 When both 1 and 2 are the same, a cartridge having smaller slot number.
Occurrence timing of supply cartridge switching At power-on When an error occurs in the currently selected cartridge. When a cartridge superior to the currently selected cartridge is inserted. (Switching is not executed at drawing or cleaning. It is executed when returned to the local state.) Based on a) and b), effectiveness of ink supply in variety of cartridge states is shown in the table below.
<Ink supply effectiveness>
Cartridge 1
Normal cartridge Cartridge near end Cartridge ink end Residual quantity 0 cartridge No cartridge Ink IC Note : Discharge is allowed and suction is allowed.
Cartridge 2
Normal cartridge
Cartridge near end
Cartridge ink end
Residual quantity 0 cartridge
No cartridge
Ink IC
: Discharge is allowed and suction is not allowed (Near end error).

monitoring ( P. 2- 15 ).
: Discharge is not allowed and suction is not allowed (Ink end error). As for details, see Ink system error
The table below shows the switching timing of supply cartridges.
<Conditions for supply cartridge switching timing> Active side: Cartridge which is selected now
Active Non-active Normal cartridge Cartridge near end Cartridge ink end

Normal cartridge Cartridge near end Cartridge ink end Residual quantity 0 cartridge No cartridge Ink IC Note : Switch
No cartridge

Ink IC

: Switch according to the condition of priority.
: Not switched During the cleaning an operation may not follow the conditions above. As for details, see Ink wear-up cleaning ( P. 2- 17 ).
2- 11
JV5-130S/160S
Cartridge LED
Lighting/blinking of 2 types of LED informs cartridge states to show the timing of replacement. When the Control LED (Green) lights : At supplying When the Error LED (Red) lights/blinks : Occurrence of an error Lighting/blinking conditions for each LED are shown in the table below.
<Conditions for lighting/blinking of LED>
LED Control LED (Green) State Not Supply cartridge is not selected light Blinking Light At selecting a supply cartridge At ink wear-up cleaning (See Ink wear-up cleaning ( P. 2- 17 )) Not At normal state light Blinking Occurrence of an error (Blinks at occurrence of the following errors). Cartridge near end Cartridge ink end 1 months passed after ink expiration date Light Occurrence of an error (Lights at occurrence of the following errors) Residual quantity 0 cartridge No cartridge Ink IC* NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE, Expiration:2MONTH
Error LED (Red)
* Ink IC:
Examples of cartridge switching and LED operation patterns are shown in the table below.
<LED operation pattern>
Event
Online drawing start No problem on both cartridge Cartridge 1 Cartridge near end occurs Cartridge 1 Cartridge ink end occurs Cartridge 2 Cartridge near end occurs Cartridge 1 Take out to replace Cartridge 1 Set a normal cartridge Cartridge 2 Cartridge ink end occurs Online drawing end
Valve operation
Cartridge 1 valve open Not changed Switched to cartridge 2 Not changed Not changed Not changed Switched to cartridge 1 Close all supply valves
Cartridge 1 Control Error LED LED

Light Light Light Light Blink Blink Blink Light
Cartridge 2 Control Error LED LED

Light Light Light Light Blink Blink Blink Blink Blink
2- 12
Operation Principle
Open/close instruction for supply valve

Generally, a supply valve is in the CLOSE state, and OPEN is instructed when ink supply is necessary. Timing of open/close instruction is shown in the table below.
<Supply valve operation instruction timing>
Timing
Before execution After execution Cleaning/filling Before execution After execution Wash Before execution After execution Before drawing operation Before Capping Replacement of supply cartridges during ink supplying At occurrence of an system error At power-off Note : Operation instruction Flushing
Supply valve operation instruction OPEN CLOSE

2- 13
JV5-130S/160S
Cartridge Control
2 ink cartridges are used per 1 supply system (1 nozzle row), total 16 cartridges can be loaded. Supply cartridge is always 1 per 1 supply system, and a cartridge having smaller residual quantity is used first with toggle switching. LED (Green, Red) of each slot indicates cartridge states shown below.
<Cartridge states indicated by LED>
Green LED Light Supply cartridge Red LED Blink INK END, INK NEAR END, Expiration:1MONTH Light Ink IC warning*1, Residual quantity 0 cartridge*2, No cartridge *1 Ink IC warning: Errors related PIC such as NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE and Expiration:2MONTH. *2 Residual quantity 0 cartridge: A cartridge having no residual quantity after execution of the ink wear-up cleaning (a function to conduct cleaning with preferentially using a cartridge having NEAR END or INK END error).
Switching of supply cartridges occurs under the conditions shown below.

INK END during the drawing INK NEAR END during the filling Ink IC warning When a cartridge is taken off. Ink wear up cleaning
If switching in 1 supply system is impossible, a warning occurs in currently used supply cartridge is displayed. The followings are relations between warnings and operations.
Local/Remote idle warning display (state of supply system unit) NEAR END Guidance function warning display in detail (state of cartridge unit) INK NEAR END INK END NO CARTRIDGE NON-ORIGINAL INK WRONG INK IC Kind of INK Color of INK WRONG CARTRIDGE Expiration:2MONTH Expiration:1MONTH Expiration Cleaning Filling Drawing
*1
INK END
!CAR
*2
*1 Transition to the LOCAL mode is executed after each completion of drawing. *2 In case of a month next to the ink expiration month, transition to the LOCAL mode is executed after each completion of drawing.
2- 14
Operation Principle
Ink system error monitoring

Operation at occurrence of an ink system error
Error check on ink system/cartridge is executed periodically (every 30 ms), and operation is restricted according to the error state. Error contents/operation restrictions are shown in the table below.
<Ink system error>
P r i o r i t y
Ink system error

Waste ink tank Initial filling is not executed
Executions at error CL/ Head Pump Filling Drawing cleaning cleaning
Error contents
No waste ink tank or the waste ink tank is full. Initial filling is not executed. Errors occurred in both cartridges and drawing & suction operation can not be executed. Errors occurred in both cartridges and drawing & suction operation can not be executed. Returns to the local state at each completion of 1 file drawing. Waste ink tank is almost full. Returns to the local state at each completion of 1 file drawing. Cartridge is not installed. An error related to the cartridge IC occurs. Ink supply is disabled. Ink in the cartridge is used up. Ink supply is disabled. Quantity of ink in the cartridge reached to the predetermined amount. Ink supply is disabled (CL can be used). The near end sensor detection board detects the state close to ink end. Can be used for ink supplying at drawing or CL. 1 months passed after ink expiration date. Urging execution of nozzle cleaning. The number of usage times of a wiper exceeds the predetermined replacement number. Cleaning fluid cartridge is not installed. Troubles on the ink cleaning fluid cartridge. The cleaning fluid cartridge is empty. Ink expiration of limitation period.
H Ink end error Ink near end error A waste ink tank is FULL soon now. No cartridge Ink IC * Residual quantity 0 cartridge Cartridge ink end Cartridge near end 1 months passed after ink expiration date Announcement of nozzle cleaning execution Wiper replacement WashLiquidCart.NONE L Cleaning fluid cartridge Wash Liquid END Ink expiration of limitation period. * Ink IC:
NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE, Expiration:2MONTH
2- 15
JV5-130S/160S
Ink residual quantity control

Residual quantity of cartridge ink is calculated by subtracting ink consumption quantity obtained by calculation of number of ink shot times of drawing and flashing and ink suction amount by cleaning and filling from the ink residual quantity. When ink residual quantity is updated, writing to the ink IC chip is executed. A cartridge error is issued according to the residual quantity.
Calculation of ink consumption quantity

The followings are calculation of ink consumption quantity at drawing, cleaning etc.
a) At drawing and flashing (ink discharging)

Ink consumption quantity at ink discharging is calculated with counting the number of ink shot times.
In JV5, as each dot size is counted at unit of each nozzle array, Small, Middle, Large, smaller error between actual measured value and calculated value can be expected.
b) At cleaning and filling (ink suction)

<Ink consumption quantity at ink suction>
Type
Soft cleaning Normal cleaning High power cleaning Maintenance filling Initial filling Main suction Cobble filling Initial filling Main suction (At replacement) Cobble filling
Ink consumption quantity at each operation is shown in the table below.

Ink consumption quantity in 1 supply path [cc] 0.4 1.1 8.3 33.7 69.2 15.7 69.2 15.7
Updating of ink residual quantity

The ink residual quantity is updated at the following timings, and written in the ink IC chip.
<Ink residual quantity updating timing>
Conditions When ink is consumed by drawing or flashing. Mainly at capping after completion of drawing. At completion of cleaning and filling operation Ink is consumed by cleaning and filling. Cartridge residual quantity at using main suction is updated. When the following events occur at drawing and cleaning or Ink consumption quantity until just before the events shown in the left is updated. filling. Cover OPEN Lever UP Media end When the following errors occur at drawing. Updated just after occurrence of the error not waiting for writing at the capping pre-operation. Cartridge near end Update before replacing of cartridge during the drawing. Cartridge ink end Cartridge error Updating timing At pre-capping operation
2- 16
Operation Principle
Errors related to ink residual quantity

Errors related to ink residual quantity are shown in the table below. <Errors related to ink residual quantity>
Item Cartridge near end Content Error arising timing:Residual quantity detection by the near end detection board. Set value of each cartridge is as the followings. 220 cc cartridge: 20 cc 440 cc cartridge: 40 cc Restrictions after arising of an error: Initial filling is not allowed (drawing and cleaning is allowed). Error arising timing:Arising at consumption of predetermined quantity after the near end detection. Restrictions after arising of an error:Drawing and initial filling are not allowed (cleaning is allowed). Error arising timing:Arising at residual quantity 0 after arising of ink end. This error may arise only after cleaning by the ink wear-up cleaning. Restrictions after arising of an error: Drawing, initial filling and cleaning are not allowed. Error arising timing:Arises when the ink end does not arise even if ink consumption quantity exceeds about double of ink cartridge capacity*. Restrictions after arising of an error: Drawing, initial filling and cleaning are not allowed.
Cartridge ink end
Cartridge error
* Arises at 220cc cartridge: 400cc, 440cc cartridge: 800cc.
Ink wear-up cleaning

The purpose of this cleaning is subduing ink consumption of a normal cartridge by using residual ink of a cartridge having Cartridge near end error or Cartridge ink end error by priority. When one cartridge is normal at starting of cleaning, residual ink side is sucked and after suction, switched to the normal cartridge to continue cleaning. When residual ink is used up (soft counter), Residual quantity 0 cartridge error is arisen to disable the cartridge.
Ink wear-up cleaning control is only effective in the normal cleaning, and it can not be executed at other cleanings or at initial filling.
2- 17
JV5-130S/160S
Ink Suction and Discharge Control

Outline of control
Suction and discharge of ink is driven by roller pumps (ink suction pump), 1 pump is allocated to every 2 heads. Suction and discharge are executed at each pump (at each head is impossible because of the configuration). 2 sensors in the waste ink tank prevent ink troubles caused by an installation miss, ink over flowing and so on. At sensor detection, operations conducting ink discharging such as drawing, cleaning, filling and so on, are restricted. In order to avoid clotting of ink in an waste ink path tube from inside of a cap to the waste ink tank, automatic cleaning mechanism (pump tube cleaning) is equipped. An exclusive pump sucks cleaning fluid from installed cleaning fluid tank to clean inside of the tube (Executed at Standby in Power ON or Sleep in Power OFF.) In order to avoid clotting of ink adhered on a wiper, a wiper cleaning mechanism is equipped. Cleaning fluid is supplied on the wiper at a solenoid for wiper cleaning OPEN.
Device configuration
The device configuration of ink suction and discharge is shown in a diagrammic illustration below.
2 ink suction pumps 2 cleaning fluid suction 1 cleaning fluid cartridge
Head 1 Cap 1
Head 2 Cap 2
Head 3 Cap 3
Head 4 Cap 4
Cartridge PIC Cartridge sensor Ink near end sensor 1 supply valve Solenoid for wiper cleaning
c l e a n i n g
F l o w o f
c l e a n i n g
F l o w o f
c a r t r i d g e
Ink suction pump 1
Cleaning fluid suction pump 1
Cleaning fluid suction pump 2
C l e a n i n g f l u i d
Ink suction pump 2
Supply valve
Flow of ink
Flow of ink
Solenoid for wiper cleaning
To waste ink tank
To waste ink tank
Fig.2-2 Diagrammic illustration of Ink Suction and Discharge Path
2- 18
Operation Principle
Initial Filling
At device starting, when ink is not filled, initial filling id conducted. Operation sequence is as the following.
<Initial filling operation sequence>
No. Item 1 Selection of ink type
2 Selection of number of colors 3 Filling of filler liquid
Content A set value is selected among values shown below. Set value: ES3 Sol, HS Sol A set value is selected among values shown below. Set value: 4-Color (MCYKKYCM), 6-Color (MCcKYCMm) Insert a filler liquid cartridge in a slot to be sucked (As 8 filler liquid cartridges are initially attached, use those cartridges with swapping in order of odd number slots even number slots.)
1.
Suction to a coupler (odd number slots): Insert filler liquid cartridges into odd number slots (x8) and suck the liquid to the coupler. Sucking the liquid to the damper (head) (even number slots): Taking out filler liquid cartridges in odd number slots and insert them into even number slots (x8), suck the liquid to the damper (head).
4 Cleaning fluid filling
If there is an occurrence of warning* in a filler liquid cartridge, suction is not conducted. If there is an occurrence of warning in waste ink tank, suction is not conducted. If a warning related to waste ink tank is detected during sucking, sucking is stopped and the filler liquid sucked again. Inserting ink cartridges into all slots and ink filling is conducted.
1.
Filling to the coupler In case of cartridges in the same supply system, valves are opened in order of 2 1, ink is filled to the coupler. Filling to the damper (head). If a warning occurs in the ink cartridge, filling is not conducted. If a warning occurs in the waste ink tank, filling is not conducted. If a warning related to the cartridge occurs during filling to the coupler, filling is stopped and ink filling is executed again.
2.
5 Cleaning fluid filling
If a cartridge warning occurs during filling to the damper (head), filling is continued with replacing cartridges. Filling is stopped when ink supply fails in one supply system. If a warning related to the waste ink tank is detected during the filling, sucking is stopped and ink filling is started again. Filling of exclusive cleaning fluid for wiper cleaning, pump tube cleaning. Insertion of the cleaning fluid cartridge into a slot is confirmed and filling is conducted. If a warning occurs in the cleaning fluid cartridge, filling is not conducted. If a warning occurs in the waste ink tank, filling is not conduct.
* As an IC chip is not placed in a filling liquid cartridge, it is recognized that IC chip read error means normal.
2- 19
JV5-130S/160S
2-1-7.
Nozzle Missing Detection (NCU) Function
This is a function to detect nozzle missing during drawing or after cleaning using the nozzle check unit. Selection of conduct/not conduct the nozzle missing detection is set with NOZZLE CHECK of NCU function. When nozzle missing is detected, a check pattern having predetermined nozzle interval is discharged to the nozzle check unit to check nozzle missing. When the number of missing nozzles exceeds the set standard value (Set in NG JUDGEMENT of the NCU Function (p.2-23)), a result of the nozzle check is NG, and a recovering operation selected in NG ACTION of the NCU function is executed. Operation flows at the nozzle detection are shown in p.2- 21 and p.2- 22. As for details of each setting related to the nozzle missing detection function, refer to the NCU Function ( p.2-23).
2- 20
Operation Principle
Nozzle missing detection No END Nozzle check effective? Yes Missing nozzle qty. in 1 supply system is more than the judging value ? No Missing nozzle qty. in all supply system is more than the judging value ? No END Yes
Yes No
NG ACTION (DURING THE DRAW) =CONTINUE? Yes 1
NG ACTION (DURING THE DRAW) =STOP? Yes Drawing stop END
No Cleaning NG ACTION (DURING THE DRAW) = Yes CLEANING&CONT. ? No Nozzle check
Cleaning success? No Yes Cleaning retry? No Drawing stop END

Fig.2-3 Operation at Nozzle Missing Detection 1/2
Yes Missing nozzle qty. clear
2- 21
JV5-130S/160S
1 Missing nozzle qty. in 1 supply system is more than the judging value ? No Missing nozzle qty. in all supply system is more than the judging value ? No END Yes
Yes
NG ACTION (AFTERtheDRAWend) =CONTINUE? Yes
No
NG ACTION (AFTERtheDRAWend) =STOP? Yes Drawing stop END
No Cleaning NG ACTION (AFTERtheDRAWend) = CLEANING&CONT. ? No Nozzle check
Drawing continue END
Yes
Cleaning success? No Yes Cleaning retry? No Drawing stop END

Fig.2-4 Operation at Nozzle Missing Detection 2/2
Yes Missing nozzle qty. clear
Drawing continue END
2- 22
Operation Principle
NCU Function
Details of the nozzle missing detection function (nozzle check unit) are set.
<NCU function setting items>
Item NOZZLE CHECK Content Setting ON/OFF of nozzle missing detection. Set value: ON, OFF (Default: ON) NG DURING Setting of operations when nozzle missing NG is determined during the drawing. ACTION THE DRAW Set value CONTINUE: The drawing is continued (Default) CLEANING&CONT: The drawing is restarted after the cleaning. CLEANING&STOP: Nozzle recovery by cleaning is executed If failed, the drawing is not restarted STOP: Drawing is stopped
Pressing [FUNCTION] at item selection in CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP, the Detail Setting of Cleaning operation starts. CLEANING TYPE:Set a type of cleaning (CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP) Set value: NORMAL, SOFT, HARD (Default: NORMAL) RETRY COUNT*:No. of cleaning re-try is set (CLEANING&STOP) Set value: 0 ~ 3 (Default: 3) Setting of an operation after completion of 1 file drawing at the Nozzle missing NG determination. Set value CONTINUE: The drawing is continued (Default) CLEANING&CONT: The drawing is restarted after the cleaning. CLEANING&STOP: Nozzle recovery by cleaning is executed If failed, the drawing is not restarted STOP: Drawing is stopped
AFTER the DRAW end
Pressing [FUNCTION] at item selection in CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP, the Detail Setting of Cleaning operation starts. CLEANING TYPE:Set a type of cleaning (CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP) Set value: NORMAL, SOFT, HARD (Default: NORMAL) RETRY COUNT*:No. of cleaning re-try is set (CLEANING&STOP) Set value: 0 ~ 3 (Default: 3) NG JUDGEMENT Setting No. of missing nozzles to cause nozzle check NG. Setting contents are stored in the function parameter. CLOGG NZL/color:Standard of No. of missing nozzles per 1 nozzle raw is set. Set value: 1 ~ 180 (Default: 10) CLOGG NZL/ALL:Standard of No. of total missing nozzles is set. Set value: 1 ~ 180 (Default: 10) COND. INDICATION operation state of NCU is displayed. (at operation / at being separated) Pressing [FUNCTION] at operation state displaying, an NCU related error presently occurs is displayed. If plural of errors are occurring, the display can be switched with [ ]/[ ]. Errors related to NCU ERROR116: NCU I/F error ERROR160: NCU DETECT error ERROR161: NCU current consumption on creases ERROR162: NCU current consumption abnormal ERROR163: NCU SENSOR error ERROR164: NCU FPGA error * When the RETRY COUNT is set to 3, (if the nozzle can not be recovered) max. 4 times f cleaning are executed.
2- 23
JV5-130S/160S
TEST
The following items are tested. They can be selected only at the maintenance open except for NCU detection test.
<Test Items>
Item Content NOZZLE CHK TEST Operation contents Testing whether the nozzle missing detection is normally executed. (NCU detection test) Flushing of NCU test pattern is executed, confirm that detection detail information of the nozzle check unit agrees with the pattern. There are 4 NCU test patterns as listed below. It is tested that both of missing and not missing can be detected on discharging of each nozzle. For the odd number nozzle discharge (odd number nozzle missing) For the even number nozzle discharge (even number nozzle missing) For consecution odd number nozzle discharge > even number nozzle discharge Noemal discharge (no missing)
SDRAM CHECK F-ROM CHECK At error Error (ERROR160 DETECT) is displayed. Operation contents Write/Read check of NCU SDRAM is executed. At error If data is not agreed, the check is aborted and SDRAM address and Write/Read data at occurrence of the error are displayed. Operation contents Hash check of NCU F-ROM is executed. In the check, It is confirmed that SUM value of long ward size from address 0 of FROM is a normal value, that is counted as 1, and this process is repeated to [END] input. At error Check process is aborted and an error is displayed. (When SUM value is not 00007000H) Operation contents Check whether power current consumption of LD overs the threshold. At error Over the threshold: Error (ERROR161 NCU CONSUMPTION) is displayed. Near then threshold: Warning (ERROR161 NCU EXCHANGE.) is displayed Operation contents Power source voltage of NCU (5V) is checked. At error Error (ERROR162 NCU LINE VOLTAGE) is displayed. Operation contents Sensor test of NCU is executed. At error At error detection : Error (ERROR163 NCU SENSOR DETECT) At error detection level down : Warning (ERROR163 NCU SENSOR ) Operation contents Serial communication with NCU test is executed. At error Error(ERROR116 NCU I/F 01H) is displayed Operation contents Temperature read from the thermistor at laser emission part of NCU is displayed. (A/D value is also displayed) At error
LDconsu.ELcurr. LINE VOLTAGE LD&SensorTEST SERIAL CHECK LASER TEMP.CHK
* As it is assumed that tests are executed in a state that there is no nozzle missing, it is required that no nozzle missing is confirmed by drawing a nozzle check pattern beforehand.
2- 24
Operation Principle
NCU LD RESET
Initialising LD current consumption value. Current value increases gradually according to the operation of NCU. Initial value of the current value is stored in the device and when the value exceeds the predetermined value, the error (ERROR161) to urge the user to replace the LD sensor unit with a new one is displayed. If LD current consumption value exceeds 109% of the initial value: ERROR161 NCU EXCHANGE NCU can be used If LD current consumption value exceeds 110% of the initial value: ERROR161 NCU CONSUMPTION NCU can not be used
This function is effective only at the MAINTENANCE OPEN, and required to be executed at replacement of LD sensor units. The4 NCULD reset should be executed in the local idling state (a state that initial operation has been completed and capped). At normal end (reset complete) : RESET COMPLETION At error (reset failure) : !! RESET FAILURE !! (Make sure that the machine is in the local idling state, and then execute the reset again.)
2- 25
JV5-130S/160S
2-2. Functions
2-2-1. ADJUST Function

#ADJUST function comprises the following items executed at factory shipping or maintenance operation.
<Adjust functions>
Item
HEAD ADJUST HEAD WASH MANUALhead WASH DEFAULT SET CAPPING BasisHEADheight HEAD ID MOTOR CURRENT SERIAL No DEALER No EDGE ADJUST MEDIA ENCODER MEDIA COMP.2 EXCHANGE PARTS
Reference page Slant adjust, Stagger adjust, Dot position adjust, impact confirmation. P.3-20 Cleaning of head, damper, tube P.2-27 Manual cleaning of head, damper and tube at head replacement and so on. P.2-28 Initialization of the selection parameter P.2-28 Capping, wiping position adjustment P.3-14 Head standard height (manual) adjustment P.3-12 Head ID inputting P.2-29 Adjusting power current of X-motor, Y-motor P.2-29 Confirmation and input of device serial No. P.2-30 Confirmation and input to device dealer No. P.2-30 Adjusting margin in both sides of paper P.2-30 Decentering compensation of media encoder P.2-31 Media basic feed amount compensation P.2-31 Display and input of parts, units replacement history P.2-32 Content
2- 26
Functions
HEAD WASH
Cleaning head, damper and tube.
As it is non- filling state after the completion of cleaning, the Initial Filling ( p. 2- 19 ) or filling of corresponding head is required.
<Head wash operation sequence>

No. Item Operation content 1 Preparation Selection of a head to be discharged and cleaned. 2 Discharging of ink Taking out cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring) Discharging ink (Ink suction motor driving) If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed. (waste ink tank sensor monitoring) 3 Cleaning Inserting cleaning fluid cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring*1) Cleaning inside of tube (Opening cartridge valve, ink suction motor driving) If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring) Head vibrating operation (Y-motor) is executed 4 Discharging of Taking out cleaning cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring) cleaning fluid Discharging cleaning fluid (ink suction pump motor driving) If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring) 5 Repeating 3 ~ 4 are executed again. 6 Wiper Cleaning Cap OFF Wiper ON (after moving the carriage to the maintenance position) Waiting for wiper cleaning end ( [ENTER] pressing to start the following No.) 7 Operation Press one of a key below to select an operation. selection [ ] : Transit to No. 10 (END) [ ] : Transit to No. 8 (CONTINUE) [ ] : Transit to No. 3 (WASH) 8 Filling of shipping Insert shipping fluid cartridge (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring) fluid Fill head, damper and tube with shipping fluid (Cartridge valve OPEN, Ink suction pump motor driving). If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring) 9 Discharging of Taking out of shipping fluid cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring) shipping fluid Discharge shipping fluid (with leaving appropriate amount) (Cartridge valve OPEN, Ink suction pump motor driving) If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring) 10 Operation Press one of a key below to select an operation. selection [ ] : End of head cleaning (END) [ ] : Transit to No. 11 (Yes) Taking out the maintenance cleaning fluid cartridge 11 Maintenance (maintenance cleaning fluid slot) cleaning fluid discharge Discharging maintenance cleaning fluid (driving ink suction, cleaning fluid suction motor) *If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed. 12 Operation Press one of a key below to select an operation. selection [ ] : End of head cleaning (END) [ ] : Transit to No. 13 (CONTINUE) Inserting shipping fluid cartridge. (maintenance cleaning fluid slot) 13 Shipping fluid suction and Shipping fluid suction (driving ink suction, cleaning fluid suction motor) discharge Taking out of shipping fluid cartridges. (maintenance cleaning fluid slot) Discharging shipping fluid (driving ink suction, cleaning fluid suction motor) *When a warning on the ink waste tank arises, do not execute suction and discharge.
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Notice
*1 As an IC chip is not placed in a filling liquid cartridge, it is recognized that IC chip read error means normal
2- 27
JV5-130S/160S
MANUALhead WASH
At head cleaning with a syringe (after head replacement and so on), cap off to execute dry suction.
<Manual head cleaning operation sequence>
No. Item 1 Preparation
2 Suction
3 End
Operation content Select a head to be sucked. Set value: 1234, 12, 34 Cap OFF Dry suction (pressing [ENTER] to drive corresponding motor) If a warning on waste ink tank arises, filling is not conducted. (Waste tank sensor monitoring) Press [ENTER] to stop pump motor and return to 1.
1. 2.
Notice
DEFAULT SET
Setting initial value to a selected parameter.
<Default set>
No. Selection Item 1 SETUP PARAMETER Operation content Initialization of user operation setting value Set user No. to 1 Initialization of language to be used Initialization of User dot position compensation value Set to maintenance close Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Unit selection: UNIT-1~4, ALL Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question Initializing the parameter in question
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Notice Always selectable
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
MAINTE. PARAM. CUSTOM. PARAM. RUNNING PARAM. EXCHANGE PARAM. INKSYSTEMparam. INKinfor.PARAM. INKinfor.PARAM. INKSEQUENCEpara HEADunit PARAM. SERVO PARAMETER TEST PARAMETER CORRECT PARAM. ADJUST PARAM. NCU PARAMETER
Quasi-disclosure parameter (Selectable only at releasing)
2- 28
Functions
HEAD ID
Contents:Head ID input of JV-5 is automatically executed by the system. The head memory PCB Assy is equipped on the head unit Assy (M007034, IH47V Head Unit Assy), the ID information is written in the head memory Assy.
Head ID is for compensating differences of discharge amount of ink among each head. A label on which a compensation value (ID) is written is attached on a head at shipping. Storing the ID in the Parameter of JV-5 makes print quality constant.
Manual input of the ID information is required in the following cases. In a case that the ID information is not stored in the head memory PCB Assy. HEAD ID Un-Input is displayed on the panel (at the power ON) In a case that the head ID is not identical to the ID information in the PCB Assy. (when a PCB of another head is placed, for example). As the error is not displayed on the panel, taking care is required at replacing. Manual ID input is recommended if there is a doubt on agreement between the ID of a head and the ID information in the memory PCB. When the head ID is changed, never forget to turn the power OFF with the remort switch (the front side power switch) to write new ID information in the head memory. (If the power is turned OFF with the main power SW (back side), as contents of the headmemory are not updated, changing of IDs is not reflected.
MOTOR CURRENT
STOP ADJUST Contents:Adjusting of power current of X-, Y-motor. Adjust value is stored in the system parameter. X-, Y-motor power current value and corresponding D/A value are displayed.
[ENTER] :Transit to adjust mode
Key operation
[ ], [ ]:Motor selection [ ], [ ]:Change of D/A value X MOVING ADJUST/ Y MOVING ADJUST Contents:Adjust current value with driving X- or Y-motor. Current value of X- or Y-motor and corresponding D/A value are displayed. The operation sequence is as same as that of #TESTMOTOR TEST XY SERVO MOTOR. Adjust the D/A value with [ ] [ ] during the operation under designated conditions. The set value is stored at stopping with [END] .
2- 29
JV5-130S/160S
SERIAL No
Contents:Confirmation and setting of serial ID. 8 characters of alphabet and numeral (0~9, A~Z) can be input. Key operation [ ], [ ]:Change value (cursor position) [ ], [ ]:Moving the cursor (When the cursor is in the left end or the right end, key input does not work) [ENTER] :Setting [END] :Input cancel
Do not change the serial No in usual.
DEALER No
Contents:Confirmation and setting of dealer ID. 8 characters of alphabet and numeral (0~9, A~Z) can be input. Key operation [ ], [ ]:Change value (cursor position) [ ], [ ]:Moving the cursor (When the cursor is in the left end or the right end, key input does not work) [ENTER] :Setting [END] : Input cancel
EDGE ADJUST
Contents:Adjust dead space size of both left and right ends of paper Key operation [ ]:Set adjust value of L, R to default (15.0 mm). [ ]: Execute media width detection to draw an adjust pattern. [ ], [ ]:Change adjust values [END] :Input cancel Adjust value:0.0~35.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm) Input actual measurement from media end to the pattern as an adjust value. If the unit is changed to inch, convert the value to inch to adjust.
15mm Media width 15mm
Fig.2-5
Note: The set value is stored in the system parameter No.2 R GRIP, No.3 L GRIP as current parameter value + (15mm-input value).
2- 30
Functions
MEDIA ENCODER
Contents:Eccentric compensation of the media encoder is executed. When the compensation is started, the following operations are executed automatically. Used media:Using of the following cut media having more than 800mm of feed amount is recommended. 1. Photo paper 2. Glossy white 3. Media having characteristic of as firm as possible (if media above mentioned can not be obtained)
Using of media hard to feed, such as tarpaulin, is not allowed. Use cut media and not to use roll media. (Decentering compensation is interrupted by the back tension.)
MEDIA COMP.2
Contents:Basic feeding amount of media is compensated.
[ENTER] :Drawing an adjusting pattern
Key operation
[ ]: Input compensation value without drawing the adjusting pattern [END] : Complete drawing and input compensation value. Compensation value:-500 ~ 500 In actual feeding amount compensation, compensation for each media set in the SET UP function is added to this compensation value.
A pattern having width of media is drawn. Resolution is 720dpi Compensation value is too large Compensation value is too small
Fig.2-6
2- 31
JV5-130S/160S
EXCHANGE PARTS
Displaying of replacement date history of parts/unit, or registering of replacement date.
REGISTRATION
Parts replacement history is registered. Select a part to be registered and input date and part number. Effective part numbers are as the followings.
Type
Pump Cap Damper NCU sensor unit
Part number 1~4 1~4 1-A, 1-B, 1-C, ... 4-G, 4-H (combination of head number and nozzle number) Number is not input
JV-5 determines timing of replacement of above parts. When a part in question is replaced, never forget to register the replacement date. HISTORY
The latest history is displayed at stating. (Switching is allowed with [ ], [ ]) As for a head, as it is recorded automatically at first starting after replacement, registration is not required. (Confirmation of history is allowed) Layout of each part is shown in the following drawing.
Cap
Corresponding head No. is equal to cap No. Cap 1 Cap 2 Cap 3 Cap 4 ~Top View of Cap~ ~Top view of head~ Designate with head No. (1~4) and nozzle row (A~H)
Damper
G H
Pump
F.BOX
Pump 1 Pump 2
Pump 3 Pump 4
Pump1: Ink suction pump Pump2: Ink suction pump Pump3: Cleaning fluid suction pump Pump4: Cleaning fluid suction pump
~Front view of the device~

Fig.2-7
2- 32
Functions
2-2-2.
TEST Function
The test function comprises the following items executed in shipping, and the maintenance operation.
<Test function item>
Item
CHECK PATTERN PARAMETER DRAW
Content
Drawing of various type of check patterns. 100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25% (Density pattern) NOZZLE CHECK, COLOR CHART,DROP.POS CHK Drawing of parameter setting contents. SYSTEM, MAINTE, CUSTOM, RUNNING, EXCHANGE, INKSYSTEM, INKinfor., INKSEQUENCE, INK TYPE, HEADunit 1 ~ 4 (1 ~ 2 in case of 2 head model), SERVO, TEST, CORRECT, ADJUST, NCU Drawing of adjusting pattern. Operation test of various motors. X SERVO MOTOR, Y SERVO MOTOR, XY SERVO MOTOR, WIPER MOTOR, CAP MOTOR, HEADup/downMTR, PUMP MOTOR, TAKE-UP MOTOR Test of media heater TEMPERATURE, LED, SSR, POWER RELAY SW Test of head warming heater Operation Test of various fan motor, cutter, valve VACUUM FAN, VACUUM FAN, FS FAN, Y-CUTTER, WIPERwashVALVE, HDC FAN, DEOD.FAN & DRY FAN Test of various sensors SET LEVER, R.PAPER, Y-ORIGIN, STATION, WIPER, FRONT COVER, WasteTANK, HEATER POW,MEDIA JAM, INK LEAK, Interlock CABLE Test of cap sensor Test of media width sensor Test of panel SW Test of LCD 1, 2 Confirmation and setting of device time Check of various memory MAIN.SDRAM, MAIN.S-RAM, MAIN.F-ROM, BACKUP.SRAM, HEAD.EEPROM Media skew check Display of temperature around head HEAD TEMP., NOZZLE TEMP., HEAT SINK TEMP., SLIDER TEMP., SIDE TEMP. Confirmation of power source voltage. Interface check LOOP BACK, SDRAM Test of various encoders. LINEAR ENCODER, CUTTER ENCODER, MEDIA ENCODER, POSITIONencoder Test around cartridge. PACK&END SENSOR, CARTRIDGE VALVE, CARTRIDGE LED, INK-IC CHECK, SolenoidVOLTAGE Test around cleaning cartridge. PACK&END SENSOR, CARTRIDGE VALVE, IC CHECK, SolenoidVOLTAGE
Reference page
P.2-34 P.2-35 P.2-35 P.2-36 P.2-39 P.2-39 P.2-40 P.2-40 P.2-41 P.2-41 P.2-41 P.2-41 P.2-42 P.2-43 P.2-44 P.2-44 P.2-44 P.2-45 P.2-46 P.2-46 P.2-47
ALL PATTERN MOTOR TEST
HEATER TEST WARMING TEST ACTION TEST SENSOR TEST CAP SENSOR PAPER SENSOR KEYBOARD TEST LCD TEST TIMER CHECK MEMORY CHECK SKEW CHECK TEMPERATURE.CHK VOLTAGE CHECK I/F TEST ENCODER TEST INK CARTRIDGE WASH CARTRIDGE
2- 33
JV5-130S/160S
CHECK PATTERN
The following 4 types of drawing are allowed in check pattern. Procedure of pattern drawing is shown in the table below Density pattern NOZZLE CHECK COLOR CHART DROP.POS CHK
<Check pattern drawing procedure>
No. Item 1 Selection of density*2 2 Selection of resolution
3 Selection of can direction 4 Selection of No. of passes
Content ALL, 100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25% 540x 720, 540x 900, 540x1080, 720x 540 720x 720, 720x1080, 720x1440, 1440x1440 Bi-D, Uni-D
Resolution Passes(4 color) Passes(6 color) 540x720: 2,4,8,16 4,8,16,32 540x900: 5,10,20,40 5,10,20,40 540x1080: 3,6,12,24 6,12,24,48 720x540: 3,6,12,24 3,6,12,24 720x720: 2,4,8,16 4,8,16,32 720x1080: 3,6,12,24 6,12,24,48 720x1440: 4,8,16,32 8,16,32,64 1440x1440: 8,16,32 16,32,64 5 Selection of drawing size X size: 10 mm ~ paper length (unit: 10 mm) *Roll paper: 500000mm Y size: 10 mm ~ paper width (unit: 10 mm) 6 Selection of drawing 6 colors: M,C,Y,K,c,m color*1 4 colors: M,C,Y,K 7 Drawing start [ENTER] : Drawing start (waiting for key input) [TEST] : Execution of test drawing [(JOG)]: JOG operation mode Press [ENTER] to start drawing with setting the current position as the original position. [REMOTE] : Setting of high speed scan ON/OFF [END] : END of drawing
*1 COLOR CHART, DROP.POS CHK do not have these items. *2 Density pattern, NOZZLE CHECK and DROP.POS CHK do not have these items.
<Example of DROP.POS CHK pattern printing>

Feed Scan
Fig.2-8
2- 34
Functions
PARAMETER DRAW
Select a parameter to draw setting contents. Selectable parameters are as the followings. <Parameter drawing>
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Parameter SYSTEM PARAM.
MAINTE PARAM. CUSTOM PARAM. RUNNING PARAM. EXCHANGE PARAM. INKSYSTEM PARAM INKinfor.PARAM. INKSEQUENCEpara INK TYPE PARAM. HEADunit PARAM. SERVO PARAMETER TEST PARAMETER CORRECT PARAM. ADJUST PARAM. NCU PARAMETER :Standard parameter (Default selection is allowed) :Quasi disclosure parameter (Selectable only at releasing) UnitALL, 1~4 (1~2 in case of 2 head model) to draw
Selection
Notice
F/W Version, Item No., Item Name, Adjust Value, Initial Value of a selected parameter are drawn. When DISPLAY setting is JAPANESE they are drawn in Japanese, if other language is set, they are drawn in English.
Fig.2-9
ALL PATTERN
The following check patterns are drawn in the block.
Check pattern
Slant adjusting pattern Stagger adjusting pattern Y-impact position adjusting pattern (FINE Y Si/Re/Bi)
Reference page P.3-20 P.3-23 P.3-28
2- 35
JV5-130S/160S
MOTOR TEST
The following 8 motors are tested. <Motor>
Motor name
X SERVO MOTOR Y SERVO MOTOR XY SERVO MOTOR WIPER MOTOR CAP MOTOR HEADup/downMTR PUMP MOTOR TAKE-UP MOTOR
Reference page P.2-36 P.2-36 P.2-37 P.2-37 P.2-38 P.2-38 P.2-38 P.2-39
X SERVO MOTOR
Operation of X-servo motor is executed.
<X (Y)-servo motor test sequence>
No. Item 1 Speed designation Content [ ], [ ]: Speed selection set value Set value: 1 ~ 150 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) (at X-motor test) Set value: 1 ~ 1500 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) (at Y-motor test) 2 Acceleration designation [ ], [ ]: Acceleration selection Set value: 0.01 ~ 0.50G (unit: 0.01 G) (at X-motor test) Set value: 0.05 ~ 2.00G (unit: 0.05 G) (at Y-motor test) 3 Moving amount [ ], [ ]: Moving amount selection designation Set value: 1mm ~ paper length (width) (unit: 1 mm) When media is not detected X-motor: 1 mm~500000 mm 4 Cap OFF Move the station to the lowest position. 5 Move [ENTER] : Reciprocating motion in the X (Y) direction with designated conditions is repeated. 6 End [END] : Return to the motion starting position and execute capping to end. Note: During the test, heater temperature control is allowed (When HEATER key is effective). Notice [ ], [ ]: Selection of item 2~4
Only Y-moter
Y SERVO MOTOR
Operation of Y-servo motor is executed. Operation sequence is as same as that of X-motor test. (See the operation sequence above.)
2- 36
Functions
XY SERVO MOTOR
Operation test of XY-servo motor is executed.

< XY-servo motor test sequence>
No. Item 1 X speed designation
2 X acceleration designation 3 X moving amount designation 4 Y speed designation 5 Y acceleration designation 6 Y moving amount designation [ ], [ ]: Speed selection Set value: 1 ~ 150 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) [ ], [ ]: Acceleration selection Set value: 0.01 ~ 0.50 G (unit: 0.01 G) [ ], [ ]: Moving amount selection Set value: 1 mm ~ Paper length (unit: 1 mm) When media is not detected: 1 mm ~ 500000 mm press [ENTER] to start Y-motor setting [ ], [ ]: Speed selection Set value: 1 ~ 1500 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) [ ], [ ]: Acceleration selection Set value: 0.05 ~ 2.00 G (unit: 0.05 G) [ ], [ ]: Moving amount selection Set value: 1 mm ~ Paper width (unit: 1 mm) When media is not detected: 1 mm ~ Mechanical limit size
Content
Notice [ ], [ ]: Selection of item 2~4

[ENTER]: Transit to setting in the Y direction (5~) [ ], [ ]: Selection of item 5~7 [ENTER]: Transit to the following step [END]: Transit to setting in the X direction (2~)
Move the station to the lowest position. [ENTER] : The following motion is repeated with the designated conditions. (During the motion, No. of Y reciprocation is displayed.) a ) Y designated distance moving b ) X designated distance moving, Move to Y starting position 9 End [END] : Return to the motion starting position and execute capping to end. Note: During the test, heater temperature control is allowed (When HEATER key is effective).
7 Cap OFF 8 Moving
WIPER MOTOR
Operation test of wiper motor is executed.
<Wiper motor test sequence>
No. Item 1 Driving speed designation 2 WAIT designation
3 Count designation 4 Carriage state selection 5 Test start 6 Test end
Content [ ], [ ]: Selection of driving speed of the motor Set value: 100 ~ 4000 pps (unit: 100 pps) [ ], [ ]: Designating operation interval Set value: 0~60 sec (unit: 1 sec) [ ], [ ]: Designating No. of operation times Set value: CONTINUE, 1~1000 count (unit: 1 count) [FUNCTION] : Displaying carriage state at test selection menu IN :Execution at cap position OUT :Execution after carriage out [ENTER] : Driving the motor with designated conditions When CONTINUE is selected in count setting, finished with [END] Wiper is returned to the original position.
Notice [ ], [ ]: Selection of item 1~3
2- 37
JV5-130S/160S
CAP MOTOR
Operation test of cap motor is executed.

<Cap motor test sequence>
No. Item 1 Driving speed designation 2 WAIT designation Content Notice [ ], [ ]: Selection of driving speed of the motor [ ], [ ]: Selection of Set value: 100 ~ 4000 pps (unit: 100 pps) item 1~3 [ ], [ ]: Designating operation interval Set value: 0~60 sec (unit: 1 sec) 3 Count designation [ ], [ ]: Designating No. of operation times Set value: CONTINUE, 1~1000 count (unit: 1 count) 4 Test start [ENTER] : Cap OFF, carriage out, cap motor is driven with designated conditions (Moving range: Station lowest position ~Cap ON position) 5 Test end When CONTINUE is selected in count setting, finished with [END] . Cap ON to END.
HEADup/downMTR
Operation test of head up/down motor is executed.
< Head up/down motor test sequence>
No. Item 1 Driving speed designation 2 WAIT designation Content [ ], [ ]: Selection of driving speed of the motor Set value: 100 ~ 4000 pps (unit: 100 pps) [ ], [ ]: Designating operation interval Set value: 0~60 sec (unit: 1 sec) 3 Count designation [ ], [ ]: Designating No. of operation times Set value: CONTINUE, 1~1000 count (unit: 1 count) 4 Test start [ENTER] : Move the station to the lowest position, driving the head up/down motor with the designated conditions. (Moving range: Head top most position ~ Lowest position) 5 Test end When CONTINUE is selected in count setting, finished with [END] . Head is returned to the position before the test, Cap ON to END. Notice [ ], [ ]: Selection of item 1~3
PUMP MOTOR
Operation test of pump motor is executed.
<Pump motor test sequence>
No. Item 1 Pump selection Content [ ], [ ]: Pump selection (Move cursor) [ ], [ ]: Operation selection 2 Rotation direction [ ], [ ]: Pump rotation direction selection selection Set value: FORWARD, REVERSE 3 Driving speed [ ], [ ]: Select driving speed designation Set value: 100~4000 pps (unit: 100 pps) 4 Carriage/Cap state [FUNCTION] : Carriage/cap state at test selection menu is displayed selection <Carriage> IN: Execution at cap position / OUT: execution after carriage out <Cap> ON: execution with cap ON / OFF: execution with cap OFF 5 Test start [ENTER] : Cap OFF, carriage is moved to maintenance position. Pump motor is driven with designated conditions. [END] : End 6 Test end Test end Notice [ ], [ ]: Selection of item 1~3
2- 38
Functions
TAKE-UP MOTOR
Operation test of take-up motor is executed.

<Take-up motor test sequence>
No. Item 1 Test start
2 Test end
Content [ENTER] : Take-up motor is driven (Switching of winding direction, or operation stop is allowed with SW of winding device) [END] : End
Notice
HEATER TEST
Various tests of the media heater are executed.
<Heater test>
Item TEMPERATURE Content Control test of heater set temperature is executed. Temperature settings of Pre, Print, After Heater are executed to control heater. Set value (Celsius): OFF, 20 ~ 60 C (unit: 1 C After-heater is up to 70 C) Set value (Fahrenheit): OFF, 68 ~ 140 F (as converted from celsius, unit is not 1F) ON/OFF test of LED is executed. LED is controlled according to heat LED of Pre, Print, After Heater, ON/OFF designation of constant LED. ON/OFF of heater is executed. Heater is turned to ON/OFF according to ON/OFF designation of pre, print, after heater. (Heater temperature control is not conducted) Test of the heater power relay is executed. Switching the power relay SW according to the ON/OFF designation. Current temperature of the media heater is also displayed.
LED SSR POWER RELAY SW
Note1: Temperature is displayed with a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP function. Note2: A/D conversion value is also displayed.
WARMING TEST
Control test of the head warming heater ON/OFF and the power FET SW is executed.
<Warming test>
Item TEMPERATURE Content Controlling the heater temperature with the temperature setting of the warming heater (each head). Temperature and ON/OFF of each heater are displayed during the temperature control. Set value (Celsius): OFF, 20 ~ 45 C (unit: 1 C) Set value (Fahrenheit): OFF, 68 ~ 113 F (as converted from celsius, unit is not 1F) Making sure that the FET switch works normally with controlling the power FET SW according to the ON/OFF designation. Set value: ON, OFF
POWER FET SW
Note1: Temperature is displayed with a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP function.
2- 39
JV5-130S/160S
ACTION TEST
Operation of the following parts/units is tested.
<Action test>
Item VACUUM FAN
BUILTinDEOD.FAN FS FAN Y-CUTTER
WIPERwashVALVE HDC FAN DEOD.FAN & DRY FAN
Content Contents: Operation test of vacuum fan motor Set value: L.L, LOW, MID, HIGH, OFF Contents: Operation test of exhaust fan Set value: ON, OFF Contents: Operation test of flushing station fan motor Set value: L.L, Low, MID, HIGH, OFF Contents: Operation test of media cutter. Set value: UP, DOWN Operation interval of Y-cutter is set with [FUNCTION] [ ], [ ]: Operation interval setting Set value: 0 ~ 7200 sec (unit: 1 sec) [ENTER] : UP, Down is repeated with set interval Number count is displayed during the test. Contents: Operation test of wiper cleaning valve Set value: OPEN, CLOSE Contents: Operation test of HDC fan Set value: OPEN, CLOSE Contents: Operation test of dryer/exhaust fan motor. Set value: ON, OFF
SENSOR TEST
Various sensors are tested. Before starting the test, turn the servo motor and stepping motor to OFF, after finishing the test, initial operation of original position detection is executed.
<Sensor test>
Sensor SET LEVER R.PAPER Y-ORIGIN STATION WIPER FRONT COVER WasteTANK Content
State display of clamp lever sensor State display of rear paper sensor State display of Y-original position sensor. State display of station lowest position sensor State display of wiper sensor State display of cover sensor (front, maintenance LR) State display of waste ink tank full sensor/exist sensor ON/ON: Full sensor ON / exist sensor ON (waste tank exist) OFF/ON: Full sensor OFF / exist sensor ON (waste tank exist and near full) ON/OFF: Full sensor ON / exist sensor OFF (never occur in usual state) OFF/OFF:Full sensor OFF / exist sensor OFF (no waste tank or tank full) Displaying the state of heater SW State display of media jam sensor Displaying the state of ink leak sensor Displaying existence of a short circuit of the interlock cable.
LCD display ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/ON OFF/ON ON/OFF OFF/OFF
ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Always ON (OFF: short circuit)
HEATER POW MEDIA JAM INK LEAK Interlock CABLE
2- 40
Functions
CAP SENSOR
Cap sensor is tested. Cap OFF (station moved to the lowest position), state off cap sensor is displayed. ### ( *** ) ###
***
: Sensor state (ON, OFF, Error) : Sensor reading less than 0x00A4, sensor state more than 0x0200, sensor state at 0x00A5~0x01FF, sensor state
: OFF : ON : Error
Sensor reading is updated periodically (every 150 msec).

[END] : After cap ON, cap sensor ends.
PAPER SENSOR
Paper width sensor is tested. Cap OFF (station moved to the lowest position), reading of paper width sensor is displayed.
*** (@@@,$$$)
@@@ : Sensor reading at SLOP-ON $$$ : Sensor reading at SLOP-OFF ***: Difference between @@@ and $$$
Sensor reading is updated periodically (every 150 msec). [ ], [ ]:Head move [ ], [ ]:Alternately move to paper existing position and non-existing position in the right end of media. [END] :After cap ON, paper sensor ends
KEYBOARD TEST
Panel SW is tested. When a panel SW is pressed, name of the SW is displayed on LCD. When no key is pressed, NONE is displayed. When [END] is pressed, END TEST is displayed and the keyboard test ends.
LCD TEST
Characters are displayed on LCD 1, LCD 2. When the LCD Test is started, scrolling of character code of 0x21 ~ 0xFF in one line is repeated. Press [END] to stop the test.
2- 41
JV5-130S/160S
TIMER CHECK
Confirmation and setting of date and time of the device. Inputting of past date is only allowed present day -8H. Other date is an error. *Machine setting Same as the time setting Set value:20YY.MM.DD HH:MM:00 YY : 00~50 MM : 01~12 DD : 01~31 HH : 00~23 MM : 00~59 Returning to the last setting is allowed by pressing [FUNCTION] in the Date, Time Display State (not the Entering State). (However, the time elapsed after the setting change is added.)
2- 42
Functions
MEMORY CHECK
Variety of memory of the device is checked. <Memory check>
Item MAIN.SDRAM*1 Content Read/Write check of SDRAM Select insert/not insert of wait time (30sec) between data write and read. In the checking the following process is counted as 1 and repeat until [END] is input. 00000000h is written into from address 0 to all area of SDRAM. Read vacant data from address 0 to all area of SDRAM sequentially to confirm the reading meet the writing data. FFFFFFFFh is written into from address 0 to all area of SDRAM. Read vacant data from address 0 to all area of SDRAM sequentially to confirm the reading meet the writing data. Write increment data of 00010203h, 04050607h, ... FCFDFE00h into from address 0 to all area of SDRAM. Read vacant data from address 0 to all area of SDRAM sequentially to confirm the reading meet the writing data. Read/Write check of S-RAM In the checking the following process is counted as 1 and repeat until [END] is input. Write 00h in from address 0 of S-RAM, confirm that read value is 00h. Write FFh in from address 0 of S-RAM, confirm that read value is FFh. Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ...in from address 0 of S-RAM, confirm that read value agrees. Hash check of F-ROM. In the checking, it is confirmed that long ward size SUM value from address 0 of F-ROM is 0001f000H*2, that is counted as 1, the process is repeated until [END] is input.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3.
MAIN.S-RAM*1
MAIN.F-ROM
BACKUP.SRAM*
HEAD.EEPROM*1
If the SUM value is not 0001f000H, the check process is aborted and an error is displayed. Read/Write check of back up S-RAM Before starting the check, save contents of BACKUP.SRAM in F-ROM (sector 1,10). In the checking the following process is counted as 1 and repeat until [END] is input. Write 00h in from address 0 of backup S-RAM, confirm that read value is 00h Write FFh in from address 0 of back up S-RAM, confirm that read value is FFh. Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ...in from address 0 of backup SRAM, confirm that read value agrees. Read/Write check of HEAD.EEPROM Select a head unit to be checked. Before starting the checking, save contents of EEPROM in S-RAM (head unit parameter area). In the checking the following process is counted as 1 and repeat until [END] is input. Write 00h in from address 0 of HEAD.EEPROM, confirm that read value is 00h Write FFh in from address 0 of HEAD.EEPROM, confirm that read value is FFh. Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ...in from address 0 of HEAD.EEPROM, confirm that read value agrees.
1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.
Note: No. of counts is displayed during the check. *1 When data does not agrees, the check process is aborted, and memory address, write/read data at occurrence of the error are displayed. *2 As sector 1~10 used by parameter are passed, SUM value is not 0.
2- 43
JV5-130S/160S
SKEW CHECK
Skewing of media is checked. When media is not detected, an operation error (ERROR30) is displayed. Feed distance is designated to execute feeding. Feed distance: 1~500 m (unit: 1 m) During the feeding, remaining of feed distance is displayed with unit of 10mm. [END] : Feeding abort, [ENTER] : Start feeding again.
Cut jig function

[REMOTE]
After the Skew check starts, (feed distance is not designated) the following operation starts the cut jig function.
[FUNCTION]
The cut jig function repeats media cut feed with designating feed distance and number of cut times. Number of cut times is displayed in count down during cut. Feed distance: 10~10000 mm (unit: 10 mm Default: 500 mm) Number of cut times: 1~1000 count (unit: 1 count Default: 25 count)
TEMPERATURE.CHK
<Temperature check test>
Item HEAD TEMP.
NOZZLE TEMP. HEAT SINK TEMP. SLIDER TEMP. SIDE TEMP.
Content Environment temperature of head is displayed (A/D value is also displayed). Displaying of head temperature uses a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP. Nozzle temperature error check is executed. At Normal: OK is displayed At error: NG is displayed Temperature of HDC board heatsink is displayed (A/D value is also displayed). Displaying of heatsink temperature uses a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP. Temperature read from the thermistor on the slider PCB is displayed (A/D value is also displayed). Temperature read from the thermistor on the side board of device is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).
VOLTAGE CHECK
Stipulated voltage and actual voltage of each channel are displayed.
Input channel
Analog input channel 2 Analog input channel 3 Analog input channel 4 Analog input channel 5
Stipulated voltage 3.3 V 42.0 V 24.0 V 5.0 V
2- 44
Functions
I/F TEST
<Interface test>
Item LOOP BACK*1 Content Loop back test with I/F Board is executed. Operations of 1~6 are counted as 1, the process is repeated until [END] is pressed. During the check number of counts is displayed.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Write check data in REVERSE register. Read check data from CH1 data register, and check whether it agrees the written data. Write check data in REVERSE register. Read check data from CH2 data register, and check whether it agrees the written data. Write check data in REVERSE register. Read check data from STATUS register, and check whether it agrees the written data. The check prepares the following 6 types of data (size 256 kbs). (The test is conducted successively with 6 types of data per 1 path.) 00010203h,04050607h,08090A0BhFCFDFEFFh All 55555555h All AAAAAAAAh All 5555AAAAh All AAAA5555h All 55AA55AAh
MEMORY CHECK*2
Write/Read of I/F Board SDRAM (receive buffer & program area) is checked. Number of counts is displayed during the check.
*1 When data does not agree, the check process is aborted, and a path in which the error occurs (CH1/CH2/STATUS) and Write/Read data are displayed. *2 When data does not agree, the check process is aborted, and SDRAM address where the error occurs and Write/Read data are displayed.
2- 45
JV5-130S/160S
ENCODER TEST
<Encoder test>
Item LINEAR ENCODER Content Linear scale, Linear sensor are tested. Moving a carriage with designated distance (3 reciprocatings), difference of linear encoder value and Y-motor encoder value is displayed. If an error arises during the operation, the test is aborted.
Moving distance: 100 mm ~ Maximum actual operation limit (unit: 100 mm) LCD display is as the following. (M: Y-motor encoder, E: linear encoder) Moving distance: M=. E=. (unit: 0.1 mm) Difference of encoder values before moving and after moving: Mc=. Ec=. (unit: 0.1 mm) Encoder values before moving: Ms= Es= Encoder values after moving: Mm= Em= Encoder values after moving with designated distance: Mr= Er= Linear scale, Linear sensor for media thickness detection are tested. ON/OFF of Y-cutter is conducted at media exists position and media no-exists position on the platen, media thickness and reading of linear sensor are displayed. Media thickness: . mm Sensor reading value: Pr=h Mr=h (Pr: reading on platen, Mr: reading on media) Media encoder is tested. Executing media OREFEED/BACKFEED under conditions shown below, motor encoder value, media encoder value and their difference are displayed. 1 ~ 150 mm/s (Default: 60 mm/s) 0.01 ~ 0.50 G (Default: 0.20 G) 127 mm ~ paper length* (unit: 1 mm Default: 127 mm) *If paper length can not be detected 1 ~ 500000 mm Position encoder is tested Reciprocating from head top most to the lowest position, encoder values at each of starting position (Top most), position after moving (Lowest position), and end position (Top most) are displayed. After the test, head height is returned to the position before test to end. LCD display is as the following. Es=: Position encoder value at starting position (Top most) Em=: Position encoder value at position after moving (Lowest position) Er=: Position encoder value at end position (Top most) Feed speed: Feed acceleration: Feed distance:
CUTTER ENCODER
MEDIA ENCODER
POSITIONencoder
INK CARTRIDGE
<Ink cartridge test>
Item Content PACK&END SENSOR Displaying state of cartridge exist/non-exist sensor and end sensor. A slot number on which an error (No cartridge, Ink near end) is found is displayed. [2] (Example of LCD display) CARTRIDGE VALVE Checking open/close of cartridge valve CARTRIDGE LED Light/Off of cartridge LED is tested. INK-IC CHECK Ink cartridge IC is checked. In the check, IC chip data is read, number of occurrence of errors at each cartridge is displayed. SolenoidVOLTAGE Solenoid voltage is set to 24V to check whether an abnormal voltage can be detected.
2- 46
Functions
WASH CARTRIDGE
<Wash cartridge test>
Item Content PACK&END SENSOR Displaying state of cartridge exist/non-exist sensor and end sensor [ON, OFF] (Example of LCD display) CARTRIDGE VALVE Open/Close of cartridge valve is checked. IC CHECK Maintenance cleaning fluid IC is checked. IC chip data is read to be checked and the number of error occurrences is displayed. SolenoidVOLTAGE Solenoid voltage is set to 24V to check whether an abnormal voltage can be detected.
2- 47
JV5-130S/160S
2-2-3.
Special Key Function
A function executed with pressing certain key SW at starting the device, the function starts the device with the following modes. <Special key mode>
Mode F/W update mode Parameter Up/Down load mode Maintenance open mode System parameter input mode Starting operation
[REMOTE] [ ]+[ ] [REMOTE] + [FUNCTION] [ ]+[ ] or [ENTER] + [END]
+ Power ON + Power ON + Power ON + Power ON + Power ON
State after reset Keeping previous state Keeping previous state User mode
User mode
F/W update mode

Receiving ROM data from the host computer through USB2.0 I/F to update device F/W, or rewriting of ink information. Starting method: Starting with pressing [REMOTE] In JV-5, the following updates are allowed. Main board F/W (Contain NCU board F/W) I/F board F/W (USB2.0, IEEEE 1394 )
Parameter Up/Down load mode

Parameter data, log data are Up/Down loaded via USB I/F with the Host computer. Starting method: Starting with pressing [ ] + [ ]. Upload, Download is instructed by the host PC (F/W update tool) with an exclusive maintenance command.
USB I/F
Download Upload
JV-5 side
Fig.2-10
Host PC side
Maintenance Open Mode

Starts the device in maintenance open state Starting method: Start with pressing [REMOTE] + [FUNCTION] .
System Parameter Input Mode

Starts the device in system parameter input state of #PARAMETER function. This function is for initializing parameters when starting of device is disabled to start because of parameter hash error and so on. Starting method: Starts with pressing [ ] + [ ] (Or starts with pressing [ENTER] + [END] ).
2- 48
Functions
2-2-4. PARAMETER Function

PARAMETER function is a function to confirm and set parameters in the device.
<Parameter function item>
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Item SYSTEM PARAM. MAINTE PARAM. CUSTOM PARAM. RUNNING PARAM. EXCHANGE PARAM. INKSYSTEM PARAM INKinfor.PARAM. INKSEQUENCEpara INKTYPE PARAM. HEADunit PARAM. SERVO PARAMETER TEST PARAMETER CORRECT PARAM. ADJUST PARAM. NCU PARAMETER Stored place F-ROM sector 2 F-ROM sector 2 F-ROM sector 2 F-ROM sector 1 /Backup SRAM F-ROM sector 2 F-ROM sector 2 F-ROM sector 2,8,9 F-ROM sector 2,8,9 F-ROM sector 2,8,9 F-ROM sector 1 /Backup SRAMHEAD.EEPROM F-ROM sector 2 F-ROM sector 2 F-ROM sector 2 F-ROM sector 2 F-ROM sector 2 Notice
Note: While accessing F-ROM and HEAD.EEPROM, display [F-ROM WRITING] and light up BUSY LED (red). No.1~6: Default selection is allowed No.7~15:Selection is allowed only at the maintenance open
2- 49
JV5-130S/160S
2-3.
Operation Flow
2-3-1. Outline
The followings are items to be operational at the maintenance open. As for the operation flow at the maintenance close, see the operation manual.
FUNCTION
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C FUNCTION SET UP <ENT>

[ FUNCTION ] or [ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
SETUP
See p.2- 51
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C FUNCTION MAINTENANCE <ENT>

[ENTER]
MAINTENANCE
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C FUNCTION MACHINE SETUP <ENT>
[ENTER]
MACHINE SET
See p.2- 52
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C FUNCTION NCU <ENT>

[ENTER]
NCU
See p.2- 54
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C FUNCTION DISPLAY <ENT>

[ENTER]
DISPLAY Japanese English German French Spanish Italian Portuguese
<ent>
[ENTER]
DISPLAY English
*Display is switched to the selected language.
<ent>
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C FUNCTION #ADJUST <ENT>

Effective at the maintenance open. (not disclosed to users)

[ENTER]
ADJUST
See p.2- 57
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C FUNCTION #TEST <ENT>

[ENTER]
TEST
See p.2- 61
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C FUNCTION #PARAMETER <ENT>

[ENTER]
PARAMETER
See p.2- 68
2- 50
Operation Flow
2-3-2. SETUP
SETUP
[END]
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C SET UP SELECT :TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 4
[ENTER]
[1] MEDIA COMP.

PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C <ent>
[ENTER]
[END]
[1] MediaFeed SETUP <ent>

PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C
[ENTER]
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C [1]MediaFeed SETUP FEED METHOD <ent>
[ ]/[ ]
[ ENTER ]
[ ENTER ] / [ END ]
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C [1]MediaFeed SETUP SPEED SWITCHING<ent>
[ ]/[ ]
[ ENTER ]
[ ENTER ] / [ END ]
PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C [1]MediaFeed SETUP MOVEMENT TEST <ent>
[ ENTER ]
[ END ]
INPUT RANGE 127 - 50000mm [1]MOVEMENT TEST FEED LENGTH:150mm * Input of FEED LENGTH isallowed at the maintenance open
[ ENTER ]
[ END ]
[1]MOVEMENT TEST TEST START :ent
[ ENTER ]
Detecting operation
RESULT of MOV.TEST
[ END ]
RESULT of MOV.TEST
FEED ERROR : 0.2% [DIRECT]METHOD > OK 100% SPEED > OK :ent
FEED ERROR :0.5% Recommendation is specified. :ent

RECOMMENDATION
FeedMETHOD>[NORMAL] or FeedSPEED>lowered COMPLETED :ent PRE PRT POST 35C 40C 50C <ent>
]
[1] HEATER
or [ ]/[
[ENTER]
* When the feed difference is more than 0.4%, the following recommended settings are displayed. FeedMETHOD [NORMAL] Decrease feeding speed.
[ FUNCTION ]
[END]
2- 51
JV5-130S/160S
2-3-3. MACHINE SET

MACHINE SET
MACHINE SETUP DEODORIZE FAN <ent>
[ FUNCTION ] or [ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
[END]
MACHINE SETUP DRYNESS FEED <ent>

[ENTER]
[END]
MACHINE SETUP CONFIRM. FEED <ent>

[ENTER]
[END]
MACHINE SETUP TIME SET <ent>

[ENTER]
[END]
MACHINE SETUP UNIT SETUP <ent>

[ENTER]
[END]
* Test drawing and page No. can be added to the standard stamp items at the maintenance open. Stamping on the built-in drawing is also allowed other than on-line drawing.
STAMP SETUP STAMP
[FUNCTION]
MACHINE SETUP STAMP SETUP <ent>

[ENTER]
[ENTER] [END]
:OFF :ON
[END]
STAMP SETUP ITEM

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
<ent>
[ENTER] [END]
TEST DRAW: PAGE No OFF : OFF
MACHINE SETUP MACHINE NAME <ent>

[ENTER]
[END]
STAMP SETUP PRINT EXTEND
[ENTER]
<ent>
[ENTER] [END]
STAMP SETUP PRINT :ONLINE PRINT :ALL
MACHINE SETUP INFORMATION <ent>
[ENTER]
[END]
INFORMATION ERROR HISTORY <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
INFORMATION MAINTE. HISTORY <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
INFORMATION PRT.modeHISTORY<ent>
[ [ FUNCTION ] or [ ]/[ ] ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
INFORMATION LIST
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
* Confirmation of FPGA version is also allowed in the maintenance mode.

JV5-160S V1.00 JV5-160S V1.00 USB-I/F V1.00 MRL-III V1.00
[ENTER] / [ ]
INFORMATION VERSION
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
[END] / [
FPGA-PDC V1.00 FPGA-HDC V1.00
MACHINE SET 2/2

MACHINE SETUP MRL COMMAND <ent>
[ENTER] [END]
See p.2- 53
2- 52
Operation Flow
MACHINE SET 2/2

[ ]/[ ]
See p.2- 52
INFORMATION Serial&DealerNo<ent>
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
INFORMATION EVENT LOG
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
EVENT LOG [ 0] 0823-01-01.0000.0000

[ ]/[ ]
* Registered content of the ELOG parameter is displayed in the maintenance mode for the simplicity.
]/[
EVENT LOG [ -1] 2307-01-02.0000.0000

[ ]/[ ]
EVENT LOG [-1234] 0000-00-00.0000.0000 INFORMATION

[ENTER]
REPLACE COUNTER<ent>
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER CARTRIDGE <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
* Replace counter (operation state of the JV-5) can be confirmed in the maintenance mode.
REPLACE COUNTER CART. 1 : 0 CART. 1~16 REPLACE COUNTER SCAN : 0 REPLACE COUNTER TIME : 0h REPLACE COUNTER WIPER : 0 REPLACE COUNTER HEAD 1: 0 HEAD 1~4 REPLACE COUNTER SELECT :HEAD1 HEAD1~4 REPLACE COUNTER PUMP 1: 0 PUMP 1~4 REPLACE COUNTER LENGTH : 0m REPLACE COUNTER AREA : 0m2 TIME : 0H 00M CNT : 0 TIME : 0H 00M CNT : 0 TIME : 0H 00M CNT : 0 REPLACE COUNTER CART.1 : 0 CART.1~16
REPLACE COUNTER SCAN COUNT <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER USE TIME <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER WIPING(WIPER) <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
* Set to 0 at wiper replacement. * Corresponding number of times is set to 0 at head replacement.

H1A:ALL =123,456,789 Sdot= 13,579,135 Mdot= 68,024,680 Ldot= 41,852,974 Head-A~H
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER WIPING(HEAD) <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER SHOT COUNT <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
[END]
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER PumpRotationCNT <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
* Corresponding number of times is set to 0 at replacement of the pump.
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER PRINT LENGTH <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER DRAW AREA <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER SLEEP REFRESH <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER SLEEP CLEANING <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER SLEEP TUBE WASH<ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[END]
REPLACE COUNTER INK PIC <ent>
[ENTER]
[END]
2- 53
JV5-130S/160S
2-3-4. NCU
NCU
NCU NOZZLE CHECK
[ FUNCTION ] or [ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
NCU NG ACTION
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
NCU NG JUDGEMENT <ent>

[ENTER]
[END]
NCU COND.INDICATION<ent>
[ENTER]
[END]
* The TEST MENU of NCU is added in the maintenance mode.

[ENTER]
NCU #TEST
<ent>
See p.2- 52
[END]
NCU #NCU LD RESET <ent>

( p. 2- 25) .
[ENTER]
As for the detail of NCU LD RESET
[END]
#NCU LD RESET LDcons.ELcurr. :RESET
[ENTER]
Being LD-reset PLEASE WAIT End
Normal
RESET COMPLETION
Abnormal
!! RESET FAILURE !!
2- 54
Operation Flow
NCU TEST1
(T o the previous page )
NCU NCU TEST #TEST <ent>
[ENTER]
As for the detail of TEST

[ENTER]
( p. 2- 24) .
[END]
#TEST NOZZLE CHK TEST<ent>
[END]
#NOZZLE CHK TEST SEL. : EVEN-NUM. NZL.
[ENTER]
#NOZZLE CHK TEST EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES Y-Dpi : Speed 540 : x1
[ENTER]
540dpi. x1Speed EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES [ENTER] #NOZZLE CHK TEST TEST START :ent
[ ]/[ ] [ ]/[ ]
540dpi. x1Speed EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES TEST RUNTIME PLEASE WAIT
Testing operation
#RESULT EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES Nzl-A:0 Nzl-B:0 Nzl-A ~ H
[END]
#NOZZLE CHK TEST SEL. : ODD-NUM. NZL.
[ENTER]
#NOZZLE CHK TEST ODD-NUM. NOZZLES Y-Dpi : Speed 540 : x1
[ENTER]
540dpi. x1Speed ODD-NUM. NOZZLES [ENTER] #NOZZLE CHK TEST TEST START :ent
540dpi. x1Speed ODD-NUM. NOZZLES TEST RUNTIME PLEASE WAIT

[ ]/[ ]
Testing operation
#RESULT ODD-NUM. NOZZLES Nzl-A:0 Nzl-B:0 Nzl-A ~ H
[END]
#NOZZLE CHK TEST SEL. : EVEN & ODD NZL.
[ENTER]
#NOZZLE CHK TEST EVEN & ODD NOZZLES Y-Dpi : Speed 540 : x1
[ENTER]
540dpi. x1Speed EVEN & ODD NOZZLES [ENTER] #NOZZLE CHK TEST TEST START :ent
540dpi. x1Speed EVEN & ODD NOZZLES TEST RUNTIME PLEASE WAIT
[ ]/[ ]
Testing operation
#RESULT EVEN & ODD NOZZLES Nzl-A:0 Nzl-B:0
Nzl-A ~ H
[END]
#NOZZLE CHK TEST SEL. : ALL NOZZLES
[ENTER]
#NOZZLE CHK TEST ALL NOZZLES Y-Dpi : Speed :CONT. 540 : x1 : ON
[ENTER]
540dpi. x1Speed. CONT. ALL NOZZLES [ENTER] #NOZZLE CHK TEST TEST START :ent
540dpi. x1Speed. CONT. ALL NOZZLES TEST RUNTIME PLEASE WAIT
Testing operation
#RESULT ALL NOZZLES Nzl-A:0 Nzl-B:0 Nzl-A ~ H
( Continued to next page )
2- 55
JV5-130S/160S
NCU TEST2
[ ]/[ ]
[END] SDRAM CHECK [ ]/[ ] [END] F-ROM CHECK
#TEST
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
#SDRAM CHECK TEST START
[ENTER]
:ent
#SDRAM CHECK CNT:1
~Display of Result~ NCU SDRAM ERROR address = h' WriteData=h' Read Data=h' ~Display of Result~
#TEST
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
#F-ROM CHECK TEST START
[ENTER]
:ent
#F-ROM CHECK CNT:1
NCU F-ROM CHECK ERROR ROM HASH
#TEST [END] LDconsu.ELcurr.

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
#LDconsum.EL-current TEST START :ent
[ENTER]
NCU TESTING PLEASE WAIT
Testing operation
ERROR 161
~Display of Result~
SUCCESS
#LDconsum.EL-current VALUE = .mA #TEST [END] LINE VOLTAGE

[ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
NCU CONSUMPTION #LDconsum.EL-current VALUE = .mA
<ent>
[END]
#LINE VOLTAGE TEST START
[ENTER]
:ent
Testing operation
SUCCESS
~Display of Result~
#LINE VOLTAGE VALUE = .V #TEST [END] LD&SensorTEST

[ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
NCU LINE VOLTAGE #LINE VOLTAGE VALUE = .V
ERROR 162
<ent>
[END]
#LD&SensorTEST TEST START
[ENTER]
:ent
Testing operation
ERROR 163
~Display of Result~
SUCCESS
#LD&SensorTEST SENSOR LEVEL = 255 #TEST [END] SERIAL CHECK

[ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
NCU SENSOR DETECT #LD&SensorTEST SENSOR LEVEL = 0
<ent>
[END]
#SERIAL CHECK TEST START
[ENTER]
:ent
Testing operation
SUCCESS
~Display of Result~
#SERIAL CHECK TEST START #TEST [END] LASER TEMP.CHK <ent>

[ENTER] [END]
:ent
NCU I/F nn #SERIAL CHECK TEST START
ERROR 116
:ent
#LASER TEMP.CHK TEMP.Acquisition :ent
[ENTER]
TEMP.Acquisition
PLEASE WAIT
Testing operation
~Display of Result~
#LASER TEMP.CHK 50C (1234)
2- 56
Operation Flow
2-3-5. ADJUST
ADJUST 1/2
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST #ADJUST HEAD WASH
[FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ] [FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
As for the detail of ADJUST Function

See p.2- 59
( p. 2- 26) .
<ent>
[END] [ENTER]
See p.2- 60
<ent>
[END]
#ADJUST
[ENTER] [END]
MANUALhead WASH<ent>
A head to absorb is chosen. [ENTER] MANUALhead WASH MANUALhead WASH HEAD SELECT :12.34 SUCTION START :ent
[END]
[ENTER] [END]
Abnormal
Waste ink tank error check
Normal
[FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ]
No waste ink tank, or a tank is FULL. <ENT>keyHIT is after theTANK set or exchg
[ENTER]
Replace a
waste ink tank. <ENT>keyHIT is after the TANK exchange.

[ENTER] Recovered
Being ABSORBED MANUALhead WASH COMPLETED :ent

[ENTER]
#ADJUST DEFAULT SET
[ENTER]
<ent>
SETUP PARAMETER<ent> [END] MAINTE. PARAM. <ent> CUSTOM. PARAM. <ent> RUNNING PARAM. <ent> EXCHANGE PARAM.<ent> INKSYSTEMparam.<ent> INKinfor.PARAM.<ent> INKSEQUENCEpara<ent> INKTYPE PARAM. <ent>
#DEFAULT SET
[ENTER]
SETUP PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK? :ent MAINTENANCEparameter CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER RUNNING PARAMETER EXCHANGE PARAMETER INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER INK INFOR. PARAMETER INKsequencePARAMETER INK-TYPE PARAMETER
[ENTER]
Parameter initialization
[ ]/[ ] [FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ]
#DEFAULT SET HEADunit PARAM.<ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#DEFAULT SET UNIT SELECT :ALL UNIT SELECT :UNIT-1~4

[ENTER]
HEAD UNIT-ALL PARAM. INITIALIZE OK? :ent UNIT-1~4 SERVO PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK? :ent TEST PARAMETER CORRECT PARAMETER ADJUST PARAMETER NCU PARAMETER UP:^ V:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING CAP HEIGHT = 0.0mm
[ENTER]
Parameter initialization Parameter initialization
#DEFAULT SET
[ENTER]
SERVO PARAMETER<ent> TEST PARAMETER <ent> CORRECT PARAM. <ent> ADJUST PARAM. <ent> NCU PARAMETER <ent>
#ADJUST CAPPING
[ENTER] (-20.0 - +20.0)
UP:^ V:DOWN
<ent>
[END]
#CAPPING LOWER POS. = 0.0mm
[ENTER]
LEFT:< >:RIGHT (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING CAPPING POS= 0.0mm
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
REAR:< >:FRONT (-20 - +20) #CAPPING WipwePOS(X)= 0mm
[ENTER]
UP:^ V:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING WiperHEIGHT= 0.0mm
[ENTER]
LEFT:< >:RIGHT (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING WiperPOS(Y)= 0.0mm
Being ADJUSTED
[ENTER]
PLEASE WAIT #CAPPING NCU HEIGHT = .mm

End
Height 2.0mm is [ENTER] adjusted by hand. #ADJUST #BasisHEADheight BasisHEADheight <ent> COMPLETED :ent #ADJUST HEAD ID
[FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ] [FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
#CAPPING NCU HEIGHT = 0.0mm

[ENTER] [ENTER]
<ent>
See p.2- 58
#HEAD ID SELECT SELECT
:HEAD-1 :HEAD-1~4
#HEAD ID/HEAD-1(1/2)

#HEAD ID/HEAD-1(2/2)
2- 57
JV5-130S/160S
#ADJUST MOTOR CURRENT <ent>
ADJUST 2/2
See p.2- 57
[ENTER]
#MOTOR CURRENT STOP ADJUST <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER] [V] CurrentValueDOWN
[^] CurrentValueUP X=0 Y=0 () ()
0~255
#MOTOR CURRENT X MOVING ADJUST<ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#X MOVING ADJUST S=mm/s A=.G X=mm #Y MOVING ADJUST S=mm/s A=.G Y=mm
[ENTER]
Operation start
[END]
[ENTER]
#XmovingADJUST RUN xxx () S=mm/s A=.G X=mm #YmovingADJUST RUN xxx () S=mm/s A=.G Y=mm
#MOTOR CURRENT Y MOVING ADJUST<ent> #ADJUST SERIAL No

[ENTER]
[ENTER]
Operation start
[END]
#ADJUST DEALER No
[FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ] [FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ] [FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ]
<ent>
[ENTER]
#SERIAL No
[ ]/[ ] : Value change [ ]/[ ] : Column shift [ENTER] : Setting [ ]/[ ] : Value change [ ]/[ ] : Column shift [ENTER] : Setting [ ] [ ]
<ent>
[ENTER]
#DEALER No
#ADJUST EDGE ADJUST
<ent>
[ENTER]
#EDGE ADJUST CLEAR< >PRINT #MEDIA ENCODER ADJUST START :ent

[ENTER]
Adjust pattern drawing Adjusted value clear
End of drawing /[END]
INPUT RANGE 0.0 - 35.0 #EDGE ADJUST L=15.0 R=15.0
#ADJUST MEDIA ENCODER <ent>
Automatic decentering compensation

Normal
Abnormal
0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: COMPLETED
[ENTER] [ENTER] [ ]
ORG.DETECT ERROR
ADJUST FINISHED
:ent
#MEDIA ENCODER COMPLETED :ent
ENC. COUNT ERROR
ADJUST FINISHED
#MEDIA ENCODER COMPLETED :ent
#ADJUST MEDIA COMP.2

<ent>
#MEDIA COMP.2 PRINT START
:ent
Adjust pattern drawing

[ENTER]
End of drawing / [END]
INPUT RANGE -500 - +500 #MEDIA COMP.2 VALUE =0
#ADJUST EXCHANGE PARTS<ent>
[ENTER]
#EXCHANGE PARTS REGISTRATION <ent>
#REGISTRATION PARTS :PUMP

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER] Date, PumpNo.

PUMP
INPUT ITEM
05.07.?? : No.?
#REGISTRATION PARTS :CAP

[ ]/[ ] [ ]/[ ]
[ENTER] Date, CapNo.

CAP
INPUT ITEM
05.07.?? : No.?
#REGISTRATION PARTS :DUMPER

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER] Date, HeadNo. NzlNo.

DUMPER
INPUT ITEM
05.07.?? : No.?-?
#REGISTRATION PARTS :NCUsensorUNIT

[ENTER]
[ENTER] Date
INPUT ITEM
NCUsensorUNIT
05.07.??
History indication
HEAD
#EXCHANGE PARTS HISTORY <ent>
CAP
if there is no history record

There is no HISTORY
[ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2
[ ]/[ ]
PUMP
[ 2] 06.08.15 : No.4
[ ]/[ ]
DUMPER
[ 1] 06.09.15 : No.1
[ ]/[ ]
[ 3] 06.07.23:No.3-E
2- 58
Operation Flow
HEAD ADJUST
ADJUST 1/2
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST
See p.2- 57
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
#HEAD ADJUST SLANT ADJUST

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
<ent>
#SLANT ADJUST HEAD SELECT :1234
[ENTER]
#ADJUST HEAD WASH
#HEAD ADJUST STAGGER ADJUST<ent> <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#STAGGER ADJUST HEAD SELECT :1-2 HEAD SELECT :2-3 HEAD SELECT :3-4 HEAD SELECT :ALL
[ENTER]
#SLNT ADJ./HEAD=1234 PRINT START :ent * JOG operation is allowed
[ENTER]
Adjust pattern drawing Adjust pattern drawing
#STAG ADJ./HEAD=ALL PRINT START :ent * JOG operation is allowed
[ENTER]
#HEAD ADJUST DROP.POS ADJUST<ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#DROP POS. MODE SELECT :HiSPEED SCAN SELECT :Normal-SCAN
[ENTER]
#DROP POS. Hs GAP SELECT :Low GAP SELECT :High
[ENTER]
#HEAD ADJUST DROPposCONFIRM.<ent>
[ENTER]
#DROPposCONFIRM. PRINT START :ent * JOG operation is allowed
[ENTER]
Confirmation pattern drawing

[ ]
#DROP POS. HsLg SELECT :Y BASE

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#DROP POS. Y BASE DRAW
INPUT RANGE -50 - +50 Adjust pattern #DROP POS. HsLg HsLg drawing :ent Y BASE 1-2 : 0. 0 [ENTER] End of drawing/[END] 1-3 1-4
[ ]
INPUT RANGE -50 - +50 Adjust pattern #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT drawing SELECT :DRAFT ADJUST :Y Si Y Si DRAW :ent Y Si H1-H2 : 0. 0 [ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER] End of drawing/[END] SELECT :FINE H1-H3, H1-H4 INPUT RANGE -50 - +50 Adjust pattern #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT drawing ADJUST :Y Re Y Re DRAW :ent Y Re H1-H2 : 0. 0 End of drawing/[END] [ENTER] [ENTER] H1-H3, H1-H4
[ ]/[ ] [ ] [ ]/[ ] [ ]
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT ADJUST :Y Bi

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT Y Bi DRAW :ent
[ENTER] [ ]
End of drawing/[END]
INPUT RANGE -50 - +50 #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT Y Bi H1-H1 : 0. 0
[ ]/[ ]
INPUT RANGE -50 - +50 Adjust pattern #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT drawing ADJUST :FINE Y Si FINE-Y Si DRAW :ent Y Si H1-H2 : 0. 0 End of drawing/[END] [ENTER] [ENTER] H1-H3,H1-H4 INPUT RANGE -50 - +50 Adjust pattern #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT drawing ADJUST :FINE Y Re FINE-Y Re DRAW :ent Y Re H1-H2 : 0. 0 End of drawing/[END] [ENTER] [ENTER] H1-H3,H1-H4
[ ]/[ ] [ ] [ ]/[ ] [ ]
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT ADJUST :FINE Y Bi #DROP POS. HsLg SELECT :BASIS SET
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT FINE-Y Bi DRAW :ent
[ENTER]
End of drawing/[END]
INPUT RANGE -50 - +50 #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT Y Bi H1-H1 : 0. 0
#DROP POS. BASIS SET
HsLg :ent
2- 59
JV5-130S/160S
HEAD WASH
See p.2- 57
ADJUST HEAD WASH
As for the detail of HEAD WASH

[ENTER]
( p. 2- 27) .
<ent>
Ink discharge. Remove cartridges.

[END]
MMCC YYKK KKYY CCMM
Remove all wshing liquid cartridges. 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG

Confirmation of the state
Do you discharge a mainte.wash.liquid ? No <

[ ]
> Yes [ ]
Being discharged PLEASE WAIT
Confirmation of the state Is the NG Waste tank waste ink tank normal WARNING ? (Recovered) OK [ENTER]
Is the NG Waste tank waste ink tank normal ? (Recovered) WARNING

OK
Remove a maint.wash. liquid cartridge. There is a CARTRIDGE

Confirmation of the state (Recovered) [ENTER]
It'sBeingDischarged. PLEASE WAIT
[ENTER]
Is the NG Waste tank waste ink tank normal WARNING ?

OK
state normal NG discharging? OK
Is the
End of discharge
Is the
End of discharge
Being Discharged. Please Wait
Set all washing liquid cartridges. 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG
A
WARNING
WIPER CLEANING COMPLETED :ent
>:TransLiquidAbsorbe
[ENTER] [ ] [ ]
End of discharge
Confirmation of the state NG Waste tank Is the waste ink

tank normal?
END<
OK
It is being absorbed PLEASE WAIT
(Recovered) [ENTER]
>:TransLiquidAbsorbe v: It is washed again END < >CONTINUE V WASH

[ ]
>CONTINUE [ ]
[ ]
Set a TRANS liquid cartridges. CARTRIDGE : none

Set all TRANS liquid cartridges. 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG

NG
Is the suction state normal?

OK
End of suction

OK
Remove all wshing liquid cartridges. 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG

It is being absorbed Please Wait
It is being absorbed Please Wait
NG
Is the suction state normal ?

OK
End of suction
It'sBeingDischarged. PLEASE WAIT
NG

OK
End of suction
Remove a TRANS liquid cartridges. There is a CARTRIDGE

Remove all TRANS liquid cartridges. 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG

Is the normal NG discharge state ?

OK
End of discharge

OK
Set all washing liquid cartridges. 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG

It is being absorbed PLEASE WAIT
Is the
End of discharge
Is the
End of discharge
End of discharge
Waste tank WARNING No waste ink tank, Replace a or a tank is FULL. waste ink tank. <ENT>keyHIT is after <ENT>keyHIT is after theTANK set or exchg the TANK exchange.
NG

OK
End of suction
2- 60
Operation Flow
2-3-6. TEST
TEST 1/4
#TEST CHECK PATTERN <ent>
As for the detail of TEST Function

[ENTER]
( p. 2- 33) .
#CHECK PATTERN X=123450 Y=1234 PATTERN:100% COLOR :KMCY [END] PATTERN:50% [END] 6 colors= :KMCYmc PATTERN:25% 8 colors= :KMCY1234 PATTERN:12.5% PATTERN:6.25% PATTERN:NOZZLE CHECK DPI :360x360 [ ]/[ ] [ENTER] SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:1 [ENTER] #CHECK PATTERN X=123450 Y=1234 PATTERN:COLOR CHART DENSITY :ALL
[END] [ ]/[ ] [ENTER] SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:1
[ENTER] SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:1
DPI
:360x360
[ENTER]
DPI
:360x360 Y=1234
[ENTER]
#CHECK PATTERN
PATTERN:DROP/POS CHK
X=123450
[END]
JOG operation is allowed Alternatively displayed at drawing PRE PRT AFT 35C 40C 50C [ENTER] PATTERN #CHECK PATTERN/100% DRAW :ent DRAWING
[HEATER] [HEATER] / [END] / 30sec / Error [ENTER] / [END] [REMOTE] [TEST]
PRE PRT AFT 35C 40C 50C 360x360. W1. 4P.Uni x1. H1234 0.00m AFT 50C 35C 50 )
PRE PRT 35C 40C 40C 50C ( 35 40
[ ]/[ ] : Select (Pre/Print/After) [ ]/[ ] : Adjust temperature Range PRE : OFF, 20~60 PRT : OFF, 20~60 AFT : OFF, 20~70
#CHECK PATTERN100% Hi-SPEED SCAN :OFF :ON

[ENTER] [ENTER] #TEST #PARAMETER DRAW PARAMETER DRAW <ent> SYSTEM PARAM. <ent> [END] MAINTE PARAM. <ent> [FUNCTION] CUSTOM PARAM. <ent> or RUNNING PARAM. <ent> [ ]/[ ] EXCHANGE PARAM.<ent> INKSYSTEM PARAM<ent> INKinfor.PARAM. <ent> INKSEQUENCEpara <ent> INK TYPE PARAM. <ent> [ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
TEST DRAWING
#PARAMETER DRAW DRAW(SYSTEM) :ent [END] DRAW(MAINTE) :ent DRAW(CUSTOMIZE) :ent DRAW(RUNNING) :ent DRAW(EXCHANGE) :ent DRAW(INKSYSTEM) :ent DRAW(INKINFO) :ent DRAW(INKSEQ.) :ent DRAW(INK TYPE) :ent
[ENTER] [ENTER]
PARAMETER DRAWING
#PARAMETER DRAW HEADunit PARAM. <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
#PARAMETER DRAW UNIT SELECT :ALL [END] UNIT SELECT :UNIT-1 UNIT SELECT :UNIT-2 UNIT SELECT :UNIT-3 UNIT SELECT :UNIT-4
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER DRAW DRAW(UNIT-ALL) :ent [END] DRAW(UNIT-1) :ent DRAW(UNIT-2) :ent DRAW(UNIT-3) :ent DRAW(UNIT-4) :ent #PARAMETER DRAW DRAW(SERVO) :ent [END] DRAW(TEST) :ent DRAW(CORRECT) :ent DRAW(ADJUST) :ent DRAW(NCU) :ent
[ENTER]
PARAMETER DRAWING
#PARAMETER DRAW SERVO PARAMETER<ent> TEST PARAMETER <ent> CORRECT PARAM. <ent> ADJUST PARAM. <ent> NCU PARAMETER <ent>
[ENTER]
PARAMETER DRAWING
#TEST ALL PATTERN

[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
#ALL PATTERN DRAW
:ent
2- 61
JV5-130S/160S
TEST 2/4
#TEST MOTOR TEST
( To the previous page )
[ENTER]
<ent>
See p.2- 65
[END]
#TEST HEATER TEST
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
PRE PRT AFT 35C 40C 50C [ENTER] #HEATER TEST TEMPERATURE <ent>
[ ]/[ ]
[HEATER]
PRE 35C 40C ( 35
PRT 40C 50C 40
AFT 50C 35C 50 )
[ ]/[ ] : Select (Pre/Print/After) [ ]/[ ] : Adjust temperature Range PRE : OFF, 20~60 PRT : OFF, 20~60 AFT : OFF, 20~70
PRE PRT AFT #HEATER TEST /LED 35C 40C 50C PRE PRT AFT [ENTER] ] : Select (Pre/Print/After) #HEATER TEST HEAT :OFF OFF OFF [[ ]/[ ]/[ ] : Switch (ON/OFF) LED <ent> CONST.:OFF OFF OFF
[ ]/[ ] [FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ] [HEATER]
PRE PRT AFT 35C 40C 50C [ENTER] #HEATER TEST SSR <ent>
[ ]/[ ]
[HEATER]
PRE 35C <15F> OFF
PRT 40C <1E2> OFF
AFT 50C <1F0> OFF
[ ]/[ ] : Select (Pre/Print/After) [ ]/[ ] : Switch (ON/OFF)
PRE PRT AFT PRE PRT AFT [ENTER] 35C 40C 50C 35C 40C 50C #HEATER TEST #POWER RELAY SW POWER RELAY SW<ent> ON
[HEATER] [ENTER] [END]
* Heater temperature control is cut off. Temperature and AD input value are displayed in a range of 0~100 C.
[ ]/[ ] : Switch (ON/OFF)
#TEST WARMING TEST <ent>

HD1 40 40 .
HD2 40 40 o
HD3 40 40 .
HD4 40 [C] 40:R-SW o : ON

[ENTER] IN UP/DOWN KEY.
#TEST ACTION TEST
[ENTER] IN UP/DOWN KEY.
Change condition #ACTION TEST VACUUM FAN
Change condition
<ent>
[END]
:LOW :MID :HIGH :L.L. :Poff
#ACTION TEST BUILTinDEOD.FAN :OFF [END] :ON

[ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
[ENTER] IN UP/DOWN KEY. [END]
Change condition #ACTION TEST FS FAN
[ENTER]
[ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
:LOW :MID :HIGH :L.L. :Poff [ ]/[ ]
#ACTION TEST Y-CUTTER :DOWN :UP #ACTION TEST
[ ]/[ ]
#ACTION TEST SUCK VALVE-1 :CLOSE :OPEN #ACTION TEST HDC FAN
[ ]/[ ]
#ACTION TEST SUCK VALVE-2 :CLOSE :OPEN DEOD.FAN & DRY FAN OFF OFF ON ON
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
WIPERwashVALVE:CLOSE :OPEN [ ]/[ ]
:OFF :ON
[ ]/[ ]
[ ]/[ ]
#TEST SENSOR TEST
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
#SENSOR TEST SET LEVER :OFF

[ ]/[ ]
#SENSOR TEST WIPER

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
#SENSOR TEST TAKE-UP

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
#SENSOR TEST R.PAPTER

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
#SENSOR TEST FRONT COVER

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
#SENSOR TEST MEDIA JAM

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
#SENSOR TEST Y-ORIGIN

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
#SENSOR TEST WasteTANK :OFF/OFF

[ ]/[ ]
#SENSOR TEST INK LEAK

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
#SENSOR TEST STATION

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
#SENSOR TEST HEATER POW

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
#SENSOR TEST Interlock CABLE

[ ]/[ ]
:OFF
2- 62
Operation Flow
TEST 3/4
#TEST CAP SENSOR

[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
#CAP SENSOR ON ()
#TEST PAPER SENSOR <ent>

[ENTER] [END]
#PAPER SENSOR ( , )
JOG operation is allowed
#TEST KEYBOARD TEST <ent>
[ENTER]
Indication of a name of the pushed key. #KEYBOARD TEST Key-> NONE

[END]
Test is finished. #KEYBOARD TEST [END]-> END TEST

[END]
#KEYBOARD TEST Key->[USER TYPE] Key->[INFORMAITION] Key->[ST.MAINTE] Key->[HEATER] Key->[TEST] Key->[LEFT] Key->[UP] Key->[DOWN] Key->[RIGHT] Key->[CLEANING] Key->[FEED COMP.] Key->[CLEAR] Key->[FUNCTION] Key->[REMOTE] Key->[ENTER]
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! """"""""""""""""""""
#TEST LCD TEST

[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! """"""""""""""""""""
#################### $$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$ * Displayed items are changed at predetermined interval and at 1 line unit.
####################
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! """"""""""""""""""""
#TEST TIMER CHECK
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
Push and Change ENTER key. #TIMER CHECK 2005.01.01 01:23:45
[ENTER]/[END]
[ENTER] KEY : SET UP [END] KEY : CANCEL #TIMER CHECK 2005.01.01 01:23:00
[ ]/[ ] : Shifting columns [ENTER] : Set ( Starting at 0 second)
2006.11.23 09:15 -> 2005.12.13 11:50 #TIMER CHECK :ent [ ]/[ ] : Changing values DoYou change it?
* A display after setting a future time

FUNC. It's returned before the change. [FUNCTION] #TIMER CHECK 2006.11.23 09:15:00 [ENTER]/[END]
2006.11.23 09:15 -> 2005.12.13 11:50 #TIMER CHECK DoYou return it?:ent
* Returning to the setting before previous setting is allowed. Change-1 Change-2 Return Returning to Change-2 can be allowed (returning to Change-1 is not allowed). However, elapsing time after changing to the time before changing is added.
#TEST MEMORY CHECK <ent>
[ENTER] [END]
#MEMORY CHECK CHECK:MAIN.SDRAM

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
ON:30secWaitAftWrite (SDRAM SIZE = 0.5GB) #MEMORY CHECK WAIT TIME :OFF

:ON
[ENTER]
RUNNING (SDRAM SIZE = 0.5GB) #MAIN.SDRAM CHECK COUNT= 1

(ERROR)
[END]
RESTART
MAIN.SDRAM ERROR address = h' WriteData=h' Read Data=h'
RUNNING
[END]
RESTART
#MEMORY CHECK CHECK:MAIN.S-RAM

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#MAIN.S-RAM CHECK COUNT= 1

(ERROR)
MAIN.S-RAM ERROR address = h' WriteData=h' Read Data=h'
RUNNING
[END]
RESTART
#MEMORY CHECK CHECK:MAIN.F-ROM

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#MAIN.F-ROM CHECK COUNT= 1

(ERROR)
ERROR 85
ROM HASH
HALT !
2- 63
JV5-130S/160S
TEST 4/4
RUNNING
[ENTER]
[END]
RESTART
#MEMORY CHECK CHECK:BACKUP.SRAM

[ ]/[ ]
#BACKUP.SRAM CHECK COUNT= 1

(ERROR)
BACKUP.SRAM ERROR
address = h' WriteData=h' Read Data=h'
RUNNING
[ENTER]
[END]
RESTART
#MEMORY CHECK CHECK:HEAD.EEPROM
#MEMORY CHECK SELECT :HEAD-1

SELECT SELECT SELECT
#HEAD-1.EEPROM CHECK
#TEST SKEW CHECK
[ENTER]
<ent>
[END]
#SKEW CHECK FEED :1m
[ENTER]
:HEAD-2 [ENTER] :HEAD-3 :HEAD-4
COUNT= 1
(ERROR)
HEAD1.EEPROM ERROR
address = h' WriteData=h' Read Data=h'
#SKEW CHECK FEED :1m
INPUT RANGE INPUT RANGE 10 - 10000mm 1 - 1000 [FUNCTION] [ENTER] #MEDIA CUTTING TOOL [ENTER] #MEDIA CUTTING TOOL #MEDIA CUTTING TOOL or LENGTH :500mm COUNT :10 COUNT :10 [ ]/[ ] [REMOTE] + [FUNCTION] * A cycle of 1 ~ 3 is repeated predetermined times. HEAD-1= C ( ) 1. Designated length feed [ENTER] [ENTER] HEAD-2= C ( ) 2. Width detection 3. Cut #TEST #TEMPERATURE.CHK HEAD-3= C ( ) TEMPERATURE.CHK<ent> HEAD TEMP. <ent> HEAD-4= C ( )
[END] [ ]/[ ]
#TEMPERATURE.CHK NOZZLE TEMP. <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#TEMPERATURE.CHK HEAT SINK TEMP.<ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER] HEAD1-2=
() C C () HEAD2-1=C () HEAD2-2=C ()
HEAD1-1= #SLIDER TEMP. C ( )
HEAD-1=OK HEAD-2=NG HEAD-3=OK HEAD-4=OK
HEAD3-1= HEAD3-2= HEAD4-1= HEAD4-2=
() C C () () C C ()
#TEMPERATURE.CHK SLIDER TEMP. <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#TEMPERATURE.CHK SIDE TEMP. <ent>

[ENTER] [END] [ENTER]
[ENTER]
#SIDE TEMP. C ()
#TEST VOLTAGE CHECK <ent> #TEST I/F TEST
3.3V -> 3.3V () 5V -> 5.0V () 24V -> 24.0V () 42V -> 42.0V () #I/F TEST LOOP BACK
[ ]/[ ] [ENTER] I/F.LOOP BACK (ERROR)
I/F.LoopBack ERROR ABN.COURSE=> CH1(DMA)

WriteData=h' Read Data=h'
<ent>
[END]
<ent>
COUNT=1
[FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ] [FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ]
#TEST ENCODER TEST <ent>
[ENTER] [END] [ENTER]
#I/F TEST MEMORY CHECK <ent>

See p.2- 66
[ENTER]
I/F.MEMORY CHECK COUNT=1
(ERROR)
I/F.MOMORY ERROR address = h'

WriteData=h' Read Data=h'
#TEST INK CARTRIDGE <ent>
See p.2- 67
[END] [ENTER]
See p.2- 67
#TEST WASH CARTRIDGE <ent>
[END]
2- 64
Operation Flow
MOTOR TEST
See p.2- 62
#TEST MOTOR TEST
<ent>
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#X SERVO MOTOR #MOTOR TEST X SERVO MOTOR <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[END]
[ENTER]
S=mm/s A=.G X=mm #Y SERVO MOTOR
Operation start
#X SERVO RUNNING COUNT= 0 [END] S=mm/s A=.G X=mm #Y SERVO RUNNING COUNT= 0 [END] S=mm/s A=.G Y=mm #XYservo RUNNING COUNT= 0 S=mm/s A=.G X=mm #XYservo RUNNING COUNT= 0 S=mm/s A=.G [END] Y=mm
[ENTER]
#MOTOR TEST Y SERVO MOTOR <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
S=mm/s A=.G Y=mm #XY SERVO MOTOR
Operation start
[ENTER]
#MOTOR TEST XY SERVO MOTOR<ent>
[ENTER]
S=mm/s A=.G X=mm #XY SERVO MOTOR

[END]
Operation start
[HEATER]/[END]/30second /Error [HEATER]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
[FUNCTION]
[ ]/[ ] : Select (Pre/Print/After) [ ]/[ ] : Adjust temperature
PRE 35C 40C ( 35
PRT 40C 50C 40
AFT 50C 35C 50 )
[ ]/[ ]
S=mm/s A=.G Y=mm

[ENTER]
Range PRE : OFF, 20~60 PRT : OFF, 20~60 AFT : OFF, 20~70
(End of count)
#MOTOR TEST WIPER MOTOR

[ ]/[ ]
<ent>
[ENTER] 100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit) CONTINUE, 1~1000 times (at 1 time unit) [ENTER]
100pps : 0s 4000 : 60 SPEED :WAIT 100 : 0
:1,CONT :1000 :COUNT :CONT.
WIPER RUNNING COUNT= 0 [END] SPEED :WAIT :COUNT Return to the state 100 : 0 :CONT. before starting the test
test operation start
Cap OFF
(End of count)
* Terminate with END key at CONTINUE
#MOTOR TEST CAP MOTOR

[ ]/[ ]
<ent>
:CONT. (Head movingcap ON) 100 : 0 * Terminate with END key at CONTINUE [ENTER] 100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit) CONTINUE, 1~1000 times (at 1 time unit) (End of count) [ENTER] 100pps : 0s 4000 : 60 SPEED :WAIT 100 : 0 :1,CONT :1000 :COUNT :CONT. Headup/downRUNNING COUNT= 0 [END] SPEED :WAIT :COUNT (Return to the state 100 : 0 :CONT. before starting the test)
tion lowest position Moving to the sta-
100pps : 0s 4000 : 60 SPEED :WAIT 100 : 0
:1,CONT :1000 :COUNT :CONT.
Cap OFF RUNNING head moving CAP COUNT= 0 test operation [END]
SPEED :WAIT :COUNT
#MOTOR TEST HEADup/downMTR <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
operation start
[ENTER] 100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit) CONTINUE, 1~1000 times (at 1 time unit) *1 [ENTER]
* Terminate with END key at CONTINUE *1 A guide corresponding to the cursor set position is disFORW. / REVR. 100 - 4000pps
(End of count)
PUMP MOTOR SELECT.
#MOTOR TEST PUMP MOTOR

[ ]/[ ]
<ent>
[ENTER]
PUMP=1234 DIR=FORW. SPD=1017

FORW. / REVER. CONT. /100~4000
(Return to the state before starting the test)
Cap OFF valve close test PUMP COUNT= 0 operation start [END]
RUNNING
PUMP=1234 DIR=FORW. SPD=1017

* Terminate with END key at CONTINUE
#MOTOR TEST TAKE-UP TORQUE <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER] 100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit) [ENTER]

T est Operation
1000pps: 0s 4000 : 60 SPEED :WAIT 100 :0
[ENTER]
T est Operation
start
TORQUE RUNNING COUNT= 0 SPEED :WAIT 100 :0

RUNNING [PROPER ROTATION] #TAKE-UP MOTOR START :ent RUNNING [REVERSE ROTATION] RUNNING
#MOTOR TEST TAKE-UP MOTOR <ent>
#TAKE-UP MOTOR START :ent
start
[STOP]
2- 65
JV5-130S/160S
ENCODER TEST
See p.2- 64
[ENTER] #TEST ENCODER TEST <ent>
[END]
#ENCODER TEST LINEAR ENCODER <ent>
[ENTER]
#LINEAR ENCODER ActiveWIDTH :mm
[ENTER]
(Normal END)
Check operation:
3 times reciprocating
#ENCODER TEST Result of a test M =. E =. Mc= 0.0 Ec= 0.0

ERROR 08
[FUNCTION]
<< Coord.Of point >> Ms = Es= Mm= Em= Mr = Er=

[ ]/[ ]
[ ]/[ ]
(Abnormal)
LinearENCODER :SENSOR
#ENCODER TEST ActiveWIDHT :mm #CUTTER ENCODER Result of a test THICK = .mm Pr= Mr=
<<CommonCoord.SYS>> ERR(ME-LE) = .mm MotorENC = .mm LinearEND = .mm
#ENCODER TEST CUTTER ENCODER<ent>
[ENTER]
#CUTTER ENCODER CHECK :ent
[ENTER]
Check operation
(Normal END)
[ ]/[ ]
ERROR 59
(Abnormal)
CUTTER ENCODER #CUTTER ENCODER CHECK :ent
#ENCODER TEST MEDIA ENCODER <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#MEDIA ENCODER Input feed parameter S= 60mm/s A= 0.50G L= 127mm
[ENTER]
(Normal END) Feed operation #MediaENCODER/RESULT
ERR(M-E)=.mm MTR = ENC =
#ENCODER TEST POSITIONencoder <ent>
[ENTER]
#POSITIONencoder CHECK :ent
[ENTER]
Check operation
(Normal END)
#POSITIONencoder Result of a test St = Mv= Rt=

ERROR 58
(Abnormal)
POSITIONencoder #POSITIONencoder CHECK :ent
2- 66
Operation Flow
See p.2- 64
INK CARTRIDGE TEST
[END]
[ENTER] #TEST INK CARTRIDGE <ent> PACK SENSOR 1-3- 56-- --BC -E-G #INK CARTRIDGE END SENSOR PACK&END SENSOR<ent> -2-4 --78 9A-- D-F[ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
#INK CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE VALVE<ent>

[ ]/[ ]
#CARTRIDGE VALVE o = OPEN / . = close
o.o. o. .o .oo . .o. o

ERROR-LED
#INK CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE LED <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
o.. o . oo. o.o . .o. o [ ]/[ ] : Slot selection ACTIVE-LED (o=ON) [ ]/[ ] : LED pattern changing .. .. o. .o .o. o o.o. [FUNCTION] : Switching ERROR/ACTIVE
SLOT. No -> NG _-> OK , x -> None CNT= 12__ _67_ 9__C D_F_
Check operation
(o=ON)
#INK CARTRIDGE INK-IC CHECK <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#INK-IC CHECK 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG
[ENTER] [ENTER]
[END]
A cursorlsMoved. NG num.ofTimes confirm. CNT= NG= 12__ _67_ 9__C D_F_

DURING THE UNUSUAL DETECTION
#INK CARTRIDGE SolenoidVOLTAGE <ent>
[ENTER]
#SolenoidVOLTAGE CHECK START :ent
Check end operation
[END]

Check end operation
* When an unusual An unusual detection signal is detected SUCCESS within 2 minutes after starting the #SolenoidVOLTAGE check :ent (success buzzer) TEST END
[ENTER]
* When an unusual Unusual detection signal is not !! FAILURE !! detected within 2 minutes after #SolenoidVOLTAGE starting the check TEST END :ent (failure buzzer)
[ENTER]
See p.2- 64
WASH CARTRIDGE TEST
[ENTER] #TEST WASH CARTRIDGE<ent>
#WASH CARTRIDGE PACK SENSOR PACK&END SENSOR<ent> END SENSOR [END] [ENTER] [ ]/[ ]
:ON :OFF
[ ]/[ ] : State change OPEN/close
#WASH CARTRIDGE
CARTRIDGE VALVE<ent> [ENTER] [ ]/[ ]
#CARTRIDGE VALVE OPEN
RUNNING
[ENTER]
#WASH CARTRIDGE IC CHECK <ent>

[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#IC CHECK o
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#IC CHECK CNT=1 NG=0

Check operation
#IC CHECK CNT=1 NG=0
#WASH CARTRIDGE SolenoidVOLTAGE<ent>
[ENTER]
DURING THE UNUSUAL DETECTION
Check end operation
[END]

Check end operation
* When an unusual An unusual detection signal is detected SUCCESS within 2 minutes after starting the #SolenoidVOLTAGE check :ent (success buzzer) TEST END
[ENTER]
* When an unusual Unusual detection signal is not !! FAILURE !! detected within 2 minutes after #SolenoidVOLTAGE starting the check TEST END :ent (failure buzzer)
[ENTER]
2- 67
JV5-130S/160S
2-3-7. PARAMETER
PARAMETER 1/2 As for the detail of PARAMETER Function
#PARAMETER SYSTEM PARAM. <ent>
[FUNCTION] or [ ]/[ ] [ENTER] [END]
( p. 2- 49) .
SYSTEM PARAMETER [ENTER] 000:COMP. X = 0

(If INITIAL=1) (If INITIAL=2) (If INITIAL=3)
----> 1 000:COMP. X = 0 ALL PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent

[ENTER]
Initialization of all parameters Initialization of system parameters Initialization of non-disclosed

MAINTENANCEparameter INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
SYSTEM PARAMETER [ENTER] INITIALIZE OK ? :ent CLOSED PARAMETER [ENTER] INITIALIZE OK ? :ent ----> 1 000:DIR = 0
#PARAMETER MAINTE PARAM. <ent>

[ENTER]
MAINTENANCEparameter [ENTER] 000:DIR = 0
#PARAMETER CUSTOM PARAM. <ent>

[ENTER] [END] [ENTER] [END] [ENTER] [END] [ENTER] [END] [ENTER] [END] [ENTER]
CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER [ENTER]
000:EDGE LV = 50
----> 100 000:EDGE LV = 50
CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER
INITIALIZE OK ?
:ent
#PARAMETER RUNNING PARAM. <ent>

RUNNING PARAMETER [ENTER] 000:CAPC.H1 = 0
----> 3000 000:CAPC.H1 = 0
RUNNING PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
#PARAMETER
EXCHANGE PARAM.<ent>
EXCHANGE PARAMETER [ENTER]
000:Hd.nn01 = 0
----> 3 000:Hd.nn01 = 0
#PARAMETER
INKSYSTEM PARAM<ent>
INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER [ENTER]
000:LEVELsw = 0
----> 1 000:LEVELsw = 0
INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER
INITIALIZE OK ?
:ent
#PARAMETER INKinfor.PARAM.<ent>
INK INFOR. PARAMETER [ENTER] 000:VERSION = 100 * Displayed only on filled ink type
INKsequencePARAMETER [ENTER]
----> 101 000:VERSION = 100
#PARAMETER INKSEQUENCEpara<ent>
000:POWON.F = 0 [END] * Displayed only on filled ink type

[ENTER]
----> 12345 000:POWON.F = 0
INKsequencePARAMETER
INITIALIZE OK ?
:ent
#PARAMETER INKTYPE PARAM.<ent>

INK-TYPE PARAMETER [ENTER] 000:DE0D0sw = 0 [END] * Displayed only on filled ink type
[ENTER] #HEADunit PARAM HEAD SELECT :UNIT-1
:UNIT-2 :UNIT-3 :UNIT-4
----> 0x0060 000:DE0D0sw = 0x0040
INK-TYPE PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
#PARAMETER HEADunit PARAM.<ent>

[ENTER] [END]
HEAD SELECT HEAD SELECT HEAD SELECT
RANGE SEL :512-1023
#HEADunit-1 PARAM. RANGE SEL. :0 - 511
[ENTER]
HEADunit-1PARA/ 0 + 000:SHOT1.0 = 0
[ENTER]
----> 1 000:SHOT1.0 = 0
[ENTER]
HEADunit-1 PARAM. INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
2- 68
Operation Flow
PARAMETER 2/2
#PARAMETER
[ENTER]
SERVO PARAMETER<ent>
[END]
SERVO PARAMETER 000:Cycle = 0x000c
[ENTER]
----> 0x000d 000:Cycle = 0x000c
SERVO PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
#PARAMETER TEST PARAMETER<ent>

[ENTER]
[END]
TEST PARAMETER 000:H1A.drv = 0
[ENTER]
----> 1 000:H1A.drv = 0
TEST PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
#PARAMETER CORRECT PARAM.<ent>
[ENTER]
[END]
#CORRECT PARAM. SELECT :USER CRCT
[ENTER]
#USER CORRECT PARAM. SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT
[END]
SELECT
:TYPE-1
:TYPE-2 :TYPE-3 :TYPE-4 :Y BASE
[ENTER]
]/[
[END]
USER CRCT./ TYPE-1 000:MODE1NR = 0

USER BASIS PARAMETER
[ENTER]
[END]
----> -1 000:MODE1NR = 0 ----> -1 000:LoMD1NR = 0
#CORRECT PARAMETER SELECT :USER BASIS

[ FUNCTION ] or [ ]/[ ] [ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
[END]
000:LoMD1NR = 0
[END]
#CORRECT PARAMETER SELECT :HEAD CRCT
[ENTER]
#HEAD CORRECT PARAM. SELECT :Hi.SPEED/Hi SELECT :Std.SPEED/Lo SELECT :Std.SPEED/Hi SELECT :Y BASE
[ENTER]
[END]
SELECT :Hi.SPEED/Lo
[END]
SELECT SELECT SELECT
#HEAD CORRECT /HsLo SELECT :MODE-1

:MODE-2 :MODE-3 :MODE-4
[ENTER]
[END]
HEAD CRCT./HsLo.MD-1 000:RESERVE = 0
[ENTER]
[END]
----> 0 000:RESERVE = 0
#PARAMETER ADJUST PARAM. <ent>

[ENTER]
[END]
ADJUST PARAMETER 000:RESERVE = 0
[ENTER]
----> 0 000:RESERVE = 0
ADJUST PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
#PARAMETER NCU PARAMETER <ent>
[ENTER]
[END]
NCU PARAMETER 000:RESERVE = 0
[ENTER]
----> 0 000:RESERVE = 0
NCU PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
2- 69
JV5-130S/160S
2- 70
CHAPTER 3 Overhaul / Adjustment
Contents
3-1. Outline ......................................................................... 3-2
3-1-1. Precautions for disassembly and reassembly ...... 3-2 3-1-2. Tools and jigs ........................................................... 3-3 3-1-3. Disassembly and Reassembly Procedure ................. 3-4
3-2.
Overhaul of Ink-related Parts ................................... 3-6
3-3.
Overhaul of PCBs ..................................................... 3-69
3-4.
Overhaul of Sensors ............................................... 3-109
3-5.
Overhaul of Driving Parts ..................................... 3-161
3-5.
Overhaul of Driving Parts ..................................... 3-161
3- 1
JV5-130S/160S
3-1. Outline
This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly of JV5-130S/160S. The description given here is chiefly of disassembly procedures. As a rule, reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly. For reassembly, however, description is added as needed, for example, if the procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure or if any precautions are to be taken. Where any adjustment is to be made in reassembly process, the adjustment procedure is described with the heading Adjust/Confirm.
3-1-1. Precautions for disassembly and reassembly

Be sure to follow the precautions shown below before starting disassembly and reassembly. Be sure to turn off the main power switch (behind the printer) unless otherwise instructed, to prevent human electric shock or circuit damage. (Turning off the power switch on the front panel is insufficient.) For disassembly and reassembly, be sure to wear gloves to avoid injury. For servicing, place the printer on a firm floor with sufficient space around it. Take great care to handle the printer, which is very heavy. At least five persons must cooperate to install or remove the leg assembly to or from the main body. Use only the specified tools. (See ) Do not use any lubricants or adhesives other than specified. When handling a PCB assembly, never touch any elements on the PCB assembly with your bare hand; otherwise static electricity may arise to damage elements. To touch any element, be sure to use a grounding band. In reassembly, put wiring for every electric part in position. (Otherwise, a cable may come in contact with a sharp edge or the noise resistance margin may decrease.) If it is needed to operate the printer with cover removed, take care not to get injured with any moving part. Be very careful to handle cutter blade to avoid human injury or damage of peripheral elements. It is very sharp. Be sure to certainly join connectors and FPCs. Be careful to avoid insufficient or skewed insertion. To remove a part for which procedure is not described, carefully observe its installation status in advance. Refer to the part catalog as needed.
P .3- 3
3- 2
Outline
3-1-2. Tools and jigs

Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly
Phillips screwdriver Slotted screwdriver Spanner (Box wrench) Hexagon wrench
Name
Spanner
Tweezers Long-nose pliers Nippers Soldering iron, Solder Scale Loupe Protection glasses Gloves Adhesive agent Insulation lock Nitroflon tape or acetate fabric tape
Type 1 For M2 Type 2 For M3 to5 (L=260 or more) Type 3 for M3 to 5 Long side 2.5mm for removing E-rings Width across flats: 5 mm Width across flats: 5.5 mm Width across flats: 7 mm 1.5mm for M3 SSWP 2.0mm for M4 SSWP 2.5mm for M3 cap bolts (L=170) 5.0mm for M6 cap bolts 6.0mm for M8 cap bolts Width across flats: 5.0mm Width across flats: 5.5mm for M3 nuts and hexagon stud Width across flats: 7.0mm for M4 nuts To prevent the cable from being pulled when disconnecting the connector.
Remarks
150, 500mm About 50x to 60x magnification To keep hands clean, and for safety. LOCKTITE242 (for locking screws) L=150 or less (UL-approved product) As required (UL-approved product)
Adjustment tools
Name Trimmer adjustment screwdriver Tester Bar type tension gauge Ink line airtight tester 1.3mm Head gap check tool 1.5mm Head gap check tool All Cap base positioning tool A Cap base positioning tool Media Jam/ Cutter unit height positioning tool Code
For adjustment of trimmers on the power supply PCB. 500 g
Remarks
OPT-J0094 OPT-J0096 OPT-J0097 OPT-J0098 OPT-J0099 OPT-J0108
3- 3
JV5-130S/160S
3-1-3. Disassembly and Reassembly Procedure

The chart below shows the disassembly procedure.
Covers Overhaul of Ink-related Parts
( p. 3- 6 ) ( p. 3- 78 )
MF cover C HDC PCB

( p. 3- 77 )
IO PCB
USB PCB
( p. 3- 79 )
Overhaul of PCBs
( p. 3- 69 )
Main PCB
( p. 3- 70 )
Overhaul of Sensors
( p. 3- 109 )
Overhaul of Driving Parts

( p. 3- 161 )
Pump cover T BOX Relay PCB

( p. 3- 90 )

( p. 3- 161 )
Sucker BOX
( p. 3- 61 )
Pump Motor Assembly

( p. 3- 35 )
S Pump Assembly
( p. 3- 33 )
Maintenance cover L Ink Leakage Sensor L

( p. 3- 153 )
Maintenance Cover Sensor L
Left cover
( p. 3- 151 )
B
R Heater Cover Assy.
( p. 3- 204 )
Rear cover L
A Heater Cover Assy.

( p. 3- 193 )
Heater PCB
( p. 3- 88 )
X Pulley, X Belt
( p. 3- 165 )
X-axis Motor Assembly

( p. 3- 162 )
Paper Sensor
( p. 3- 136 )
P Heater Cover Assy.

( p. 3- 198 )
Media Rotary Encoder Assembly

( p. 3- 139 )
Take-up cover M Motor Take-up PCB

( p. 3- 105 )
ICU cover F Ink Unit PCB

( p. 3- 98 )
( p. 3- 186 )
ICU cover R
Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly

( p. 3-42 )
LED PCB
( p. 3- 103 )
Waste ink tank bracket assy. Waste Tank Sensor

( p. 3- 158 )
Drying FAN assy. Drying Fan Fork PCB

( p. 3- 106 )
MF cover R SSR Power PCB

( p. 3- 85 )
( p. 3- 209 )
3- 4
Outline
Open & Close cover (Dry fan assy.) Front cover L Y cover F Front Cover Sensor L
( p. 3- 147 )
Front Cover Sensor R

( p. 3- 149 )
Head Cover
Jam Sensor
( p. 3- 121 )
A
Cutter Unit Assy.
( p. 3- 189 ) ( p. 3- 92 )
D
KB cover Keyboard PCB Dot Detection PCB
( p. 3- 96 )
Head Unit
( p. 3- 7 )
Damper Assembly
( p. 3- 57 )
Paper Width Sensor

( p. 3- 119 )
Paper Thickness Encoder

( p. 3- 125 )
Y Encoder
( p. 3- 129 )
Head Up/Down Encoder

( p. 3- 132 )
Maintenance cover R Right cover Cap Head assy.

( p. 3- 37 )
Head Relay PCB

( p. 3- 81 )
Wiper Wash Solenoid

( p. 3- 206 )
Cap Base 1H
( p. 3- 38 )
C
Cap Sensor
( p. 3- 117 )
Origin Sensor
( p. 3- 110 )
Ink Leakage Sensor S

( p. 3- 153 )
Wiper Sensor
( p. 3- 112 )
Maintenance Cover Sensor R

( p. 3- 152 )
Rear cover R
Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly

( p. 3- 51 )
ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge)
Side Relay PCB

( p. 3- 99 )
( p. 3- 101 )
Head UD Motor
( p. 3- 184 )
Y-axis Motor Assembly

( p. 3- 167 )
Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt

( p. 3- 171 )
B A
Y Drive Belt
( p. 3- 175 )
Station Motor
( p. 3- 182 )
Clamp Sensor
( p. 3- 113 )
Bottom Point Sensor

( p. 3- 115 )
Ink Leakage Sensor R

( p. 3- 153 )
A
( p. 3- 63 )
C
NCU Wiper Motor
( p. 3- 179 )
Slider PCB
( p. 3- 82 )
3- 5
JV5-130S/160S
3-2.
Overhaul of Ink-related Parts
Ink-related parts of JV5-130S/160S are shown below.

Part 3-2-1. Head Unit 3-2-2. S Pump Assembly 3-2-3. Pump Motor Assembly 3-2-4. Cap Head assy. 3-2-5. Cap Base 1H ~Ink Cartridge Assembly ~
ID Point of Contact PCB Presence Sensor Valve Base Solenoid Valve
Reference page
p. 3 - 7 p. 3 - 33 p. 3 - 35 p. 3 - 37 p. 3 - 38
Part 3-2-6. Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly 3-2-7. Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly 3-2-8. Damper Assembly 3-2-9. Sucker BOX 3-2-10. NCU ~ HEAD Assy ~
Reference page
p. 3 - 42 p. 3 - 51 p. 3 - 57 p. 3 - 61 p. 3 - 63
Damper Assembly (x32)
Near End Sensor
Head Unit (x4)
NCU
Wash Cartridge Assembly
Cap Head assy. (x4)
Sucker BOX
Cap Base 1H (x4)
S Pump Assembly (x4)
Pump Motor Assembly (x4)
3- 6
3-2-1.
Head Unit
General Procedures and instructions for Head Unit Replacement are described here.
Item (Page) 1. Preparation (Cleaning within Head)

8)
( p. 3-
2. Head Unit Removing 3. Reassemble Head Unit 4. BasisHEADheight 5. Capping adjusting 6. Enter Head ID
( p. 3- 9 ) ( p. 3- 11 )
( p. 3- 12 )
( p. 3- 14 )
( p. 3- 18 )
7. Filling of Ink
( p. 3- 19 )
8. Adjustment of the head angle 9. Adjust Head Stagger 10. Drop Position Correction 11. Reassemble Covers
( p. 3- 20 )
( p. 3- 23 ) ( p. 3- 26 )
( p. 3- 32 )
Description Head is filled with water-based liquid (S-46) that has been charged on shipment. Use S Head Changing Wash (MS Wash) to clean the head before replacement. Otherwise Solvent Ink will react with the liquid to produce precipitates. Take off Damper and remove Head Unit. Put on a new Head Unit. Adjust the height of replaced head using a tool based on the platen face. Execute adjusting of all seven items related to capping. (Sequential flow) Enter ID of each Head specified on shipment to equalize variations between Heads.(As the ID is input automatically, this process is not required in usual state.) *Manual input of ID is required when a head unit only (without head memory PCB) is replaced. Choose ink charge procedure according to change or no-change of Damper, and execute TEST DRAW after ink charge is completed. Mechanically adjust the angle of Head Unit. Mechanically adjust Head Stagger. Correct dot positions. Put on covers.
Tools and Jigs IIH47V Head unit Assembly. (M007034) Head inside washing tool (M005027) Washings for replacement of S-head (M005026) Phillips screwdriver (No.2 M3-M5) Hexagon wrench (Opposite side: 2.5 mm Bondhus type magnetized) Small slotted screwdriver Scope (approx. 50x) 1.5mm Head gap check tool (OPT-J0097) Media for adjustment (Glossy type media) Waste cloth (non-woven paper, etc.)
Equivalent to JV3
Equivalent to JV3
Use protection glasses and gloves during works. In some working conditions, ink may reach your eye or contact with ink may get your skin roughed.
Head Unit Replacement procedure is principally the same as for JV3. Damper construction is the same, while the appearance of Head is different.
3- 7
JV5-130S/160S
1. Preparation (Cleaning within Head)

S-dumper Assembly Syringe
Caution:Confirm the type of current ink to choose washing. Type of washing depends on ink. A washing jig must be exclusive to a washing. Do not use the jig for another washing.
* Main washing must be done before the replacement of head assembly.
1a. Charge Head Changing Washing. Remove Damper Assembly from Washing Jig, and charge Syringe with 12-16 cc of S-head Changing Washing.
1b. ~ Types of Wash ~ ES3 Ink: MILD SOLVENT WASHING LIQUID (SPC-0294) HS Ink: SOLVENT WASHING LIQUID (SPC-0352)
Caution: Be careful of MS washing dripping on the operation of the damper. Wet of FPC connector may damage the head.
Caution:Pour washing slowly, or Head may be damaged. 2a. Connect Damper to Head. Reassemble S-damper assembly with Syringe and join it with Damper Connector on Head. 2b. ~ Caution for connection ~ 3a. Slowly pour the washing.
Pour 3-4cc of washing to a nozzle in about 30 seconds.
Caution:Do not touch the nozzle surface with waste cloth, nor rub the nozzle surface. Both may cause discharge failure.
3b. Use waste cloth to receive liquid split out of nozzle. * Conduct the above for every nozzle (x8). (Charge syringe with washing every 4 nozzles.)
3- 8
Power ON.
Behind
2. Head Unit Removing
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
ST.MAINTENANCE CARRIDGE OUT <ent> [ENTER]
Execute CARRIAGE OUT. 1a. Execute Carriage Out. Turn on the power, select [ST.MAINTE] [ENTER] to move Carriage to above Platen, and turn off the power.
Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit breaker on the back to prevent unexpected move.
1b. ~ Caution for Power-off ~
Right
Open/Close Cover Assy (M007138/9)

Right Right
Moving fulcrum pin inside and remove it from the pin hole.
2a. Remove Open and close cover Assy. Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and remove left side of the cover.
2b. ~ Remove Open/Close cover~ Take out fulcrum pin on the left side of cover from from frame to remove open/close cover.
3a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move the right side fulcrum pin inside, and remove it from the pin hole.
Front Cover L (M601940/41)
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Maintenance Cover R
(M601943)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
3b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ Remove a pin from the left shaft hole to remove the front cover.
4. Remove Y Cover F. Remove screws in both sides (x6), and remove the Y cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons
5. Remove Maintenance Cover R.
3- 9
JV5-130S/160S
Left
Head Cover (M507559)
B3x6 (x2)
Lay Media.
1 3
2 4
(Front)
6. Remove the head cover. Remove screw in both sides to remove the head cover.
Right
7. Lay Media on Platen to prevent from dirt.
8a. Confirm the Head to be removed. * Hereafter the procedure for Head 4 is described.
Damper Lock SP (M800894) x2
Turn toward you.
Turn backward.
8b. ~ Remove back head ~

* To remove Heads 1 and 2, take off Quick Valve in the near side.
9a. Remove Damper Lock SP (x2). Revolve the left and right ends toward you to remove.
9b. ~ Remove Damper Lock SP ~ Revolve the left and right ends toward back side to remove.
Damper Assembly
Caution: Be careful that pressing transparent film spills ink Keep it from something with sharp tip.
.
Dont push
10a.Remove Damper Assembly. Pull up every Damper Assembly (x8) out of Head Unit.
10b.~ Caution for damper ~
10c.Lay waste cloth Lay waste cloth under dampers, while ink wont leak out of them, since they are each equipped with self top valve.
3- 10
Head Unit Holder B (M507370)
Pull FPC (x2)
Head Unit Assembly P3x10 SMW (x3)
11a.Remove Head Unit. Loosen screws (x3) and remove Head Unit from Head Base.
12. Remove Head Unit Holder B.
13. Disconnect FPC.
Remove connector
3. Reassemble Head Unit

14. Remove connector.
Reverse the disassembly procedure to Step8 for reassembly.
Head ID
* Write down the head ID (24 digits) before replace of head when a head unit (without head memory PCB) is replaced.
Notice: Align terminal sides to avoid wrong side connection and insert firmly at FPC connection
1
Shift to right back
* Insert carefully not to be upside down at connecting FPC (x2) to the head. Nozzle face side : 35 wire (one side 3 wires are not used) Damper side : 32 wire
* Lightly shift Head to the right back and tighten the screws in the order shown above (diagonally). Be careful that too much shift affects print quality.
* Mount damper lock SP so that projrctions of both sides push up coupler of the damper.
3- 11
JV5-130S/160S
4. BasisHEADheight
Manual adjusting of the head height. Set contents are stored in the system parameter.
<Basis head height operation sequence>
No. Item 1 Start
2 Manual adjusting 3 End
Content Cap OFF Move the carriage to the head UP/Down position, and move to the top position of the head height. Carriage Out Adjust the head height in manual. Read values of the position encoder during adjusting. Press [ENTER] to store position encoder values from the top to the adjusted position, and finish the operation.
1. 2. 3.
Head height top position
Place the head height on the position 1.5 mm from the platen face. (Encoder value: distance from the head height top position: X mm)
X mm (Position encoder value)
Head
1.5 mm Platen face
Outline Tools
Adjust head height to the standard height (1.5mm) mechanically with the tool. 1.5mm Head gap check tool (OPT-J0097)
[ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON

(Start with the Maintenance Open Mode)
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
Height 1.5mm is adjusted by hand. #BasisHEADheight COMPLETED :ent

[ENTER] :adjust value stored :the value not stored [END]
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST
<ent>
[ FUNCTION] or [ ]
1.5mm Head gap check tool (OPT-J0097)
#ADJUST BasisHEADheight<ent>
[ ENTER]
*Being Initialized* PLEASE WAIT
(Carriage moves over platen)
End operation after initialization
* Conduct this adjusting with keeping the clamp lever down
1. Execute BasisHEADheight. Start with the Maintenance Open Mode and execute BasisHeadheight .
2a. Adjust the gap 1.5mm from platen with manual operation [ENTER] : Store adjust value to end [END] : Cancel to end
3- 12
Turn with hand to up/down carriage
Tool Platen face
1.5 mm
2b. ~ Arrangement of tool ~ Arrange the tool as the following
3. Insert the tool from the side face
4. Push the head of the tool to the head frame.
* Place the tool so that it can contact to metal frames in both sides of the head.
3- 13
JV5-130S/160S
5. Capping adjusting
Adjusting capping, wiping position. adjusting values are stored in the system parameter.
<Capping adjusting >
No. Item 1 LOWER POS. Content The lowest point of the station is adjusted Down the station to the lowest sensor detection Adjusting operation: [ ], [ ] (Station up/down movement) Adjust value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm) Contents: Adjust cap Y-position Up the station to the cap Y-position adjusting height to adjust carriage position. Adjusting operation: [ ], [ ] (Carriage horizontal movement) Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm) Contents: Adjust cap height Up the station to the gap height adjusting position to adjust Adjusting operation: [ ], [ ] (Station up/down movement) Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm) Contents: Adjust wiping X position Down the station to the lowest position, after moving the carriage to the wiping adjusting position, the wiper ON to execute Adjusting operation: [ ], [ ] (Wiper back and forth movement) Press [FUNCTION] to execute wiping operation once. Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0mm (unit: 1.0 mm) Contents: Adjust wiper height Up the station to the wiper height to adjust Adjusting operation: [ ], [ ] (Station UP/DOWN movement) Press [FUNCTION] to execute wiping operation once. Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm) Contents: Adjust wiping Y-position Adjusting operation: [ ], [ ] (Carriage horizontal movement) Press [FUNCTION] to execute wiping operation once. Press [ENTER] to determine adjusting value, and wiper OFF Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm) Contents: Adjust NCU height. (Not executed when the NCU is not installed, No.8 F.BOX height starts. Down the station to the Lowest position, and move the carriage to the NCU height adjusting position. Down the station until laser of NCU OFF, down the station at 2.5mm from that position. (Automatic operation) If adjusting is failed, No.8 F.BOX height starts automatically. Press [ENTER] to return the carriage to the cap position to execute capping. The cap moving amount at this moment is the NCU height based on the cap height. Contents: Height of the flushing BOX is adjusted. Execute when NCU is not installed or No.7 NCU height is failed. Adjusting operation: [ ], [ ] (Station up/down movement) Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm)
Contents:
2 CAPPING POS
3 CAP HEIGHT
4 WipwePOS(X)
5 WiperHEIGHT
6 WiperPOS(Y)
7 NCU HEIGHT
8 F.BOX height
Note1: Press [ENTER] to determine adjust value, then move to the following adjust item.
In this adjustment, as adjusting items form a chain of mutually related adjusting items, correct adjusting parameter values are not entered until adjusting is executed to the end. Therefore, once adjusting is started, it must be done to the end.
3- 14

(Start with the Maintenance Open Mode)
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[FUNCTION] [FUNCTION] or [ ] [ENTER]
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST CAPPING
<ent>
1. Execute Capping. Start with Maintenance Open Mode and executeCapping .
Carriage
[END]
UP:^ v:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING LOWER POS. = 0.0mm
[ ]/ [ ] : Station up/down [ENTER] : Next item [END] : Previous item
NCU
Station
2. Adjust the lowest point of the station. Up and down the station to adjust to the lowest position.
Adjust a chevalet to the lowest position of lift slider
[END]
LEFT:< >:RIGHT (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING CAPPING POS= 0.0mm
Station height at adjusting is the position where cap sensor ON Carriage
[ ]/ [ ] : L/R move carriage [ENTER] : Next item [END] : Previous item :
NCU
Station
3. Adjust head Y position at capping. Adjust with moving the carriage horizontally so that center of cap agree with center of head seeing from front.
3- 15
JV5-130S/160S
[END]
UP:^ v:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING CAP HEIGHT = 0.0mm
Notice: Take care not to push too much

Carriage
[ ]/ [ ] :Station Up/Down n [ENTER] : Next item [END] : Previous item
NCU
Adjust to eliminate gap between all heads and caps. After adjustiong, push at 3mm with F/W. The position is CAP HEIGHT POSITION.
Station
4. Adjust station cap height at capping. Adjust the position where cap contacts to the head with moving the station horizontally.
[END]
REAR:^ v:FRONT (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING WiperPOS (X)= 0mm
Head 1
Head 3
[ ]/ [ ] : Wiper R/F move [FUNCTION]: Wiping [ENTER] : Next item [END] : Previous item
Wiper NCU
Station
Head to be adjusted is 1 and 3. Adjust so that the center of wiper and center of head 1&3 agrees in side view.
5. Adjust wiper X position at wiping. Adjust with moving the wiper rear and front so that center of wiper agree with center of head seeing from side.
* Position confirmation is allowed in wiping operation with [FUNCTION]
[END]
UP:^ v:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING WiperHEIGHT= 0.0mm
1mm
Carriage Station
[ ]/ [ ] : Up/Down stattion [FUNCTION]: Wiping operation [ENTER] : Next item [END] : Previous item
NCU
6. Adjust station wiper height at wiping. Adjust so that wiper top contacts to head at 1mm with moving the station up and down.
* Position confirmation is allowed in wiping operation with [FUNCTION]
3- 16
[END]
LEFT:< >:RIGHT (-20.0 - +20.0) #CAPPING WiperPOS (Y)= 0.0mm
Carriage
[ ]/ [ ] : Carriage L/R move [FUNCTION]: Wiping operation [ENTER] : Next item [END] : Previous item
NCU
Station
7. Adjusting head wiper Y position at wiping. Adjust carriage with moving horizontally to the position that head comes out at wiping operation.
* Position confirmation is allowed in wiping operation with [FUNCTION]. ~NCU~
[END]
** Being ADJUSTED ** PLEASE WAIT #CAPPING NCU HEIGHT = *.*mm
2.5mm
Carriage
Automatic adjusting to position at 2.5mm from laser beam. Station 1mm Carriage Station
Laser beam NCU
[ ]/ [ ] : Station Up/Down [ENTER] : Next item [END] : Previous item
~No NCU~
Adjust to position at 1mm from cap claw.
* F.BoxHEIGHT= 0.0mm is displayed at no NCU
NCU
8. Automatic adjusting of NCU height . * Adjust to position at 1mm from claws on 4 corners of cap when no NCU or at failure of automatic adjusting.
#ADJUST CAPPING
<ent>
[ENTER] : Storing adjusted value to end.
9. Storing adjusted values in system parameters to end.
3- 17
JV5-130S/160S

(Start with Maintenance Open Mode)
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[FUNCTION] [FUNCTION] or [ ] [ENTER]
#HEAD ID SELECT
:HEAD-1
[ ]/ [ ] :SW [ENTER]: Set [ENTER]
6. Enter Head ID
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST #ADJUST HEAD ID
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST
<ent>
<ent>
<ent>
#ADJUST HEAD ID
<ent>
[ENTER]
* Execute only at replacement of head unit (without head memory PCB). Head of JV-5 supports automatic ID wntering.
1. Execute HEAD ID. Start with Maintenance Open Mode and execute HEAD ID .
2a. Choose Head. Choose the substitute head and press [ENTER] to fix it.
#HEAD ID/HEAD-1(1/2) ******** ********
1 3
[ ]/ [ ] :Cursor Move [ ]/ [ ] :NV input
37B7B454
1 2 3
2 4
#HEAD ID/HEAD-1(2/2) ********
[ ]/ [ ] :Cursor Move [ ]/ [ ] :NV input

#ADJUST HEAD ID <ent>
76065MW0 ZUTTQM03
3b. ~ Head ID ~ Head ID consists of 3 lines of 8-digit string. The sequence is from left to right and from upper to lower.
(Front)
[END] : End
2b. ~ Head Layout ~
3a. Enter Head ID (24 digits). * Input head ID without making a mistake, and confirm the numeric value.
Notice: As updated head ID is overwritten at power OFF, turn the power OFF after inputingID. Turn the power OFF with the remote SW (on front side). If the power is turned OFF with the main Power (on back side), the head ID is not updated and overwriting is not executed.
4. Turn the remote SW (front power switch) to OFF to write the ID. Turn the power OFF with front power SW to update head ID.
3- 18
Main Power ON (Back) Power SW ON Set Media

7. Filling of Ink
L.*> [JV5-01]
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[FUNCTION] [ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER]
FUNCTION MAINTENANCE
<ENT>
MAINTENANCE HD.MAINTENANCE <ent> HD.MAINTENANCE FILL UP INK <ent>
* Note: In order to save ink, use the proper ink filling procedure and improve the work efficiency.
1. Set media and turn the power ON.
2. Execute FILL UP INK.
FILL UP INK HEAD SELECT
:12.34 :12-:--34
L.*>
[JV5-01] width:****mm
[TEST DRAW] [ENTER] : Execute
Draw Result Nozzle skip Re-cleaning (Step. 5b) OK Power off
[ ] / [ ]: Cursor Move [ ] / [ ]: Head Choice

FILL UP INK *****--------------HD.MAINTENANCE FILL UP INK <ent>
TEST DRAW
<ENT>
** TEST DRAW **
[END] :End
3. Choose Head and fill ink. * Choose a set of Heads 1 and 2 or Heads 3 and 4.
4. Execute test drawing.
5a. Confirm the result of draw. * Repeat until nozzle skip is removed.
L.*> CLEANING HEAD SELECT
[JV5-01]
[CLEANING]
CLEANING TYPE
1234 12---34
TYPE TYPE
:NORMAL
:SOFT :HARD
[ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set
[ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set
Notice: [HARD] or [NORMAL] of cleaning is selected according to nozzle missing state. When the number of nozzle missing is a few, select[NORMAL].
CLEANING ACTIVE *******-------------
5b. Conduct cleaning. Select a set of [HARD] [NORMAL].
3- 19
JV5-130S/160S
8. Adjustment of the head angle

General A pattern for mechanical adjustment of head slanting is drawn. Move the head height to the position of 1.5 mm print gap, and select a head to draw the adjusting pattern. The Pattern is drawn only with B & H rows. (In every other nozzle)
Head selection: 1234 (A head does not draw is indicated with 123)
<Head side>
<Adjusting pattern>
3- 20
(Start with Maintenance Open mode)

L.*> [JV5-01]
[FUNCTION]
#SLANT ADJUST HEAD SELECT :1234
[ ] / [ ]: For cursor [ ] / [ ]: For Head [ENTER]: Fix (Next)
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST #HEAD ADJUST SLANT ADJUST
<ent>
[ENTER]
Set Media (or confirm)

#SLNT ADJ./HEAD=1234 PRINT START :ent
<ent>
[ENTER]
[ENTER]: Printing start [ ] : Carriage move
1. Select SLANT ADJUST . Start with Maintenance Open mode and execute SLANT ADJUST .
2. Select a head and execute PRINT START. * Drawing pattern varies according to selected head.(See the drawing below) Move carriage over platen after pattern drawing to adjust.
Slant Adjustment: Printing samples

When all heads are selected
HEAD 1 HEAD 2 HEAD 3 HEAD 4
When an individual head is selected (at selecting head 1.3)

HEAD 1 HEAD 3
3- 21
JV5-130S/160S
Adjustment procedures
For fixing
Example) In the case of Head 3
For fixing
For fixing
C line (For Head 1 adjustment)
M line
Procedures 1. Loosen 3 screws (for fixing of slant) indicatedby an arrow in the figure. 2. Rotate a screw for adjustment to adjust theslant. A color of Magenta is shifted by this operation.
Reference : Adjustable range 30 ~ 50 m /1 rotation
For adjustment
Rotating direction of Adjusting screw
The followings are patterns seen through the scope. Adjust so that dots of cyan and magenta are layed on the same line in the scan direction with wrapping over.
Good sample
Bad sample 1
Bad sample 2
Bad sample 1 (Magenta dots are at the lower than cyanogen do ts.) Rotate the adjusting screw clockwise. Magenta dots move forward.
Bad sample 2 (Magenta dots are at the upper than cyanogen dots.) Rotate the adjusting screw counter-clockwise. Magenta dots move backward.
Caution: The moving direction of magenta dots is assuming the case of observation with a scope.
3- 22
9. Adjust Head Stagger

General A pattern for mechanical adjustment of positional deviation of each head is drawn. Move the head height to the position of 1.5 mm print gap, and select a head to draw the adjusting pattern. The pattern is drawn with only D (Black) raw of each head.
Head selection: 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, ALL
<Head side>
<Adjusting pattern>
Align this line of each head.
3- 23
JV5-130S/160S

<ent>
[ ]
#STAGGER ADJUST HEAD SELECT :1-2
#HEAD ADJUST STAGGER ADJUST <ent>
[ENTER]
[ ] / [ ]: For Head [ENTER]: Fix (Next)
#STAG ADJ. PRINT START
:ent
1. Execute STAGGER ADJUST.
2. Select the head to be adjusted. * Printing pattern depends on the head selected.
*Head Set :1-2 2-3 3-4 ALL
[ENTER]: Print start [ ] : Carriage move
3a. Execute PRINT START. Moving the carriage over platen after pattern drawing to adjust.
Stagger Adjustment: Printing samples When all heads are selected;

HEAD 1 HEAD 2 HEAD 3 HEAD 4
When Head 1-2(2-3, 3-4) are selected;

HEAD 1 HEAD 2
3- 24
Adjustment procedures
For fixing For fixing
For fixing
For fixing
For adjustment
Procedures 1. Loosen 4 screws(for fixing of stagger) indicated by an arrow in the figure. 2. Rotate a screw for adjustment to adjust the stagger as shown in below. Reference: Adjustable range 30 ~ 50 m /1 rotation Moving direction by 1 rotation of screw Counter-clockwise Clockwise
Rotating direction of Adjusting screw
There is a gap at the right end of pattern on the joint of each head. Adjust it using this gap. The joint of head is observed by a scope as the following.
Head 2
Approx. 140 m
Head 2
Head 2
Head 1 Good sample Bad sample 1
Head 1 Bad sample 2
Head 1
Bad sample 1 (The gap is wider than 140m) Rotate the adjusting screw counter-clockwise. The position of Head 2 moves backward. Bad sample 2 (The gap is narrower than 140m) Rotate the adjusting screw clockwise. The position of Head 2 moves forward.
3- 25
JV5-130S/160S
10. Drop Position Correction

General Impact position between heads is adjusted. Setting values are stored in the CORRECT PARAM.
<Dot Position Adjust>
Item Selection of scan speed Selection of head gap
Selection of Y-base, mode Selection of adjusting item
Set value Set value: Normal-SCAN, HiSPEED SCAN Set value: Low 1.5 mm High 2.5 mm Set value: Y BASE, DRAFT/FINE Set value: Y Si, Y Re, Y Bi, FINE Y Si, FINE Y Re, FINE Y Bi
This function can not be executed when head 1 is set to HEAD1 is Not-USE in Head Selection or Machine Configuration. (Take care that when there is an error on head 2 in the Machine Configuration, head 1 is also a head not to be conterolled.)
Y BASE Head 1D raw is set to be standard; adjusting value for D raw of each head is input. (Only D raw of each head is used for the pattern drawing)
Adjusting item: Head1-2, Head1-3, Head1-4 Adjusting value: -50.0 ~ 50.0 dot (unit: 0.1 dot)
3- 26
Y Si, Y Re Adjusting patterns of Head 1-2, Head 1-3, Head 1-4 are drawn successively. Head 1D raw is set to be standard; adjusting value for D raw of each head is input. (Only D raw of each head is used for the pattern drawing)
Adjusting item: Head1-2, Head1-3, Head1-4 Adjusting value: -50.0~ 50.0 dot (unit: 0.1 dot)
Compensation value
Y Bi Impact position adjusting value of approach route/backhaul route is input. Only D raw of Head 1 is used for the pattern drawing.
Adjusting item: Head1-1 Adjusting value: -50.0~50.0 dot (unit: 0.1 dot)
Back Front Compensation value
FINE Y Si, FINE Y Re Head 1D raw is set to be standard; adjusting value for D raw of each head is input. Only D raw of each head is used for the pattern drawing.
Adjusting item: Head1-2, Head1-3, Head1-4 Adjusting value: -50.0~50.0 dot (unit: 0.1 dot)
3- 27
JV5-130S/160S
FINE Y Bi Only D raw of Head 1 is used for the pattern drawing.

Adjusting item: Head1-1 Adjusting value: -50.0~50.0 dot (unit: 0.1 dot)
DROPposCONFIRM.
Drop impact of the same head is confirmed. When this is selected, the following pattern is drawn. Impacts among each color at 4 color mode and impacts against the standard D line can be confirmed.
As they are patterns for confirmation, position compensation is not allowed.
Pattern diagram
Fine mode high speed back
Fine mode high speed approach
Head 1 Head 2 Head 3 Head 4
Draft mode high speed back
Draft mode high speed approach
3- 28
<ent>
[ ]
#DROP POS. MODE SELECT :HiSPEED SCAN :Normal-SCAN
#DROP POS. GAP SELECT
Hs :Low :High
#HEAD ADJUST STAGGER ADJUST <ent> #HEAD ADJUST DROP.POS ADJUST<ent>
[ ] [ENTER]
[ ] / [ ]: For Scan Speed [ENTER]: Fix (to Next)
[ ] / [ ]: For Gap [ENTER]: Fix (to Next)
1. Execute DROP.POS ADJUST.
2. Select a scan speed for the standard. * As of April 28, 2006, select HiSPEED SCAN.
3. Select a Head Gap for the standard. * As of April 28, 2006, select Low.
#DROP POS. SELECT
Y BASE
HsLg: High speed scan/Low HsHg: High speed scan/High SsLg: Normal speed scan/Low *Standard Mode HsLg
Select mode Y-BASE DRAFT FINE-Lo
Available print mode All Y-direction 540dpi Y-direction 720, 1440dpi
DRAFT FINE BASIS SET
Caution: First select Y-BASE, which is the base for all adjustments.
[ ] / [ ]: For Mode [ENTER]: Fix (to Next)
Caution: Effective adjustment values depend on print modes. Conduct adjustment for every mode, or Y Drop Position may be displaced in an unavailable print mode.
4a. Select the aimed correction mode to be adjusted.
4b. ~ Print Mode List ~
#DROP POS. SELECT
HsLg Y BASE
[ENTER]
1-4 1-3 1-2
10-1. Y Base Drop Position Correction

#DROP POS. Y BASE DRAW HsLg :ent
Head1 Head2 Head3 Head4
[ENTER]: Print (to Next) [ ]: Correction
* Dot position correction at Y base. (As this is the standard, execute first.)
1. Execute Y BASE DRAW.
2. Check pattern with scope. Check gaps of Heads 2, 3 and 4 from Head 1 as shown above.
3- 29
JV5-130S/160S
~OK~
~NG~
Head 2 Line
Head 1 Line
+
#DROP POS. Y BASE 1-2 HsLg :0.0
Head 2 Line
Head 1 Line
Head 2 Line
Head 1 Line
*Correction: 1 for 1 dot (Approx. 35m)
[ ] / [ ]: Correction [ENTER]: Fix
~ OK: Lines are overlapped ~ It is judged OK when the line of Head 2, 3 or 4 is agreed with one for Lead 1. To 10-2. Drop Position Correction for other than Y Base
~ NG: Lines are shifted each other ~ Conduct adjustment if the line of Head 2, 3 or 4 is disagreed with one for Head 1.
3. Conduct adjustment. Enter a positive value when the shift is as shown above.
#DROP POS. Y BASE DRAW #DROP POS. Y BASE 1-2 #DROP POS. Y BASE 1-3 #DROP POS. Y BASE 1-4
HsLg :ent HsLg :0.0 HsLg :0.0 HsLg :0.0
[ENTER]
10-2. Drop Position Correction for other than Y Base
#DROP POS. SELECT
HsLg Y BASE DRAFT FINE BASIS SET
[ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER]
[ ] / [ ]: For mode [ENTER]: Fix (to Next)
4. Execute adjusting of 1-3, 1-4 similarly, and draw pattern again. Repeat this until lines are wrapped over.
* Drop Position Correction for DRAFT, FINE and BASIS SET
1. Change mode and fix it.
*Base + Correction Mode

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT ADJUST :Y Si :Y :Y :FINE Y :FINE Y :FINE Y Re Bi Si Re Bi
DRFT: DRAFT F-Lo: FINE-Lo F-Hi: FINE-Hi
Mode DRAFT
Items
Y Si Y Re Y Bi FINE Y Si FINE Y Re FINE Y Bi
FINE-Lo
Note: Hereafter describe correction procedures for the following two modes. Procedures for others are common to them. FINE Y Si & Re FINE Y Bi
FINE Y Si FINE Y Re FINE Y Bi
[ ] / [ ]: Change item [ENTER]: Fix (to Next)
FINE-Hi
2a. Select the item to be corrected. Refer to the next table to adjust the items for each mode.
2b. ~ Correction Item List ~ * As of 2006.04.28, correct only FINE Y Si, FINE Y Re and FINE Y Bi.
3- 30

1-4
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT FINE-Y Si DRAW :ent Y Si DRAW Y Re DRAW FINE-Y Re DRAW FINE-Y Bi DRAW
[ENTER]: Print (to Next) [ ] : Correction
~OK~
1-3 1-2 Head1 Head2 Head3 Head4
Head 2 Line
Head 1 Line
3. Execute drawing of Y forth (back). * Hereafter, correction procedure is basically the same as for Y Base.
4. Check pattern with scope. Check gaps of Heads 2, 3 and 4 from Head 1 as shown above.
~ OK: Lines are overlapped ~ It is judged OK when the line of Head 2, 3 or 4 is agreed with one for Lead 1.
~NG~
Head 2 Line
Head 1 Line
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT FINE-Y Si DRAW :ent #DROP POS. HsLg Y Si H1-H2 : 0.0
[ENTER]
+
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT Y Si H1-H2 : 0.0
[ ]/[ ] : Correction *Correction: [ENTER]: Fix 1 1 dot (Draft: Approx. 45m, Fine-Lo/Hi: Approx. 35m)
[ENTER]
#DROP POS. HsLg Y Si H1-H3 : 0.0 #DROP POS. HsLg Y Si H1-H4 : 0.0
[ENTER]
Head 2 Line
Head 1 Line
[ENTER]
~ NG: Lines are shifted each other ~ Conduct adjustment if the line of Head 2, 3 or 4 is disagreed with one for Head 1.
5. Execute Forth (back) adjust. Enter a positive value when the shift is as shown above.
6. Execute adjusting of H1-3H, H1H4 similarly, and draw pattern again. Repeat this until lines are wrapped over.

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT FINE-Y Bi DRAW :ent Y Si DRAW Y Re DRAW FINE-Y Si DRAW FINE-Y Re DRAW
[ENTER]: Print (to Next) [ ] : Correction
~OK~
Forward
Return Forward line Return line
7. Conduct reciprocation printing.
8. Check pattern with scope. Check the overlaps of forward and return lines with scope.
~ OK: Lines are overlapped ~ It is judged OK when forward and return lines are agreed. Complete adjusting.
3- 31
JV5-130S/160S
~NG~
Forward line
Return line
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT FINE-Y Re DRAW :ent
[ENTER]
+
Execute drawing
]/[ ] : Correction [ENTER]
Forward line
Return line
*Correction: 1 for 1 dot (Draft: Approx. 45m, Fine-Lo/Hi: Approx.
[ENTER]: Fix
~ NG: Lines are disagreed. ~ Conduct adjustment if forward and return lines are disagreed.
9. Conduct adjustment. Enter a positive value when the shift is as shown above.
10. Repeat pattern printing until the lines are overlapped.
11. Reassemble Covers

Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
3- 32
3-2-2. S Pump Assembly
1. Remove S Pump Assembly

Raise Clamp Lever
P4x12 SMW (x5) Pump Cover T (M507253)
Loosen (x3)
1. Raise Clamp Lever.
2. Remove Pump Cover T.
Ink Pump
Washing Pump
Pump 1 Pump 2
Pump 3 Pump 4
S Pump Assembly (M004868)
Pump 1: Ink Pump Pump 2: Ink Pump Pump 3: Washing Pump Pump 4: Washing Pump
P3x6 SMW
3a. Take off Pump Tubes (x4). * Caution: Be careful not to dirty the periphery with waste or washing.
3b. ~ Pump Layout ~ * Confirm the above layout to remove the aimed pump.
4. Remove S Pump Assembly. Loosen the screws to separate S Pump Assembly.
2. Reassemble L Pump Assembly

* Referring to the removed pump, cut the tubes in the same way.
to Sucker fan box assy.
from cleaning fluid cartridge
* See the connection diagram above to certainly connect tubes.
* Conduct adjustment after reassembly.
3- 33
JV5-130S/160S
Content
3. Register Part Change Record
Layout
Register No. of changed part for S Pump Assembly and the date of the change. Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 3 Pump 4

[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
L.*>
FUNCTION #ADJUST
]/[
] :SW
<ENT>
[ENTER] : Fix (to Next)
Tools
#ADJUST EXCHANGE PARTS <ent>
]/[
] :SW
Pump 1: Ink Pump Pump 2: Ink Pump Pump 3: Washing Pump Pump 4: Washing Pump
1. Enter into#ADJUST MODE and select EXCHANGE PARTS. * Start with Maintenance Open Mode.
#EXCHANGE PARTS REGISTRATION <ent> #REGISTRATION PARTS :PUMP INPUT ITEM Date, PumpNo. *PUMP 2006.08.?? :No.?
]/[
] : SW
[ENTER] : Set
#EXCHANGE PARTS HISTORY <ENT> History indication *HEAD [ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2
]/[
] : SW
[ENTER] : Set
]/[
] : SW
[ENTER] : Set
]/[
] : SW
[ [
]/[ ]/[
] : SW ] : Change value
*PUMP [ 1] 06.09.15 : No.1
[ENTER] : Set
Push [END] several times to end
2. Select PUMP in REGISTRATION, and input replaced date and pump number.
3. Confirm registered value. After the confirmation, turn the power OFF to end.
3- 34
3-2-3. Pump Motor Assembly
1. Remove Pump Motor Assembly

Raise Clamp Lever
Loosen (x3)
Pump 1 Pump 2
Pump 3 Pump 4
Ink Side P4x12 SMW (x2) Loosen (x2)
Wash Side Slide up for removal.
Pump 1: Ink Pump motor Pump 2: Ink Pump motor Pump 3: Washing Pump motor Pump 4: Washing Pump motor
3. Confirm the pump mortar to be removed. * Remove corresponding pump mortar with checking above layout drawing.
4. Loosen the screws (x2) for General Pump Motor Assembly. Loosen the screws for the aimed pump motor assembly.
5a. Remove General Pump Motor Assembly. Slide up the pump motor assembly and remove it together with bracket.
Pump Motor Bracket LOW (M507237)

Connector
P3x6 SMW (x2)
Pump Motor Assembly (M007175)
5b. ~ General Pump Motor Assembly ~
6. Remove the pump motor assembly. Loosen the screws (x2) and remove Pump Motor Assembly from Pump Motor Bracket LOW.
7. Remove connector.
3- 35
JV5-130S/160S
2. Reassemble Pump Motor Assembly

to BOX relay PCB (CN3) to BOX relay PCB (CN4) Pump Pump 1 3 Pump Pump 2 4 Pump 1: Ink Pump motor Pump 2: Ink Pump motor Pump 3: Washing Pump motor Pump 4: Washing Pump motor
* When multiple pump mortars are replaced, connect connectors referring to above drawing.
3- 36
3-2-4.
Cap Head assy.
Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Cap Head
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
Maintenance Cover R (M601943)
Care to loss & damage
Cap head assy. (1427776)
Press to remove
Cap Tension Spring G (M800862)
Cap Base
3. Remove Cap Tension Spring G. * Take care not to lose or give damage on parts, and use tweezers or long-nose plier.
4. Release the joint between Cap Head and Cap Base. Press Cap Head along the arrow to remove.
Cap Stopper (M700426) Take off tubes
2. Reassemble Cap Head

5. Take off tubes (x2). * As the position of cap base is adjusted, do not loosen or remove screws.
6. Remove Cap Stopper.
3- 37
JV5-130S/160S
3-2-5.
Cap Base 1H
Content
1. Remove Cap Base

* Remove Cap Head before removing Cap Base. (Removing of a cap space on head 3 position is described here.)
Tools
When only cap base is replaced, place a jig before replacement and conduct positioning using the tool as a standard after the replacement. A Cap base positioning tool (OPT-J0099)
Notice: Place the jig before removing the cap base. If the standard cap base position is lost before placing the tool because of removing another cap bases and so on, conducting of a large scale adjusting is required. See 3. Cap Base Position Adjusting( p. 3 - 39)
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Behind
[ST.MAINTE]
Care to loss & damage
Cap head (1427776)
Press to remove
A Cap base positioning tool
Cap Tension Spring G (M800862)
Cap Base 1H
3. Plase the A Cap base positioning tool. Moving the jig under left side of cap base and tighten screws (x4).
4. Remove Cap Tension Spring G. * Take care not to lose or give damage on parts, and use tweezers or long-nose plier.
5. Release the joint between Cap Head and Cap Base. Press Cap Head along the arrow to remove.
3- 38
Take off tubes
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Cap Spring G 27 (M800864)
Cap Base (M601839)
6. Remove cap head. Rmove tubes (x2), and remove cap head.
7. Remove Cap Spring G 27.
8. Remove Cap Base. Loosen the screws (x2), and remove Cap Base from Station Base.
2. Reassemble Cap Base

Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly. * At replacing of front and back cap bases at the same time or replacing whole, execute the following adjusting.3. Cap Base Position
Adjusting( p. 3 - 39)
Base
1. Assemble with pushing the cap base to the jig. Fit Cap Base to Changing Jig and press the Base against the left corner.
~ Top View ~ Remove the Jig after tightening screws. Hereinafter, assemble with reversed procedures from Step 6.
Content
3. Cap Base Position Adjusting

* This adjusting is conducted when positioning with A Cap base positioning tool is not allowed. As this is the large scale adjusting, positioning must be conducted the method above mentioned as much as possible.
Tools
or adjusting cap position against head.. All Cap base positioning tool (OPT-J0098)
Conduct at replacing of front and back cap bases at the same time or replacing whole,
Right Cover (M507493) Loosen (x2) P4x12 SMW (x2)
1a. Remove Right Cover. Lossen screws back and front screws on bottom side to remove the following screws. Bottom side : 2qty
3- 39
JV5-130S/160S
P4x12 SMW (x7)

Bottom End
CW: Down
1b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ Right side face: 4qty Right top side : 3qty
2a. Lower Station to Bottom End.
~ Station Up/Down ~ Up: CCW (Counterclockwise) Down: CW (Clockwise)
Temporary (x2)
Block B(x2)
Head Base Side
Loosen (x8) All Cap base positioning tool
Block A
Caution: Protect Head Nozzle from Block B on moving Head Base.
3. Loosen all screws for Cap Base.
4. Temporarily fix All Cap base positioning tool. Mount the Jig to Station Base Bracket, and tighten screws (x2).
5a. Manually move Carriage (Head Base) to Block A.
Contact Head Base with Block A at the side.
Accessing
5b. ~ Front View ~
6. Press the jig backward.
7. Up the station so that block B top face approaches to carriage bottom face. * Take care that other parts do not contact
3- 40
Tighten (x2)
Contact
All Cap base positioning tool
Lower Station to move Carriage
8. Slowly pull the jig toward you to contact Block B with the back end of Head.
9. Tighten the screws for temporary fixing of the jig. * Keep the jig at the position on tightening screws.
10. Lower Station to Bottom End and move Carriage.
Tighten (x8)
Screw(x2)
All Cap base positioning tool
11. Press Cap Base against the left corner to fix. Press every Cap Base against the left corner to fix with screws.
12. Loosen the screws (x2)to remove the jig.
3- 41
JV5-130S/160S
3-2-6. Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly

Content Method of replacing presense/near end sencor, solenoid, ink needle and ID terminal PCB that form a cartridge Assy, is explained. Tools and Jigs Syringe (for sucking ink) Tape (a little) Waste Cloth (Bemcot etc.) Gloves Work Flow
1. Remove Cartridge Assembly ( P. 3- 42 ) 2. Remove Presence & Near End Sensors (P. 3- 45 ) 4. Remove Solenoid and Needle ( P. 3- 47 ) 6. Remove ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly ( P. 3- 48 ) 3. Reassemble Presence & Near End Sensors ( P. 3- 46 ) 3. Reassemble Presence & Near End Sensors (P. 3- 46 )
7. Reassemble ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly ( P. 3- 48 )
8. Reassemble Cartridge Assembly ( P. 3- 49 )
9. Supply and Confirmation of Ink ( P. 3- 49 )
10. Reassemble Covers ( P. 3- 50 )
Behind
ICU Cover F (M507574)
1. Remove Cartridge Assembly
P4x12 SMW (x2) No need to remove

1. Shut off the main power.
2a. Remove ICU Cover F and ICU Cover R together. Right side face : 2qty Left side face : 2qty Back face bottom : 2qty
No need to remove
P4x12 SMW (x2)
ICU Cover R (M507575)
2b. ~ Remove ICU Cover F & R ~
2c. ~ ICU Cover F & R ~
3- 42
Left
Remove 2 cartridges
B3x6 (x2)
4. Pull out the aimed Ink Cartridges (x2). Remove the aimed pair of ink cartridges.
5. Remove the head cover. Remove right and left screws to remove the head cover.
Right
Turn toward you.
Caution: Do not push clear film to avoid ink leakage. Protect it from tools with a sharp edge.
Do not press. Turn backward. Damper Assembly
6b. ~ Remove Damper Lock SP ~ Revolve the left and right ends backward to remove.
7a. Remove Damper Assembly. Pull the concerned Damper Assembly out of Head Unit.
7b. ~ Caution for Damper ~
MMC C Y Y K K K K Y Y C CMM
M M C C Lc Lc K K Y Y C C M M LmLm
Ink Cartridges
Ink Cartridges
Fixing syringe
Damper HEAD
Damper HEAD
7c. ~ Damper arrangement(4 color) ~ Arrangement layout of damper and cartridgesat 4 colors in front view.
7d. ~ Damper arrangement(6 color) ~ Arrangement layout of damper and cartridgesat 6 colors in front view.
8. Set a syrunge to the damper. * This process is conducted for each head (x4).
3- 43
JV5-130S/160S
Tape
Notice: Never push the syringe at ink suction. Ink will leak from the needle and inside of slot will be contaminated.
Suction with pushing
Fix Solenoids to ON.
9. Fix a lever of solenoid with tape. Push down and fix corresponding solenoid (x2) with tape to turn ON (valve open) in manual.
10a.Suck ink in a tube Discharge ink in a tube with pulling the syringe while pushing damper. * Suck ink again at assembling process.
10b. ~ Caution at using syringe ~
Remove (x2)
Cartridge Coupling Plate (M507201) x2
P3x6 SMW (x2) RS O-ring (M700326) P3x5 SMW (x32)
11. Remove the tubes (x2) for the concerned cartridges. * Be careful not to lose RS O-ring on removing tubes.
12. Remove Cartridge Coupling Plates (x2).
13a.Remove Cartridge Assembly. Loosen screws (x2), and remove the concerned Cartridge Assembly from IC Slot Bracket R.
Widen a little.
13b. ~ POINT ~ To make the removal from IC Slot Bracket R easier, a little loosen the screws for the left (keyboard side) cartridge and widen it as shown above.
13c. ~ Cartridge Assembly ~ * Be careful of cables to place on waste cloth.
* Ink Unit PCB Bracket must be removed for some cartridge position.
3- 44
Presence Sensor Near End Sensor Solenoid Valve Needle ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly
P.3-45 P.3-47 P.3-48
* Hereinafter, steps are divided according to parts. Refer to corresponding parts.
2. Remove Presence & Near End Sensors

* Presence sensor, near end sensor Remove (connector included). 1a. Disconnect the cable from Clamp.
Release cable.
1b. ~ Release cable. ~
Presence Sensor
P3x10 SMW
Connector and cable for Ink Unit PCB are assigned numbers within 1-16 for each sensor and solenoid aside from CN No. Assignment is as shown below. 16 15 14 ... ... 3 2 1
TP 2x8 Near End Sensor
2. Remove Presence Sensor.
3. Remove Near End Sensor.
4a. Remove connector from Ink Unit PCB. Identify No. of the concerned sensor to remove from PCB.
3- 45
JV5-130S/160S
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CN No. CN10 CN11 CN12 CN13 CN14 CN15 CN16 CN17 CN18 CN19 CN20 CN21 CN22 CN23 CN24 CN25
Destination Presence/Near End Sensor 1 Presence/Near End Sensor 2 Presence/Near End Sensor 3 Presence/Near End Sensor 4 Presence/Near End Sensor 5 Presence/Near End Sensor 6 Presence/Near End Sensor 7 Presence/Near End Sensor 8 Presence/Near End Sensor 9 Presence/Near End Sensor 10 Presence/Near End Sensor 11 Presence/Near End Sensor 12 Presence/Near End Sensor 13 Presence/Near End Sensor 14 Presence/Near End Sensor 15 Presence/Near End Sensor 16
4b. Ink Unit PCB Connection List (Presence/Near End Sensors) * Each sensor has 4 pins and gray cable. Connector is on the upper left of PCB
3. Reassemble Presence & Near End Sensors

1. Split cable for each sensor. 2. Remove loosening of cable.
* Keep Near End Sensor Cable from Cartridge Frame. (See above photo.)
Keep from frame.
Keep from frame.
~ Cable Work 1 ~
~ Cable Work 2 ~
3- 46
4. Remove Solenoid and Needle

* Remove in the order of valve solenoid, ink needle (valve base).
Release Clamp. P3x6 SMW (x2)
1. Remove the cable for ID Point of Contact PCB from clamp.
2. Loosen the screws for Solenoid Valve.
Connector and cable for Ink Unit PCB are assigned numbers within 1-16 for each sensor and solenoid aside from CN No. Assignment is as shown below. 16 15 14 ... ... 3 2 1
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CN No. CN28 CN29 CN30 CN31 CN32 CN33 CN34 CN35 CN36 CN37 CN38 CN39 CN40 CN41 CN42 CN43
Destination Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve Solenoid V alve 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3. Remove Solenoid Valve Assembly from Valve Base.
4a. Remove connector from Ink Unit PCB. Identify No. of the concerned solenoid to remove connector from PCB.
Fix nut and loosen screw B3x8 (x2)
4b. Ink Unit PCB Connection Table (Solenoid Valves) * Each solenoid has 2 pins and red and black cable. Connector is on the upper right of PCB
Solenoid Bracket (M507348)
TP3x8 F
4c. ~ Solenoid Valve ~
5. Loosen nuts and screws (x2) for Valve Base and Cartridge Frame V.
6. Remove Solenoid Bracket.
3- 47
JV5-130S/160S
Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly (M007124)

7b. ~ Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly ~
7a. Remove Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly.
6. Remove ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly
Remove connector
Release clamp
1. Release Clamp. Release the clamp for ID Point of Contact PCB Cable.
2. Remove cable from ID Point of Contact PCB.
TP3x8 F (x2) Loosen (x2)
ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly (E103704)
Slide out
OK 3a. Loosen the screws (x2). Loosen the screws (x2) for ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly, and slide it out to remove from Cartridge Frame.
NG
7. Reassemble ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly

3b. ~ ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly ~ * Replace Contact PCB if the head of either contact is worn.
3- 48
8. Reassemble Cartridge Assembly

Tube Retaining Screw M6 (1033482) RS O-ring (M700326)
Tighten as pressing O-ring
* Caution: Be sure to tighten Tube Retaining Screw as pressing Oring. If O-ring is hanging out, tighten over again. It is too tight.
9. Supply and Confirmation of Ink

After ink suction with a syringe, execute cleaning and test drawing to make sure that there is no nozzle missing.
Set 2 cartridges
Fixing Syringe
1. Set removed ink cartridge (x2). Set 2 removed ink cartridge.
2. Set a syringe to damper. * Execute this process for each head (x4).
Tape
Notice: Never push the syringe at ink suction. Ink will leak from the needle and inside of slot will be contaminated.
Suck with pushing
Fix Solenoids to ON.
3. Fix lever of solenoid with tape Push down and fix corresponding solenoid (x2) with tape to ON valve open) in manual.
4a. Suck ink to fill damper (x4) with ink Pull syringe to fill dampers with ink while pushing the dampers.
4b. ~ Caution at using syringe ~
3- 49
JV5-130S/160S
[JV5-01]
[CLEANING] [ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set

L.*>
1234 12---34

Check result
Nozzle skip
OK
CLEANING TYPE
:HARD :NORMAL :SOFT
[ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set
TEST DRAW
<ENT>
** TEST DRAW **
CLEANING ACTIVE *******-------------
Cleaning Power OFF (Execute several goto 10. Reassemtimes) ble Covers( p. 3 If not improved 50) goto 9-1. Check Ink Route( p. 3 - 50)
5. Execute hard cleaning Turn the main power (back side) to ON to execute hard cleaning.
6. Set media to execute test drawing.
7. Check the result of drawing. * Repeat Test Draw until nozzle skip is removed.
9-1. Check Ink Route

* When there is problems on print quality such as nozzle missing, check ink supply path (in a tube).
Rear Cover R (M507496) P4x12 SMW (x11) Loosen (x4)
1. Remove Rear Cover R.
2a. Visually check tubes. Visually check whether tubes are filled with ink and free of air bubbles.

2b. Check the loosening of fittings. * Check 5 couplers at each of 4 branchesx 8 = 40 parts.
3- 50
3-2-7. Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly

Content Method of replacing presense/near end sencor, solenoid, ink needle that form a cleaning cartridge Assy, is explained. As for ID terminal PCB, see ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge)( p. 3 - 101). Tools and Jigs Waste Cloth (Bemcot etc.) Gloves Work Flow
3. Remove Presence & Near End Sensors 1. Drain Washing
(P . 3- 51 )

(P . 3- 54 )
2. Remove Wash cartridge Assembly ( P. 3- 52 )
(P . 3- 53 )
5. Remove Solenoid and Needle ( P. 3- 54 )

(P . 3- 54 )
7. Reassemble Wash cartridge Assembly ( P. 3- 56 ) 8. Filling Washing ( P. 3- 56 )
Power SW ON
L.*> [JV5-01]
HD.MAINTENANCE FIll UP INK <ent>
[ ]/[ ] [ENTER] [ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
1. Drain Washing
[ST.MAINTE]
MAINTENANCE ST.MAINTENANCE <ent> MAINTENANCE HD.MAINTENANCE <ent>
HD.MAINTENANCE MaintWashLiquid<ent> MaintWashLiquid FILLING UP <ent> MaintWashLiquid DISCHARGE <ent>
[ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
1. Turn the power of JV-5 ON to enter the Maintenance Menu.
2. Select DISCHARGE of maintenance washi liquid.
Remove washi fluid cartridge

It'sBeingDischarged. PLEASE WAIT ******--------------
3. Remove washi fluid cartridge to discharge washi fluid.
3- 51
JV5-130S/160S
Behind
2. Remove Wash cartridge Assembly
Release clamp (x3)
P4x12 SMW (x7) Side Relay PCB
3a. Remove Right Cover. Loosen back and front screws on the bottom side to remove the following screws. Bottom side : 2qty
3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ Right side face : 4qty Right top side : 3qty
4. Disconnect cable from Clamp. Release the clamps (x3) for Side Relay PCB Cable.
P4x12 SMW (x3)
Tube Retaining Screw M6 (1033482) Lay protection sheet. RS O-ring (M700326)
5a. Remove Wash Cartridge. Remove Wash Cartridge Assembly together with Base to temporarily place to the position shown above.
5b. * Caution: Lay protection sheet to protect cover from flaw or dirt, and place Wash Cartridge Assembly there.
6. Disconnect tube. Loosen fitting screw and disconnect tube from Valve Base. * Caution: Be careful not to lose RS O-ring.
3- 52
Presence Sensor Near End Sensor Solenoid Valve Needle
P.3-52 P.3-54
* Hereinafter steps are divided according to parts. Rferer to corresponding parts.
3. Remove Presence & Near End Sensors

* Remove presence sensor and near end sensor (connector included). 1. Release cable from clamp.
Release cable
1b. ~ Release cable. ~
Presence Sensor
P3x10 SMW
Side Relay PCB (E104352)
TP 2x8 Near End Sensor Disconnect CN7
2. Remove Presence Sensor.
3. Remove Near End Sensor.
4. Disconnect connector (CN7). Disconnect the connector from Side Relay PCB.
3- 53
JV5-130S/160S

1. Split cable for each sensor. 2. Remove loosening of cable.
* Keep Near End Sensor cable from Cartridge Frame. (See above photo.)
Keep from frame.
Keep from frame.
~ Cable Work 1 ~
~ Cable Work 2 ~
Release clamp P3x6 SMW (x2)
1. Remove ID Point of Contact PCB Cable from clamp.
2. Loosen screws for Solenoid Valve.
3- 54
Disconnect CN6
3. Remove Solenoid Valve Assembly from Valve Base.
4a. Disconnect the connector (CN6) from Side Relay PCB.
4b. ~ Solenoid Valve ~
Fix nuts and loosen screws B3x8 (x2)
Solenoid Bracket (M507348)
TP3x8 F Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly (M007124)
5. Loosen nuts and screws (x2) for Valve Base and Cartridge Frame V.
6. Remove Solenoid Bracket.
7a. Remove Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly.

7b. ~ Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly ~
3- 55
JV5-130S/160S
7. Reassemble Wash cartridge Assembly

Tube Retaining Screw M6 RS O-ring (M700326)
Tighten as pressing O-ring.
* Caution: Be sure to tighten Tube Retaining Screw as pressing Oring. If O-ring is hanging out, tighten over again. It is too tight.
Main Power ON (Back)
Power SW ON
8. Filling Washing
HD.MAINTENANCE FIll UP INK <ent> [ ]/[ ]
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
HD.MAINTENANCE MaintWashLiquid<ent> [ENTER] MaintWashLiquid FILLING UP <ent> [ENTER]

Execute washi liquid filling
MAINTENANCE ST.MAINTENANCE <ent> [ ]/[ ] MAINTENANCE HD.MAINTENANCE <ent> [ENTER]
1. Turn the power of JV-5 ON to enter the Maintenance Menu.
2. Washi liquid filling. * As for detailes of screen transitions at filling, see the Instruction Manual.
3- 56
3-2-8. Damper Assembly

Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Damper Assembly
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
Right

Move fulcrum pin inword, and remove it from pin hole.
Right Right
3a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move right side fulcrum pin to inword and remove it from pin hole.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Left
B3x6 (x2)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
Right
3b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ Remove a pin from left sgaft hole to remove the front cover.
4. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove Y cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons
5. Remove the head cover. Remove right and reft screws to remove the head cover.
3- 57
JV5-130S/160S
Lay Media.
1 3
2 4
(Front)
6. Lay media on Platen to prevent from dirt.
7a. Identify the Head to be removed.
7b. ~ To remove back Damper ~

* To remove Dampers for Heads 1 and 2, disconnect quick valve for the front head for servicing.
Joint Valve Assembly (M006954) Turn toward you. Turn backward.
8b. ~ Remove Damper Lock SP ~ Revolve the left and right ends backward to remove.
9. Turn coupler screw to remove a tube from coupler valve Assy. * Conduct the operation with placing waste cloth, though there is no ink dropping basically.
Caution: Do not push clear film to avoid ink leakage. Protect it from tools with a sharp edge.
Damper Assembly Do not press.
10a.Remove Damper Assembly. Remove damper Assy with coupler valve Assy.
10b.~ Caution for Damper ~ * As the damper is filled with ink, take care not to contaminate other parts with ink dropped from the damper.
3- 58
Caution: Protect film from a sharp edge of a tool.
2. Reassemble Damper Assembly

Not to cut
* ~ Caution for Damper ~
* Place damper lock SP so that protrusions on both sides push up coupler part of the damper.
Main Power ON (Back) Power SW ON
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[FUNCTION] [ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER]
3. Filling Ink
* Caution: Take the right procedure to save ink and improve work efficiency.

L.*> [JV5-01]
FUNCTION MAINTENANCE
<ENT>
MAINTENANCE HD.MAINTENANCE <ent> HD.MAINTENANCE FILL UP INK <ent>
1. Set media and turn the power ON.
2. Execute FILL UP INK.
FILL UP INK HEAD SELECT
:12.34 :12-:--34
L.*>
[ ] / [ ]: Cursor Move [ ] / [ ]: Head Choice

FILL UP INK *****--------------HD.MAINTENANCE FILL UP INK <ent>
TEST DRAW
<ENT>
** TEST DRAW **
[END] : End
3. Choose Head and fill ink. * Choose a set of Heads 1 and 2 or Heads 3 and 4.
4. Execute test drawing.
3- 59
JV5-130S/160S
[JV5-01]
[CLEANING]
CLEANING TYPE
1234 12---34
TYPE TYPE
:NORMAL
:SOFT :HARD
[ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set
[ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set
CLEANING ACTIVE *******-------------
Notice: Select [HARD] or [NORMAL] of cleaning according to nozzle missing state. Select [NORMAL] at a few nozzle missings.
Content
Layout Tools
Register No. of changed Damper Assembly and the date of the change. See below.
1 3 (Front side)
2 4
A B C D E F G H ~Head Top View~
~ Damper Layout ~ * Designate Head No. (1-4) - Nozzle Row (A-H)
(Start with Maintenance Open Mode )

[JV5-01]
#EXCHANGE PARTS REGISTRATION <ent> #REGISTRATION PARTS :DAMPER INPUT ITEM Date. HeadNo.-NzlNo. *DAMPER 2006.08.31:No.1-H
[ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set [ ] / [ ] :SW [ENTER] : Set
#EXCHANGE PARTS HISTORY <ENT> History indication *HEAD [ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2 *DAMPER [ 3] 06.07.23:No.3-E
[ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set
L.*>
[FUNCTION] [ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set [ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set
FUNCTION #ADJUST
<ENT>
[ ] / [ ] : SW
#ADJUST EXCHANGE PARTS <ent>
[ ] / [ ] : SW [ ] / [ ] : Change value [ENTER] : Set
Push [END] several times to
1. Select EXCHANGE PARTS in #ADJUST MODE * Start with the Maintenance Mode.
2. Select DAMPER in REGISTRATION, and input exchange date and No.
3. Confirm registrations. After the confirmation, turn the power OFF to end.
3- 60
3-2-9.
Sucker BOX
1. Remove Sucker BOX

Raise Clamp Lever
Loosen (x3)
TP4x50 (x4)
Pinch Screw (x2)
Pump Tube Holder U (M601993) FB Box Fan Assembly (ME104398)
3. Remove cables of FB fan from clamp.
4. Remove FB Box Fan Assembly. Remove screws (x4), remove FB BOX fan Assy with a fan guard.
5. Remove pump tube holding member U.
TB4x10 (x3)
Fan BOX Stay A (M507541) x2
Turn stay at 90.
Notice: Place waste cloth not to contaminate

other parts with waste liq
uid droppin
g.
Fan BOX Stay B (M507542)
6. Remove pump tube (x4) from the suction fan BOX.
7. Remove screws (x3) of fan BOX stay (A&B) fixing suction fan BOX.
8. Loosen screws (x3) of fan BOX stay (A&B) and turn at 90 to down.
3- 61
JV5-130S/160S
Sucker BOX (M601848)
9. Keep lifting Sucker BOX and pull toward you to remove. * Take care not to contaminate the floor with waste ink.
Notice: Take care not to cut film with tools having sharp head.
2. Reassemble Sucker BOX

* ~ Cautions for Handling ~
3- 62
3-2-10. NCU
Content After replacement of NCU, reset NCULD, register the history of parts exchange, and executetest of NCU. Tools and Jigs Mini-driver (having short handle) Work Flow
1. Remove NCU
(P . 3-63 )
2. Reassemble NCU
(P . 3-65 )
3. Reset NCU LD
(P . 3- 65)

(P . 3- 66 )
5. NCU Test ( P. 3- 67 )
* The order of NCU LD reset and exchange history registration can be changed.
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Behind
1. Remove NCU
[ST.MAINTE]
Right
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Move fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from pin hole.
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
2a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move the fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from pin hole.
3. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6), and remove Y cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
3- 63
JV5-130S/160S
Maintenance Cover R (M601943) Rear Cover R (M507496) P4x12 SMW (x11) Loosen (x4)
Down Clamp Lever
6. Down Clamp Lever
Left
Right
Loosen (x4) P4x12 SMW
Left
P4x12 SMW Front cover sensor L
Left Tilt
Loosen (x3) P4x12 SMW KB Cover (M601945)
KB Cover (M601945) Loosen P4x12 SMW
Not to hit
7a. Remove KB Cover. Loosen 4 screws on the right side.
7b. ~ Removeing KB Cover 2 ~ Remove screw on front cover sensor R, loosen a screw on bottom side, tilt to front, and remove lower screws fixing KB cover in the drwaing above.
7c. ~ Removing KB Cover 3 ~ Loosen screws (x3), take out KB Cover with taking care not to hit the dryer unit.
CN2
Dot detection PCB P4x12 SMW (x4)
8. Disconnect connector from Dot detection PCB. Release the clamp for NCU cable and disconnect connector (CN2) from Dot detection PCB.
9a. Loosen screws (x4) for NCU. Loosen the screws for NCU.
9b. ~ Loosen NCU screws ~
3- 64
NCU (E300469)
10. Remove NCU.
10b. ~ NCU ~
10c. ~ Interior after NCU has removed ~
2. Reassemble NCU
Content
3. Reset NCU LD
Tools
Initialize LD consumption current value of NCU As JV-5 issues NCU exchange message or stops operation from the LD consumption current value, not to forget to reset after exchange.

[JV5-01]
L.*>
[FUNCTION]
NCU NOZZLE CHECK #NCU NCU LD RESET
<ent> [ ] / [ ] : SW <ent> [ENTER] :Fix
(to Next)
* Make sure that JV-5 is in the Local Idling State (initializing operation is completed and being capped) before conducting this adjustment.
1. Select NCU LD RESET in FUNCTION Menu. * Start with the Maintenance Open Mode.
3- 65
JV5-130S/160S
[ENTER] :Fix #NCU LD RESET (to Next) LDcons.ELcurr.:RESET

** Being LD-reset ** PLEASE WAIT **RESET COMPLETION** #NCU LD RESET LDcons.ELcurr.:RESE
!! RESET FAILURE !! #NCU LD RESET LDcons.ELcurr.:RESE
Error Outline
[END] : End
Action
If NCU reset is not conducted in capping state after starting the system and initialization operation is completed, RESET FAILURE error arises. Ex.) When reset is executed in cover open state, it does not end in normal. Check initializing operation and capping are in normal.
2a. Press [ENTER] to reset LD consumption current. After normal end, press [END] several times to end.
2b. ~ Error Display ~ Above error display indicates that reset is not completed in normal. Make sure that JV-5 starts with the Maintenance Open mode, and reset again.
Content Register the date of NCU change.
2c. ~ Action at Error ~
Tools

[JV5-01]
L.*> FUNCTION #ADJUST
[FUNCTION] [ ] / [ ] :SW (to Next) (to Next)
<ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
#ADJUST [ ] / [ ] :SW EXCHANGE PARTS <ent> [ENTER] :Fix
1. Select EXCHANGE PARTS in #ADJUST Mode * Start with the Maintenance Open Mode.
#EXCHANGE PARTS [ ] / [ ] :SW REGISTRATION <ent> [ENTER] :Fix #REGISTRATION [ ] / [ ] :SW PARTS :NCUsensorUNIT [ENTER] :Fix INPUT ITEM Date *NCUsensorUNIT 2006.08.31
(to Next) (to Next)
#EXCHANGE PARTS [ ] / [ ] :SW HISTORY <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix History indication *HEAD [ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2 *NCUsensorUNIT [ 4] 06.07.23
(to Next)
[ ]/ [ ] : SW
[ ] / [ ] :SW [ ] / [ ] :Change Value [ENTER] :Fix
Push [END] several times to
2. select NCUsensorUNIT in REGISTRATION and input exchanged date.
3. Confurm Registrations. After the confirmation, turn the power OFF to end.
3- 66
Content
5. NCU Test
Tools
Make sure that replaced NCU functions in normal with NCU FUNCTION in FUNCTION MENU. As this function assumes that there is no nozzle missing, nozzle missing check must be done beforehand.
L.*>
TEST DRAW
<ENT>
** TEST DRAW **
1. Execute test drawing
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[CLEANING]
CLEANING HEAD SELECT
[ ]/ [ ] :SW 1234 [ENTER] :Fix 12-(to Next)

--34
Notice: Select [HARD] or [NORMAL]of cleaning according to nozzle missing state. Select [NORMAL] at a few nozzle missing.
CLEANING TYPE TYPE TYPE
:NORMAL :SOFT :HARD
[ ]/ [ ] :SW [ENTER] :Fix (to Next)
CLEANING ACTIVE *******-------------

[JV5-01]
#TEST NOZZLE CHK TEST<ent> #TEST SDRAM CHECK #TEST F-ROM CHECK
[ENTER] : Execute [ ] / [ ] : SW [END] : To Menu [ENTER]Execute [ ] / [ ] : SW [END] : To Menu [ENTER] : Exec [ ] / [ ] : SW [END] : To Menu [ENTER] : Exec [ ] / [ ] : SW [END] : To Menu
#TEST LINE VOLTAGE
<ent>
[ENTER] : Exec [ ] / [ ] : SW [END] : To Menu [ENTER] : Exec [ ] / [ ] : SW [END] : To Menu [ENTER] : Exec [ ] / [ ] : SW [END] : To Menu [ENTER] : Exec [ ] / [ ] : SW [END] : To Menu
L.*>
[FUNCTION] [ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] :Fix (to Next)
<ent>
#TEST LD&SensorTEST <ent> #TEST SERIAL CHECK
NCU NOZZLE CHECK #NCU TEST
<ent>
<ent>
<ent>
<ent>
#TEST LDconsu.ELcurr.<ent>
#TEST LASER TEMP.CHK <ent>
3. Select TEST in NCU FUNCTION Of FUNCTION MENU. * Start with the Maintenance Open Mode.
4a. Execte tests of above 8 items. * As for detailes of operation flow, see . As for detailes of NCU, see .
p.2- 54 p.2- 23
4b. ~ NCU T est Screen Configuration 2 ~
After the test is completed, press [END] several times to turn the power OFF.
3- 67
JV5-130S/160S
3- 68
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3.
Overhaul of PCBs
PCBs to be used for JV5-130S/160S are shown below.
Part 3-3-1. Main PCB 3-3-2. HDC PCB 3-3-3. IO PCB 3-3-4. USB PCB 3-3-5. Head Relay PCB 3-3-6. Slider PCB 3-3-7. Power PCB 3-3-8. Heater PCB 3-3-9. BOX Relay PCB ~ Left ~
Reference page
p. 3 - 70 p. 3 - 77 p. 3 - 78 p. 3 - 79 p. 3 - 81 p. 3 - 82 p. 3 - 85 p. 3 - 88 p. 3 - 90
Part 3-3-10. Keyboard PCB 3-3-11. Dot Detection PCB 3-3-12. Ink Unit PCB 3-3-13. Side Relay PCB 3-3-14. ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge) 3-3-15. LED PCB 3-3-16. Take-up PCB 3-3-17. Drying Fan Fork PCB
Reference page
p. 3 - 92 p. 3 - 96 p. 3 - 98 p. 3 - 99 p. 3 - 101 p. 3 - 103 p. 3 - 105 p. 3 - 106
Ink Unit PCB
~ Head Assy ~
Slider PCB
Head Relay PCB (x4) LED PCB (x2)
Keyboard PCB ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge)
Heater PCB
HDC PCB (x4)
Side Relay PCB
Drying Fan Fork PCB (x2)
Dot Detection PCB Power PCB Take-up PCB IO PCB Main PCB USB PCB
BOX Relay PCB
3- 69
JV5-130S/160S
3-3-1.
Main PCB
Content In changing Main PCB, parameters must be registered to Main PCB ROM after the change. In the view of work efficiency and print quality and to save the time for re-adjusting and re-setting them, make a copy of (upload) the parameters before the change in PC and write (download) them into the new Main PCB after the change. Tools & jigs PC F/W Upload Tool USB Cable Work Flow
1. Upload Parameters ( P. 3- 70 ) 2. Remove Main PCB
(P . 3- 71 )
3. Reassemble Main PCB ( P. 3- 73 )
4. Download Parameters
(P . 3- 73 )
5. Adjust Main PCB Motor Current ( P. 3- 75 )
* If upload of parameters is unavailable, conduct Parameter Draw to note the values. Then manually register them after changing Main PCB.
] + [
] + Power ON
1. Upload Parameters
(Start with parameter Up/Down load Mode)

Up& Download Ready!
1. Start JV5 with parameter Up/ Down load Mode. Turn the power ON with pressing [ ]+[ ].
2a. Start F/W Upload Tool.
2b. ~ F/W Upload Tool Menu ~
3. Select [Upload] Tab.
4. Select interface. In [Device] section, check the interface connecting printer.
3- 70
Overhaul of PCBs
PC
JV5
***UPLOADING***
5. Select [JV5.PRM]. Select [JV5.PRM] in [PRM File].
6a. Execute [Upload!!].
6b. ~ Indication during upload ~ * Click [Abort] Button to cancel.
Up & Download END Power Off
If upload is failed or impracticable, conduct Parameter Draw to note the parameter values and manually register them after the work is completed.
Note :
Power OFF 7. Save Parameter File. Parameter Save Window automatically appears when Upload is successfully completed. Enter file name to save parameters. 8. Turn off the power of JV5. Confirm the above indication on Operation Panel of JV5 before shutting down.
Behind
2. Remove Main PCB

MF Cover R (M507164) P4x12 SMW (x8)
Loosen (x6)
2. Remove MF Cover R. Dont take off the screws (x6) but just loosen, and reassembly will be easier. (Be careful not to fall Cover.)
3- 71
JV5-130S/160S
USB Protection Bracket (M507828)
P4x12 SMW (x4) B3x6 Surface Cover RS (M507507) IF Bracket (M507318)
P3x10 SMW (x2)
3. Remove USB Protection Bracket.
4. Remove Surface Cover RS.
5. Remove IF Bracket.
Release HDC PCB connector
P3x10 SMW (x8) Release connectors Release connector.
6. Release HDC PCB Connectors. Loosen the screws (x8) for HDC PCBs (x4) and pull a little toward you to disconnect from Main PCB.
7a. Disconnect Main PCB Connectors.
7b. ~ Release connectors (Upper) ~
P3x10 SMW (x4)
IF Relay PCB P3x10 SMW (x8)
USB PCB Assembly (E103711)
SQ-30 (x4)
8. Loosen the screws (x4) for USB PCB Assembly.
9. Remove USB PCB Assembly. Remove USB PCB Assembly from Main PCB Connector together with IF Relay.
10a.Remove Main PCB Assembly. Loosen the screws (x8) and the hexagon studs (x4) to take laterally out of printer.
3- 72
Overhaul of PCBs
MemoryPCB Assy (E104090) x2
MemoryPCB Assy (E104090)
Main PCB Assy (E104082)
10b.Remove memory PCB Assy (x2). Remove memory PCB Assy(x2) from main PCB.
10c. ~ Memory PCB Assembly ~
10d. ~ Main PCB Assembly ~
OK
NG
3. Reassemble Main PCB

* To connect USB PCB (IF Relay PCB) with Main PCB, certainly fit the connector to the bottom.
A washer of screw is outside of the cover
A washer of screw is inside of the cover.
* Put cover inside of loosened screws to tighten them.
] + [
] + Power ON
4. Download Parameters
(Start with parameter Up/Down load Mode)

Up& Download Ready!
1. Start JV5 with parameter Up/ Down load Mode Turn the power ON with pressing [ ]+[ ].
2a. Start F/W Upload Tool.
3- 73
JV5-130S/160S
2b. ~ F/W Upload Tool Menu~
3. Select [Download] Tab.
4. Select Interface. In [Device] section, check the interface connecting printer.
5. Select [JV5.PRM]. Select [JV5.PRM] in [PRM File].
6. Select the file to be downloaded. Click [Browse] Button to select the file uploaded before PCB change.
7a. Execute [Download!!]
PC
Up & Download END Power Off
JV5
***DOWNLOADING***
Power OFF 8. Confirmation of success Above dialog appears when download is successfully completed. Click [OK] Button. 9. Shut down JV5. Confirm the above indication to appear on JV5 Operation Panel before shutting off the power.
7b. ~ Indication during download ~ * Click [Abort] Button to cancel.
3- 74
Overhaul of PCBs
Content
5. Adjust Main PCB Motor Current
Adjusting contents Tools
Adjust electric current of Xmotar and Y-motor. 3 adjust items are shown in the right. 2 adjustments are conducted on each motor. Set to minimum motorHunting noise at operation of each motor.
STOP ADJUST
Y MOVING
ADJUST
X MOVING ADJUST
On X-Motor: Stop adjust X moving adjust On Y Motor: Stop adjust Y moving adjust
~ Motor Current Adjust Outline ~
* Adjust value varies on each motor and each machine * Adjustable range is within 130~160 on each motor.

[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
#MOTOR CURRENT STOP ADJUST <ent> [^] CurrentValueUP [V] CurrentValueDOWN X = 0 Y = 0 (****) (****)
[ENTER] : Set
#MOTOR CURRENT STOP ADJUST <ent> #MOTOR CURRENT X MOVING ADJUST<ent> #X MOVING ADJUST S= 10mm/s X= 100mm A=0.20G
[ [
]/[
] : SW
L.*>
[ [
]/[ ]/[
] : CV ] :SW
[ENTER] : Set
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST
<ent>
]/[
] : SW
[ENTER] : Ret
0 ~255 (Input Range)
]/[ ]/[
] : CV ] :Set
[ENTER] : Set
[ENTER] : Return
1. Select MOTOR CURRENT in #ADJUST MODE * Start with the Maintenance Open Mode.
2. Execute STOP ADJUST. Adjust electric current value of Xmotor and Y-motor so that Hunting noise of both motor is minimized on the station in not carriage out.
(At X-motor drv.)
3a. Execute X MOVING ADJUST.
#X MOVING ADJUST S= 10mm/s X= 100mm A=0.20G

[ [ ]/[ ]/[ ] : CV ] : Move
[ENTER] : Exec [END] : Return
#XmovingADJUST *RUN* xxx (xxxx) S= 10mm/s A=0.20G X= 100mm
]/[
] : VC : Ret
[END]
#MOTOR CURRENT STOP ADJUST <ent> #MOTOR CURRENT Y MOVING ADJUST<ent> #Y MOVING ADJUST S= 10mm/s Y= 100mm A=1.00G
[ [
]/[
] : SW
X-axis consecutive drive (X-mortar drive)

* * Not Cap OFF
[END]
Input values with targetting 130~160 . (Input range 0~255)
[ENTER] : Set
]/[ ]/[
] : CV ] : SW
[ENTER] : Return
3b. Input test conditions to execu * Input the following conditions. Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/s Acceleration (A) : 0.2 G Length (X) : approx. 50 ~ 100 mm
te
3c. With listening to Hunting noise at X-motor driving, adjust value to minimize the noise. Check the noise of X-motor at the left back side of JV-5.
4a. Execute Y MOVING ADJUST.
3- 75
JV5-130S/160S
(At Y-motor drv.)

#Y MOVING ADJUST S= 10mm/s Y= 100mm A=1.00G
[ [ ]/[ ]/[ ] : CV ] : Move
[ENTER] : Exec [END] : Return
#YmovingADJUST *RUN* xxx (xxxx) S= 10mm/s A=1.00G Y= 100mm
]/[
] : CV : Return
[END]
[END]
:Return
(Carriage out)
[END]
Y-axis consecutive drive
End
(Y-motor drive)
4b. Input test conditions to execute * Input the following conditions. Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/s Acceleration (A) : 1.0 G Length (Y) : approx. 50 ~ 100 mm
4c. With listening to Hunting noise at Y-motor driving, adjust value to minimize the noise. Check the noise of Y-motor at the right back side of JV-5.
5. Press [END] prulal of times to end.
3- 76
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-2.
HDC PCB
Behind
1. Remove HDC PCB

Loosen (x6)
HDC4 (CN14) HDC2 (CN12) HDC3 (CN13) Release clamp. HDC1 (CN11) Loosen screws and draw out.
Remove FPC(x4)
P3x10 SMW (x2)
3. Release FPC Clamp.
4. Loosen the screws (x2) and slide HDC toward you. Loosen the screws (x2) for the aimed HDC and draw out HDC toward you to release connector.
5. Remove FPC(x4) to take out.
HDC PCB Assembly (E104083)
OK
NG
P4x12 SMW (x2) HDC Bracket (M507162)
2. Reassemble HDC PCB

A screw washer is outside of the cover.
Screw washer is inside of the cover.
6. Remove HDC Bracket from HDC PCB Assembly.
3- 77
JV5-130S/160S
3-3-3.
IO PCB
Behind
1. Remove IO PCB
Loosen (x6)
IO PCB Assembly (E104085) Clamp Clamp P3x10 SMW (x5)
2a. Release clamps (x2) to remove connectors. Release upper and lower clamp to disconnect all connectors for II/O PCB.
2b. ~ Remove clamps and connectors. ~
3a. Remove IO PCB Assembly.
OK
NG
2. Reassemble IO PCB
3b. ~ IO PCB Assembly ~
3- 78
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-4.
USB PCB
Behind
1. Remove USB PCB

Loosen (x6)
USB Protection Bracket (M507828)
P4x12 SMW (x4) B3x6 Surface Cover RS (M507507) IF Bracket (M507318)
P3x10 SMW (x2)
2. Remove USB Protection Bracket.
3. Remove Surface Cover RS.
4. Remove IF Bracket.
P3x10 SMW (x4)
IF Relay PCB
IF Relay PCB
(E103701)
5. Loosen the screws (x4) for USB PCB Assembly.
6. Remove USB PCB Assembly. Remove USB PCB Assembly from Main PCB Connectors together with IF Relay PCB.
7a. Remove IF Relay PCB.
3- 79
JV5-130S/160S
7b. ~ USB PCB Assembly ~
OK
NG
2. Reassemble USB PCB

* To connect USB PCB (IF Relay PCB) with Main PCB, certainly fit the connector to the bottom.
* Put cover inside of washers for loosened screws to tighten them.
3- 80
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-5.
Head Relay PCB
Behind
1. Remove Head Relay PCB

Release upper & lower clamps.
Head Relay PCB (E104237)
Head 1
Head 3
Head 2
Head 4
Inter-board Connector
2a. Release 2 Clamps (upper left, lower right). Release the clamps for the aimed Head Relay PCB from Slider PCB.
2b. ~ PCB Layout ~
3. Remove Head Relay PCB. Remove Head Relay PCB from Slider PCB Assembly. (Inter-board Connector)
Connector
2. Reassemble Head Relay PCB

FPC (x2)
Right bottom first
4. Disconnect connectors and FPCs. Disconnect the connector (CN3) and FPCs (CN1,2) from Head Relay PCB.
* To fix Head Relay PCB to Slider PCB, first hang the lower right clamp as shown above.
3- 81
JV5-130S/160S
3-3-6.
Slider PCB
Behind
1. Remove Slider PCB

Left
Rear Cover R (M507496) P4x12 SMW (x11) Loosen (x4)
B3x6 (x2)
Right
Fix with tape.
4. Fix FPCs with tape. Bind 2 places shown in the picture with tape for avoiding a mess at removing FPC.
Release U/L Clamps.
Head Relay PCB (E104237) Disconnect FPC Inter-board Connector
5. Disconnect all FPCs.
6a. Remove all of Head Relay PCBs. Release clamps (upper left & lower right) on Slider PCB fixing Head Relay PCB.
6b. ~ Remove Head Relay PCB~ Disconnect Head Relay PCB from Slider PCB Assembly. (Inter-board Connection)
3- 82
Overhaul of PCBs
P3x10 SMW (x6) Release connectors Disconnect grounding wire.
Grounding Wire
7. Release all connectors. Release all connectors and grounding wires from the lower left of Slider PCB.
8a. Loosen the screws (x6) for Slider PCB. Loosen all the screws including grounding wire on the lower left of Slider PCB.
8b. ~ Disconnect grounding wire. ~
9a. Remove Slider PCB. Shift Slider PCB left to remove.
9b. ~ Slider PCB ~
CN6 CN9 CN12 CN15 CN7 CN10 CN13 CN16 CN8 CN11 CN14 CN17
2. Reassemble Slider PCB

HDC1
HDC3
HDC2
HDC4
Head 1
Head 3
Head 2
Head 4
Head1 Head3 Head2 Head4 * Caution: To connect FPC, align the surface of terminal and certainly insert to the bottom. Be careful of wrong connection. There are many connectors.
* Layout of each Head Relay PCB is shown above. Be careful of wrong connection.
3- 83
JV5-130S/160S
OK
NG
Right bottom first
Remove tape (x2)
* To fix Head Relay PCB to Slider PCB, first hang the lower right clamp as shown above.
* Do not forget to remove tape applied on FPCbefore placing the cover.
3- 84
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-7.
Power PCB
Behind
MF Cover C 160/130 Loosen (160:8, 130:6)
1. Remove Power PCB
Warning: Start operation after 5 minutes elapssing from the main power OFF. Residual high voltage may cause electric shock. 1. Shut off the main power. * Be sure to shut the main circuit breaker on the back to prevent unexpected move.
P4x12 SMW (160:12, 130:10)
2. Remove MF Cover C. Take off Cap Station Covers behind the printer.
130S: MF Cover C 130 (M507418) 160S: MF Cover C 160 (M507165)
P3x10 SMW (x9) Power PCB Assembly (E300428)
3. Release all connectors. Remove 3 connectors(CN 1, 4, 5) connected to the Power PCB.
4a. Remove Power PCB Assembly. Remove screws (x9), and remove the PCB with taking care not to get electrich shock.
shock!! Never touch to solder behind power PCB. Residual high voltage may cause electrick shock. 4b. ~ Warning st Removing the PCB ~
Warning: Take care not to get electric
4c. ~ Removing PCB ~ * Hold the PCB as shown in the picture above not to touch the back surface of the PCB.
4d. ~ Power PCB Assembly ~
3- 85
JV5-130S/160S
Content
2. Adjust Power PCB Voltage
Use volume for each power source for adjustment. Volume No. +42V : VR4 +24V : VR1 +5V : VR2 +3.3V : VR3 Tools Slotted screwdriver

[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
L.*>
Warning: The power in ON at this
#TEST CHECK PATTERN <ent> #TEST VOLTAGE CHECK <ent>
]/[
] : SW
adjust. Use above tools, and touch only instructed parts.
[ENTER] : Set
1. Select VOLTAGE CHECK in #TEST MODE * Start with the Maintenance Open Mode.
VR2
3.3V 5V 24V 42V -> -> -> -> 3.3V 5.0V 24.0V 42.0V (****) (****) (****) (****)
VR4
VR1 VR1:: +24V +24V
VR3 VR1
2a. Adjust volume with checking displays on LCD.
2b. Turn volume checking LCD.
VR1 Adjustment
VR2: +5V
VR3: +3.3V
VR4: +42V
VR2 Adjustment
VR3 Adjustment
VR4 Adjustment
3- 86
Overhaul of PCBs
Sliding must be smooth.
OK
NG
3. Reassemble Power PCB

Roll Base Possible same height
* Caution: Reassemble MF Cover C in the same height so that adjacent Guide Rails come into flat. And check whether Roll Base slides smoothly.
3- 87
JV5-130S/160S
3-3-8.
Heater PCB
Behind
Maintenance Cover L (M601944)
1. Remove Heater PCB

Warning: Take care not to get electric
shock!! Be sure to turn the power OFF with rear power SW.
1. Shut off the main power. * As the front power switch does not stop the power to the heater PCB, there is a fear of getting electric shock.
P4x12 SMW (x7) P4x12 SMW (x11) Left Cover (M507494) Rear Cover L (M507497)
2. Remove Maintenance Cover L.
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
Heater PCB Assembly (E104043)
3. Remove Left Cover. Loosen screws (x2) on bottom side to remove the cover.
4. Remove Rear Cover L. Loosen screws (x3) on bottom side, and remove screws shown in the picture above to remove the cover.
5. Disconnect all connectors.
Locking Guard Spacer
Pinch to release
Heater PCB Assy (E104043)
6a. Remove Heater PCB Assembly. Release the hook on the top of Locking Guard Spacer (x4) to remove.
6b. ~ Heater PCB ~
3- 88
Overhaul of PCBs
Upper: To SSR
2. Reassemble Heater PCB

Red: Pre-heater Blue: Printheater
Any of same colors will do. Lower: To thermostat of each Heater Assembly Black: After-heater
* See the above illustration for right connection.
~ Connection ~
OK
NG
3- 89
JV5-130S/160S
3-3-9.
BOX Relay PCB
Behind
1. Remove BOX Relay PCB

Raise Clamp Lever.
Loosen (x3)
BOX Relay PCB Assembly (E104351)
3. Remove Pump Cover T. Loosen bottom side screw (x3), and remove top right and left screws (x3).
4. Remove connectors (x2) on bottom side of the printer. Remove connectors for the dryer fan and the exhaust duct connected to the relay BOX.
5. Disconnect all connectors (x7).
L: Exhaust duct Assy side

P4x12 SMW (x4)
R :Dryer FAN Assy side
6a. Remove BOX Relay PCB Assembly.
6b. ~ BOX Relay PCB ~
6c. ~ BOX Relay PCB (Connector) ~
3- 90
Overhaul of PCBs
L: Exhaust duct Assy side (white)
OK
NG
2. Reassemble BOX relay PCB

R :Dryer FAN Assy Side (black)
* Connector connections on the bottom side of the printer are shown in the picture above.
3- 91
JV5-130S/160S
3-3-10.
Keyboard PCB
Behind
Right
1. Remove Keyboard PCB

Move flucrum pin to inward and remove it from the pin hole
2a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move the right fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from the pin hole.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
2b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ Remove the pin from the left shaft hole to remove the front cover.
Right
Left
P4x12 SMW Front cover Sensor R
Tilt
Down Clamp Lever
Loosen P4x12 SMW
5. Down Clamp Lever
6a. Remove KB Cover. Loosen right 4 screws.
6b. ~ Removing KB Cover 2 ~ Remove ascrew over thr front cover sensor R, loosen a bottom screw, and remove lower screws fixing the KB cover shown in the picture above.
3- 92
Overhaul of PCBs
Left
KB Panel (M601980) Disconnect connectors.
Not to hit
P4x12 SMW (x4)
6c. ~ Removing KB Cover 3 ~ Loosen screwa (x3), remove the KB cover with taking care not to hit the dryer unit.
7a. Remove KB Panel. Loosen the screws (x4) and disconnect connectors from Keyboard PCB.
7b. ~ Disconnect connectors of KB Panel. ~ Turn KB Panel 180 toward you to disconnect connectors (x4).
TP3x8 F (x6)
Keyboard PCB Assembly (E104089)
8a. Remove Keyboard PCB Assembly.
8b. ~ Behind KB Panel ~
8c. ~ Keyboard PCB Assembly ~
* Caution: Lay KB Panel down to remove Keyboard PCB so as to prevent KB Top from losing or falling.
Keep from dust or dirt.
2. Reassemble Keyboard PCB

Behind KB Panel Keyboard PCB Assembly
* Caution: Check the surface and within window of LCD for dirt and dust before reassembly.
1. Reassemble Keyboard PCB Assembly. * Point: Lay thick things left and right under KB Panel to make fixing of KB Top easier.
3- 93
JV5-130S/160S
KB Panel (M601980) Join connectors.
P4x12 SMW (x4)
2. Check clicking touch of buttons. Press each button to check clicking touch.
3a. Reassemble KB Panel. Join connectors (x4) to Keyboard PCB Assembly.
3b. ~ Reassemble KB Panel. ~ Tighten the screws (x4).
Error
Action
Check the designated sensor to keep ON. Check connectors to LCD. Wrong recognition of any key due to excess tightening Key entry isnt recognized (See Table3-2. )
3. Test Keyboard and LCD

* Execute test of a keyboard and LCD with TEST of MAINTENANCE MODE.
(Rear) Power switch ON

Cover Open Error appears. No indication on LCD Doesnt enter Maintenance Mode.
1. Turn on the power in Maintenance Mode. [REMOTE] + [FUNCTION] + Power ON
Troubleshooting If JV-5 can not be started or an error is displayed, see the table above.
Table3-1.
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
Press all keys including JOG, [ FUNCTION] or [ ] x10 and finally [END].
#KEYBOARD TEST Key->[ENTER]
[ END] : to close
FUNCTION SET UP
[ FUNCTION]
<ENT>
or [ [
] x6
] x2
[ ENTER]
Test is finished.
Press all keys including JOG .
FUNCTION #TEST
<ENT>
[ ENTER]
Indication of a name of the pushed key. #KEYBOARD TEST Key-> NONE
#KEYBOARD TEST [END]-> END TEST
[END] : to close
(Test Mode Menu)
2. Call Test Mode Menu.
3. Start KEYBOARD TEST. Press any key, and the name will be displayed on LCD. (NONE is displayed if no key is pressed.)
4. Close KEYBOARD TEST.
3- 94
Overhaul of PCBs
Failure
Action
Failure
Connector disconnection (Main PCB) Cable failure Part failure
Action
Check the connection (CN5). (See P.3- 70 ) Check Keyboard Cable Assembly for disconnection. Replace parts below. KB Top Keyboard Cable Assembly (E104362) Keyboard PCB Assembly (E104087) Main PCB Assembly (E104082)
Firmware failure? Restart JV-5 to reconfirm the same trouble occurs. Update firmware. Connector Check the connection (CN3). disconnection (Keyboard PCB) KB Top mounting Check key touch. if any is failure rubbing, disassemble KB Top to assemble over. Keyboard PCB Directly press SW on SW failure Keyboard PCB to check.recognization.
Table3-2.
#TEST KEYBOARD TEST <ent> #TEST LCD TEST
[ FUNCTION] or [ ] x1
<ent>
[ ENTER]
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
(Test Start)
Troubleshooting 1
Table3-3.
Troubleshooting 2
5. Start LCD TEST. LCD TEST automatically scrolls strings within 0x21~0xFF line by line.
Failure
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! #################### !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! #################### $$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$ #TEST LCD TEST
Action
Failure
Part failure
Action
Replace parts below. Keyboard Cable Assembly (E104362) Keyboard PCB Assembly (E104087) Main PCB Assembly (E104082)
[ END ] to end test
Firmware failure? Restart JV-5 to reconfirm the same trouble occurs. Update firmware. Connector Check the connection (CN3). disconnection (Keyboard PCB) Check the connection (CN5). Connector (See P.3- 70 ) disconnection (Main PCB) Cable failure Check Keyboard Cable Assembly for disconnection.
<ent>
Table3-4.
6. End LCD TEST.
Troubleshooting 1
Table3-5.
Troubleshooting 2
OK
NG
Reverse he disassembly procedure to Step 7 for reassembly.
3- 95
JV5-130S/160S
3-3-11.
Dot Detection PCB
Behind
Right
1. Remove Dot Detection PCB
Move fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from pin hole
2a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move right fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from the pin hole.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
2b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ Remove the pin from the left shaft hole to remove the cover.
3. Remove Y Cover F. Loosen right and left screws (x6), to remove Y cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
Right
Left
P4x12 SMW Front cover Sensor R
Tilt
Down Clamp Lever
Loosen P4x12 SMW
5. Down Clamp Lever
6a. Remove KB Cover. Loosen right screws (x4).
6b. ~ Removing KB Cover 2 ~ Remove a screwover of the front cover sensor R, loosen lower screw, and remove a lower screw fixing the KB cover shown in the drawing above.
3- 96
Overhaul of PCBs
Left
Loosen (x3) P4x12 SMW KB Cover (M601945) Dot Detection PCB Assembly (M507497)
P3x10 SMW (x4)
Not to hit
6c. ~ Removing KB Cover 3 ~ Loosen screws (x3), remove the KB cover with taking care not to hit the dryer unit.
7. Disconnect connectors (x2).
8a. Remove Dot Detection PCB Assembly.
Dot Detection PCB Assembly (E104091)
8b. ~ Dot Detection PCB Assembly ~
2. Reassemble Dot Detection PCB

3- 97
JV5-130S/160S
3-3-12.
Ink Unit PCB
Behind
P4x12 SMW (x6)
1. Remove Ink Unit PCB

ICU Cover R (M507575)
2a. Remove ICU Cover R. Right side face : 2qty Top face side : 4qty
P4x12 SMW (x4)
Pinch to release
Locking Guard Spacer Ink Unit PCB Assembly (M507497)
2b. ~ Removing ICU Cover~ Left side face : 2qty Rear face bottom : 2qty
4a. Remove Ink Unit PCB Assembly. Release the hook on the top of Locking Guard Spacer (x4) to remove.
2. Reassemble Ink Unit PCB

Ink Unit PCB Assembly (E104086)
4b. ~ Ink Unit PCB ~
* Be careful of right connection. There are many connectors.
3- 98
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-13.
Side Relay PCB
Behind
1. Remove Side Relay PCB

P4x12 SMW (x7)
3a. Remove Right Cover. Loosen bottom back and front screws, and remove screws described below. Bottom side : 2qty
3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ Right side face : 4qty Right top face : 3qty
4a. Disconnect all connectors.
Pinch to release Locking Guard Spacer (x4) Side Relay PCB assy. (E104352)
4b. ~ Disconnection of connectors ~
5a. Remove Side Relay PCB. Release the hook on the top of Locking Guard Spacer (x4) to remove.
5b. ~ Side Relay PCB ~
3- 99
JV5-130S/160S
OK
NG
2. Reassemble Side Relay PCB

3- 100
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-14.
ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge)
Behind
1. Remove ID point of Contact PCB
Release clamp.
P4x12 SMW (x7)
3a. Remove Right Cover. Loosen screws on bottom side back and front, and remove screws described bwlow. Bottom side : 2qty
3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ Right side face : 4qty Right top face : 3qty
4. Release clamp. Release the clamp for ID Point of Contact PCB.
Disconnect connector.
TP3x8 F (x2) Loosen (x2)
Slide ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly (E103704)
5. Disconnect connector. Disconnect the connector of ID Point of Contact PCB.
6a. Remove ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly. Loosen the screws (x2) and slide laterally to remove from Cartridge Frame.
6b. ~ ID Point of Contact PCB ~
3- 101
JV5-130S/160S
ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly (E103704)
2. Reassemble ID point of Contact PCB

OK
NG
OK
NG
* Replace Contact PCB if the head of either contact is worn.
3- 102
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-15.
LED PCB
Behind
1. Remove LED PCB

P4x12 SMW (x2) P4x12 SMW (x2) P4x12 SMW (x2)

2b. ~ Loosen the screws on the right side. ~
2a. Remove ICU Covers F and R together. Loosen 6 screws: 2 on left side, 2 on right side, 2 on bottom of back side
2c. ~ Loosen the screws on the bottom of back side. ~
P4x12 SMW (x6)
2d. ~ ICU Covers F and R ~
* POINT: Lift a little and pull toward you for easy removal.
3a. Remove IC Slot Bracket F. Loosen the screws (x6) to remove IC Slot Bracket F.
3- 103
JV5-130S/160S
IC Slot Bracket F (M507203)
P3x10 SMW (x3)
LED PCB Assembly (E104088)
3b. ~ Remove IC Slot Bracket F. ~
4a. Remove LED PCB Assembly. Loosen the screws (x3) to remove LED PCB Assembly.
4b. ~ LED PCB Assembly ~ * Procedure is common to 2 sets of LED PCB.
2. Reassemble LED PCB

* After reassembly, check whether every LED illuminates on startup.
3- 104
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-16.
Take-up PCB
Behind
P3x6 SMW (x3) Take-up Cover (M507538)
1. Remove Take-up PCB

2. Remove Take-up Cover.
P3x10 SMW (x4)
P4x12 SMW (x2)
4. Remove Take-up PCB. Loosen the screws and remove Takeup PCB Assembly (E104087) together with Take-up PCB Bracket (M507584).
5a. Remove Take-up PCB. Loosen the screws (x4) and remove Take-up PCB Assembly from Takeup PCB Bracket.
2. Reassemble Take-up PCB

Take-up PCB Assembly (E104087)
P4x12 SMW
Tighten with ground
5b. ~ Take-up PCB ~
* When winding PCB BKT to the winding unit, do not forget to place ground wire on the place shown in the picture above, and fasten together.
3- 105
JV5-130S/160S
3-3-17.
Drying Fan Fork PCB
Behind
1. Remove Drying Fan Fork PCB
2. Remove a black connector on lower part of the printer. Remove a connector for the dryer fan connected to BOX relay PCB.
Left
Belt Screw x2 (M400140)
Right
Right
Mini knob x2 (KS-15x16-A)
4a. Remove dryer FAN Assy from right and left stays. Remove right and left mini-knobs, and remove a belt lock screw.
Fan cover reinforcement plate (M507907) x2
Drying fan cover 130/160 R (M504817/5285)
B3x6 (x12) Mini knob
4b. ~ Removing Druer FAN Assy ~ * Take care not to drop the dryer FAN Assy. Operation with 2 persons.
Right
B3x6 (x2/4)
5a. Remove right and left FAN cover reinforcer plates.
6. Removing Dryer FAN Cover R Remove screws to remove the FAN label side cover.
3- 106
Overhaul of PCBs
Remove connectors P3x6 SMW (x2)
Drying Fan Fork PCB Assembly (E103646) x2
7. Removing All Connectors Remove all connectors for the dryer FAN from the dryer FAN fork PCB. * 2 same PCBs are placed on both sides.
8a. Removing Dryer FAN Fork PCB
8b. ~ Dryer FAN Fork PCB ~
without fan label
Front
without fan label
Back
2. Reassemble Drying Fan Fork PCB

* At assembling Dryer FAN Assy, confirm the front side, and assemble with 2 persons with taking care that the front fase comes top.
3- 107
JV5-130S/160S
3- 108
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4.
Overhaul of Sensors
Sensor parts for JV5-130S/160S are shown below.
Part 3-4-1. Origin Sensor 3-4-2. Wiper Sensor 3-4-3. Clamp Sensor 3-4-4. Bottom Point Sensor 3-4-5. Cap Sensor 3-4-6. Paper Width Sensor 3-4-7. Jam Sensor 3-4-8. Paper Thickness Encoder 3-4-9. Y Encoder ~ LEFT ~
Ink Leakage Sensor L
Reference page
p. 3 - 110 p. 3 - 112 p. 3 - 113 p. 3 - 115 p. 3 - 117 p. 3 - 119 p. 3 - 121 p. 3 - 125 p. 3 - 129
3-4-10. Head Up/Down Encoder 3-4-11. Paper Sensor 3-4-12. Media Rotary Encoder Assembly 3-4-13. Front Cover Sensor L 3-4-14. Front Cover Sensor R 3-4-15. Maintenance Cover Sensor L 3-4-16. Maintenance Cover Sensor R 3-4-17. Ink Leakage Sensor 3-4-18. Waste Tank Sensor
Part
Reference page
p. 3 - 132 p. 3 - 136 p. 3 - 139 p. 3 - 147 p. 3 - 149 p. 3 - 151 p. 3 - 152 p. 3 - 153 p. 3 - 158
~ Head Assy ~
Jam Sensor Paper Thickness
Head Up/Down Encoder Y Encoder
Paper Width Sensor
Cap Sensor
Front Cover Sensor L
Media Rotary Encoder Assembly Front Cover Sensor
Paper Sensor
Ink Leakage Sensor R Maintenance Cover Sensor Clamp Sensor
Origin Sensor Bottom Point Sensor
Wiper Sensor
Ink Leakage Sensor S
Waste Tank Sensor (x2)
3- 109
JV5-130S/160S
3-4-1. Origin Sensor

Power ON.
Behind
[ST.MAINTE]
1. Remove Origin Sensor
L.*>
[JV5-01]
Connector P4x12 SMW Origin Sensor (0J-6505-N2)
3. Remove Origin Sensor. Loosen the screw to remove Origin Sensor.
4. Disconnect connector from Origin Sensor.
Sensor
2. Reassemble Origin Sensor

Origin sensor shade plate (M507222)
* On reassembling the sensor, confirm that the sensor is kept from Origin Sensor Shade Plate on Carriage. When it contacts, loosen a screw to adjust.
3- 110
Overhaul of Sensors

[JV5-01]
#TEST CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [ ] :SW #TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER #SENSOR TEST Y-ORIGIN <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
3. Test Origin Sensor

* Checking with SENSOR TEST of TEST (MAINTENANCE MODE)
L.*> FUNCTION SET UP FUNCTION #TEST
[FUNCTION]
(to Next)
<ENT> [ ] / [ ] : SW <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
:OFF [ ] / [ ] : SW :OFF
(to Next)
1. Select TEST Start with the Maintenance Open Mode.
2. Select SENSOR TEST to display Y-ORIGIN.
Sensor
:OFF
Carriage is not on the original position

:ON
Carriage is on the original position
Origin sensor shade plate (M507222)
3a. Checking ON/OFF Display Move the carriage manually to check the sensor display on LCD. * When it is normal, pussh [END] several times to end.
3b. ~ Confirmation at Abnormal ~ If there is a problem on LCD display, make sure that fixing of sensor, positioning of a shade plate and the sensor, and connection of connectors are correct.
3- 111
JV5-130S/160S
3-4-2. Wiper Sensor

P4x12 SMW
1. Remove Wiper Sensor

Wiper Sensor (0J-6505-N2)
2. Remove Wiper Sensor.
Connector
Sensor
2. Reassemble Wiper Sensor

3. Disconnect connector from Wiper Sensor.
Shade Plate
* On reassembling Wiper Sensor, confirm that the sensor is kept from Shade Plate of Wiper Holder Base.

[JV5-01]
L.*>
#TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER #SENSOR TEST WIPER
<ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
3. Test Wiper Sensor

* Checking with SENSOR TEST of TEST (MAINTENANCE MODE).
[FUNCTION]
(to Next)
FUNCTION SET UP FUNCTION #TEST
:OFF [ ] / [ ] : SW :OFF
(to Next)
Move wiper to check ON/OFF

:ON
#TEST CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [ ] : SW
#SENSOR TEST WIPER
1. Select TEST . Start with the Maintenance Open Mode, and select TEST.
2. Check ON/OFF display on LCD with WIPER. Move the wiper manually, and check sensor display on LCD.
3- 112
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-3. Clamp Sensor

1. Remove Clamp Sensor

2a. Remove right cover and rear cover R. Loosen back and front screws on lower part of right cover, and remove screws shown in the picture above.
Rear Cover R (M507496) P4x12 SMW P4x12 SMW (x16) Loosen (x4) Connector
2b. ~Remove Right Side Cover ~ Remove screws in the picture and take out from the right cover. * Take care not to drop the cover at removing.
Clamp Sensor (PE01130) B4x10
3. Loosen the screw and remove the sensor together with Clamp Sensor Bracket.
4. Disconnect connector from Clamp Sensor.
Clamp Sensor Bracket (M507806)
5. Remove Clamp Sensor .
3- 113
JV5-130S/160S
OK
NG
2. Reassemble Clamp Sensor

Sensor
Shade Plate
* After reassembling Clamp Sensor, confirm that the sensor is kept from CL Link.

[JV5-01]
L.*>
#TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER
<ENT> [ENTER] :Fix :OFF
3. Test Clamp Sensor

* Check eith SENSOR TEST of TEST (MAINTENANCE MODE)
[FUNCTION]
(to Next)
<ENT> [ ] / [ ] : SW <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER
Up/Down lever to check ON/OFF

:ON
(to Next)
1. Select TEST Start with the Maintenance Open Mode, and select TEST.
2. Confirm ON/OFF display on LCD with SET LEVER. Up/Down lever to check ON/OFF.
3- 114
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-4. Bottom Point Sensor

1. Remove Bottom Point Sensor

2a. Remove right cover and rear cover R Loosen front and back screws on lower part of the right cover, and remove screws shown in the picture.
P4x12 SMW
Rear Cover R (M507496)
Bottom Point Sensor Bracket (M507239)
Bottom Point Sensor (0J-6505-N2)
P4x12 SMW (x16)
Loosen (x4)
P4x12 SMW (x2)
2b. ~Remove Right Cover ~ Remove screws shown in the picture, and take out them from the right cover. * Take care not to drop the cover.
3. Remove Bottom Point Sensor together with Bracket. Remove Bottom Point Sensor on the back side of printer together with Bracket.
4. Disconnect connector to remove Bottom Point Sensor from Bracket.
2. Reassemble Bottom Point Sensor

Bottom Point Sensor Bottom Point Sensor Bracket (M507239)
Bottom Point Sensor Shade Plate
P4x12 SMW (x2)
* Caution: On reassembling Bottom Point Sensor Bracket, fix the bracket so that Shade Plate on Station comes in the center of sensor. (Procedure is described next.)
1. Temporarily fix Bottom Point Sensor Bracket.
3- 115
JV5-130S/160S
Shade Plate
Down CW
Sensor
2. Turn the pulley and vertically shift Shade Plate (Station) to the height as high as the sensor. (CW: down)
3a. Trim the position of the bracket so that Shade Plate comes in the center of sensor, and fix with a screw.
3b.
OK
NG

[JV5-01]
3. Test Bottom Point Sensor

* Check with SENSOR TEST of TEST (MAINTENANCE MODE)
#TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER #SENSOR TEST STATION
<ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
[FUNCTION]
(to Next)
:OFF [ ] / [ ] : SW :OFF
(to Next)
#SENSOR TEST STATION
Up/Down the station to check ON/OFF

:ON
1. Select TEST . Start with the Maintenance Open Mode, and select TEST.
2. Check ON/OFF display on LCD with STATION. Up/Down the station manually to check the sensor display on LCD.
3- 116
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-5. Cap Sensor

Power ON.
Behind
[ST.MAINTE]
1. Remove Cap Sensor
L.*>
[JV5-01]
P3x10 SMW
Cap Sensor (0J-6505-N2) Station Sensor Protection Cover (M507412) B3x10
3. Remove Station Sensor Protection Cover.
4. Remove Cap Sensor and disconnect the connector.
Head Height Sensor Shield Plate (M507243)
2. Reassemble Cap sensor

Sensor
* Caution: Fix Cap Sensor so as to keep from Head Height Sensor Shield Plate.
3- 117
JV5-130S/160S

[JV5-01]
3. Test Cap Sensor

* Checking with SENSOR TEST of TEST (MAINTENANCE MODE)
#TEST CAP SENSOR
<ent>
[ENTER] : Set
[FUNCTION]
CAP OFF (Station lowest position)

#CAP SENSOR OFF (001)
(to Next)
Sensor read value Sensor state (OFF, ON, Error)
2a. Check display on LCD with CAP SENSOR When CAP SENSOR is executed, the station moves to the lowest position.
#CAP SENSOR OFF (001)
[END] : End
CAP ON
#TEST CAP SENSOR <ent>
Press [END] several times to end
2b. ~ Cap OFF State ~
3a. Check LCD display and actual state, and press [END] plural of times to end. [END]
3b. ~ Cap ON State ~
3- 118
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-6. Paper Width Sensor

Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Paper Width Sensor
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
Right
Right
Right
Move fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from pin hole
3a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, shift fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from pin hole.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Left
B3x6 (x2)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
4. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) and remove Y Cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
5. Remove the head cover. Remove roght and left screws to remove the head cover.
Right
3- 119
JV5-130S/160S
Remove connector Insert driver

P3x10 SMW Cutter Unit Assy. (M006952) Paper Width Sensor (E103960)
6. Remove a Screw of Paper Width Sensor Insert a driver into a place on the Cutter Assy shown in the picture to remove a screw fixing the sensor.
7. Remove Paper Width Sensor Remove the paper width sensor from the cutter Assy.
8. Remove the connector
2. Reassemble Paper Width Sensor

3- 120
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-7. Jam Sensor

Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Jam Sensor
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
Right
Right
Right
3a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move the fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from pin hole.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Left
B3x6 (x2)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
3b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ Remove the pin from the keft shaft hole to remove the front cover.
4. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove Y Cover F. Take care not to drop the cover. * Operation with more than 2 persons.
Right
3- 121
JV5-130S/160S
JAM Unit Support Bracket (M507257)
P3x10 SMW (x2)
Jam Sensor (0J-6505-N2)
JAM Unit
B4x10
6. Remove JAM Unit Remove screws (x2) of JAM Unit Holder BKT, and remove the Jam sensor with the head protection BKT.
7. remove Jam Sensor Remove a screw and take out the Jam sensor from the head Protection BKT.
2. Reassemble Jam Sensor

Sensor
Shielding
* After assembling the Jam sensor to the Head protection BKT, confirm that shielding part of the Head protection arm does not touch to the sensor.
Content
3. JAM UNIT&CUTTER UNIT HEIGHT
Tools
Adjust assembling positions of JAM unit (vertical) and cutter unit (vertical, horizontal) using a jig. Height adjust jig (Media Jam/ Cutter unit height positioning tool) : OPT-J0108
Temp. joint
Note: When only JAM unit is replaced, adjust the cutter unit at the same time
JAM Unit
Cutter Unit
* If the jig can not be arranged, using of an intervenient having height of 7.5mm in the JAM unit side and height of 7.0mm in the cutter unit side is allowed.
1. Set screws of both units at temporary joint state. * Temporary joint state is that both units are held lightly.
3- 122
Overhaul of Sensors
Set bosses(x4) in platen slot
Down clamp lever
Notice: Keep clamp lever down at adjusting. PG setting should be 1.5mm.
Push to end
2. Down Clamp Lever
3. Set the Jig to Platen Set 4 bosses of the jig in slots in slots back and front for platen media plate as shown in the drawing above.
4. Push the jig to the end After setting, slide the jig to head side to the end (to stop).
Push down cutter tool JAM Unit Cutter Unit
Height adjust jig
Height adjust jig
Height adjust jig
Slot for cutter tool
5. Adjust JAM unit height and fix fith screws (x2). * Adjust JAM unit position only vertically. Back-front adjust is not required.
Note : Cutter tool positioning slot has width wider than that of the tool. Adjust the position within the range. Note : When there is no jig, push down the cutter toolAssy to the platen face and adjust using the cutter slot of platen.
6a. Adjust cutter unit height
6b. Adjust the cutter unit position back-front. Decide the unit position so that the cutter tool meets the slot (with push down the cutter tool), anf fix it with a screw.
Note : On rare occasions, the tool comes out of the slot because of assembling accident errors or deifferences of part accuracies. In such a case, adjust again to the back-front optimum position where the tool always in whole slot on the platen.
Head Unit
L end
Center
R end
Check cutter tool position at 3 points
6c. ~ Cutter Position Adjust Supplement ~ * Execute the following cutter tool position check manually before turning the power ON.
7a. Cutter Tool Position Check Move the head unit to each right, center and left end on the platen, and push down the cutter tool Assy to check back-front positioning.
7b. Re-adjusting of the Cutter Tool back-front positioning.
3- 123
JV5-130S/160S

[JV5-01]
4. Test Jam Sensor

* Execute SENSOR TEST of TEST (MAINTENANCE MODE).
#TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER #SENSOR TEST MEDIA JAM
[FUNCTION]
<ENT> [ENTER] :Fix (to Next) :OFF [ ] / [ ] : SW :OFF
<ENT> [ ] / [ ] : SW <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix (to Next)
Push head protection arm to check ON/OFF.

:ON
#TEST CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [ ] : Sw
#SENSOR TEST MEDIA JAM
1. Select TEST . Start with the Maintenance Open Mode and select TEST.
2a. Confirm ON/OFF display of the LCD with MEDIA JAM. Check the sensor display of LCD with pushing the head protection arm manually.
Push to confirm sensor ON
Head protection arm
2b. ~ Confirm JAM sensor ON/OFF ~
3- 124
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-8.
Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Paper Thickness Encoder
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
Right
Right
Right
Move fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from

pin hole.
3a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move the right fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from pin hole.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Left
B3x6 (x2)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
4. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove Y cover F.
* Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
5. Remove the head cover. Remove roght and left screws to remove the head cover.
Right
3- 125
JV5-130S/160S
P3x10 SMW (x2)
Cutter Unit Assembly (M006952)
P2x8 SMW (x2) Paper Thickness Encoder PCB (E103961)
6. Remove the Cutter Assy
7a. Remove the Paper Thickness Encoder PCB Remove screws (x2), and remove the paper thickness encoder from Cutter Sensor Bracket
7b. ~ Paper Thickness Encoder PCB ~
2. Reassemble Paper Thickness Encoder

Encoder Scale
Caution: Be careful not to damage Encoder Scale.
* Assemble the encoder as shown in the drawing in which it does not contact to the encoder scale. (Set the encoder scale at the center position.)
Content
3. Cutter Unit Positioning

* After assembling the paper thickness encoder, execute the following adjustments.
Tools
Adjust fixing position of cutter unit (vertically, horizontally) using a jig. Height adjust jig (Media Jam/ Cutter unit height positioning tool) : OPT-J0108
Temp. joint
Cutter Unit
* When the jig can not be arranged, using an intervenient having 7.0mm of cutter unit side height is alloed.
1. Set the screw of cutter unit to temporal joint state. * Temporary joint state is that the units is held lightly.
3- 126
Overhaul of Sensors
Down clamp lever
Notice:Keep the clamp lever down at adjusting. PG setting should be 1.5mm.
Push to the end
2. Down the Clamp Lever.
3. Set the Jig to Platen Set 4 bosses of the jig in slots in slots back and front for platen media plate as shown in the drawing above.
4. Push the Jig to the head side to the end. After setting, slide the jig to head side to the end (to stop).
Push down cutter tool Cutter Unit
Cutter tool slot
Height adjust jig
Height adjust jig
5a. Adjust the Cutter Unit Height
5b. Adjust the Cutter Unit position back-front. Decide the unit position so that the cutter tool meets the slot (with push down the cutter tool), anf fix it with a screw.
Note : On rare occasions, the tool comes out of the slot because of assembling accident errors or deifferences of part accuracies. In such a case, adjust again to the back-front optimum position where the tool always in whole slot on the platen.
Head Unit
L end
Center
R end
6a. Check the Cutter Tool Position Move the head unit to each right, center and left end on the platen, and push down the cutter tool Assy to check back-front positioning.
6b. Re-adjusting of the Cutter Tool back-front positioning.
3- 127
JV5-130S/160S
Content
4. Encoder Test
* Execute ENCODER TEST of TEST (MAINTENANCE MODE)
Tools
Measure each of media presence position and no presence position with downing.. Media

[JV5-01]
L.*>
[FUNCTION] [ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] :Fix (to Next) [ ] / [ ] : SW
<ENT>
<ENT>
#TEST CHECK PATTERN <ENT>
* If the media is too thin to read, use a media within the specifications range.
1. Select TEST Start with the Maintenance Open Mode and select TEST.
#TEST ENCODER TEST
<ENT>
[ENTER] : Set [ ] / [ ] : Sw [ENTER] : Fix [ENTER] : Exce.
#ENCODER TEST LINEAR ENCODER <ent> #ENCODER TEST CUTTER ENCODER <ent> #CUTTER ENCODER CHECK :ent
#CUTTER ENCODER Result of a test. THICK = 0.5mm Pr=-247 Mr=-231
[END] :End
Pr : Measurement of platen Mr : Measurement on media
2. Execute CUTTER ENCODER. Select CUTTER ENCODER of ENCODER TEST to execute.
3. Check the test results and if there is no error, finish the test.
3- 128
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-9.
Y Encoder
Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Y Encoder
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
ST.MAINTENANCE CARRIDGE OUT <ent>
[ENTER]
Right
Right
Right
3a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move the right fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from the pin hole.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Left
B3x6 (x2)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
3b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~

Remove the pin from the left sgaft hole to remove the front cover.
Right
3- 129
JV5-130S/160S
Y Encoder Sensor Bracket (M507221)
Remove connector
Linear encoder PCB assy. (E103961)
P4x12 SMW P2x8 SMW (x2)
6. Remove Y encoder BKT. Remove screws to remove Y encoder sensor with Y encoder sensor BKT.
7. Remove connector of the encoder.
8. Remove Y Encoder
Fix Y scale at the senter of the sensor.
2. Reassemble Y Encoder
Y Scale
Encoder
* On reassembly of Y Encoder, fix Y Scale at the position shown above.
Content
3. Y Encoder Visual Inspection
Tools
Check the height of Y Encoder. Confirm that Y Scale is set in the working area of Y Encoder. Pen Light
* Caution: Be careful not to dirt or damage Y Scale.
1. Make sure that the scale locates at the center of encoder reading part watching from the side face.
3- 130
Overhaul of Sensors
Y Encoder Sensor Bracket (M507221)
5. Encoder Test
* When the sensor contacts to the scale, adjust the position of bracket. Push Y encoder sensor BKT in slightly, loosen or remove a fixing screw to adjust.
Content Execute the following tests 1. ERROR CHECK (MAINTENANCE#TEST) 2. VIsual Check 3. PQ check (Test drawing) Tools Media (for test drawing)

[JV5-01]
L.*>
#TEST ENCODER TEST
<ENT>
[ENTER] : Set [ENTER] : Set [ENTER] : Exec.
#ENCODER TEST LINEAR ENCODER <ent> #LINEAR ENCODER ActiveWIDTH:****mm
<ENT>
<ENT>
(Execute test:3 to&fro)
* Value of operation width is default at execution.
2. Execute LINEAR ENCODER. Select LINEAR ENCODER of ENCODER TEST to execute.
#LINEAR ENCODER Result of a test. M =****.* E = ****.* Mc= 0.0 Ec= 0.0
Y Encoder
[END] :End
Drawing Settings
Head Unit
6.25 %
MC
720 x 720
Hi 4Pass Uni (Drawing only 2nd pass
Drawing
L end
Center
R end Check PQ
Pr : Measurement on Platen Mr: Measurement on Media
Check that enoder does not contact to the scale in visual.
Make sure that pinstripe does not appear at a few mm pitch (about 2 - 4mm)
(If not, finish the test.)
3. Check the test results and if there is no erro, finish the test.
4. Check contact of encoder Moving the head unit to each right, center and left on the platen manually, and check that encoder does not contact to the scale in visual.
5. Execute drawing with the settings above to check Print Quality. * The pinstripe may appear according to encoder fixing position.In this case, confirm the fixing position and fix again.
3- 131
JV5-130S/160S
3-4-10.
Head Up/Down Encoder
Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Head Up/Down Encoder
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
[ENTER]
Right

Right Right
Move fulcrum pin to inward, remove it from pin hole.
3a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move the right fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from the pin hole.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Left
B3x6 (x2)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
Right
4. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove Y cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
5. Remove the head cover. Remove right and left scews to remove the head cover.
3- 132
Overhaul of Sensors
UD Encoder Sensor Bracket (M507224) P4x12 SMW
Linear encoder PCB assy. (E103961)
Head UD Scale Assy. (E300472)
UD Encoder Bracket (M507223)
P4x12 SMW
P2x8 SMW (x2)
6. Remove UD Encoder Bracket Remove screws and remove UD Encoder Bracket with the scale.
7. Remove UD Encoder Sensor Bracket Loosen the screw to remove Head Up/Down Encoder together with UD Encoder Sensor Bracket .
8. Remove Head Up/Down Encoder Remove a connector, remove screws (x2) fixing to UD Encoder Sensor Bracket and remove the Head UD encoder.
UD Scale must be within the range.
2. Reassemble Head Up/Down
Encoder
Encoder
UD Scale
* Fix the encoder so that the scale is at the position shown in the drawing at assembling the encoder.
[ ENTER ] + [END] + Power ON
(Start with System parameter Input Mode)
3. Clear Systemparameter
* Before executing HEAD HEIGHT ADJUST for the next process, system parameter No.16 is reset to initial value (150) in this step.
SYSTEM PARAMETER 000:COMP. X = 0 SYSTEM PARAMETER 016:HGLOPOS = 330
----> 330 016:HGLOPOS = 330
]/[
] : SW
]/[
] : SW
*Change to 150
----> 150 016:HGLOPOS = 330 SYSTEM PARAMETER 016:HGLOPOS = 150
[ENTER] : Reg.
[ENTER] : Set
[END] : End
Confirm value on LCD screen, push [END] plural of times to end.
1. Display the system parameter No.16 Start with the System Parameter Input Mode, and display No.16 with [ ]/[ ].
2. Set initial value 150 to the value Set initial value 150 to value of system parameter No.16, confirm and finish the step.
3- 133
JV5-130S/160S
Content
4. Head Height Adjust

* As for the detail of head height adjust, see .
p.3- 12
Tools
Adjust head height to the standard height (1.5mm) mechanically using a jig. 1.5mm Head gap check tool (OPT-J0097)
(Start with maintenance Open Mode)

[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
L.*>
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST
<ent>
[ FUNCTION] or [ ]
Head gap check jig 1.5 (OPT-J0097)
#ADJUST BasisHEADheight<ent>
[ ENTER]
(Carriage moves to over platen)
* Keep the clamp down at conducting this adjustment.
1. Execute BasisHEADheight Start with the Maintenance Open Mode, and execute BasisHEADheight.
Height 1.5mm is adjusted by hand. #BasisHEADheight COMPLETED :ent

[ENTER] [END] : Save adjust value : Not save adjust value
Up/Down carriage with rotating manually
*Being Initialized* PLEASE WAIT
Jig Platen face
1.5 mm
(After initialization, adjust is finished)
2a. adjust 1.5mm of gap from platen manually. [ENTER] : Save adjust value to end. [END] : Cancel to end.
2b. ~ Arrangement of Jig ~ Arrange the jig on the following plosition.
3. Slip the jig in from side face.
4. Push the head of jig to the frame.
* Push the jig to contact to metal frame in right and left of head.
3- 134
Overhaul of Sensors
Content
5. Encoder Test
Tools
Execute POSITIONencoder in ENCODER TEST of MAINTENANCE MODE. Back and forth operation from head top position to bottom position is executed, and returned to the position before the test to end.

L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
<ENT>
]/[
] : SW
<ENT>
]/[
] : S
* Exexcute ENCODER TEST of TEST (MAINTENANCE MODE)
1. Select TEST . Start with the Maintenance Open Mode and select TEST.
#TEST ENCODER TEST
<ENT>
[ENTER] : Set
~ Check Operation ~
#POSITIONencoder Result of a test. St=330 Mv=0 Rt=330
(Head to&fro)
#ENCODER TEST LINEAR ENCODER <ent> #ENCODER TEST POSITIONencoder<ent> #POSITIONencoder CHECK :ent
]/[
] : SW
[END] : End
[ENTER] : Set
[ENTER] : Exec.
St : Start position(Top) Mv : Move position(Bottom) Rt : End position (Top)
2. Execute POSITIONencoder. Select and execute POSITIONencoder of ENCODER TEST
3. When the screen above is displayed after the check operation, the test is end. Press [END] plural of times to finish.
3- 135
JV5-130S/160S
3-4-11. Paper Sensor

Behind
1. Remove Paper Sensor

Warning:Electric Shock!! Turn OFF the rear power switch.
1. Shut off the main power. * As front switch does not cut the power to heater PCB, there is a fear of getting electric shock.
P4x12 SMW (x7) P4x12 SMW (x11) Left Cover (M507494) Rear Cover L (M507497) P4x12 SMW (x2) PR-guide 130/160 (M507425/7308)
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
3. Remove Left Cover. Loosen lower side screws (x2), and removescrews ahown in the picture above to remove the cover.
4. Remove Rear Cover L. Loosen lower side screws (x3), and removescrews ahown in the picture above to remove the cover.
5a. Remove PR guide 130/160. Remove roght and left screws (x4).
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Red Red(Heater side)
Connector color
qty
2 1
5b. ~ Remove PR Guide ~ * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
6a. Remove connectors shown in the right from the heater PCB. Remove connectors (CN7, CN15, CN16).
6b. ~ Connectors ~
3- 136
Overhaul of Sensors
P4x12 SMW
Loosen screw
7. Remove Relay Connector Remove the relay connector of thermistor at station side.
8. Remove screws on lower side of R Heater Cover Assy 130S : 4qty 160S : 5qty
9. Loosen acrews on upper part of R Heater Cover Assy in Printer front side. 130S : 6qty 160S : 7qty
R Heater Cover 130S/160S assy. (M006926/M006924)
Paper Sensor (PS-R11L-B)
P3x12 (SMW) Paper Sensor R Bracket (M507156)
10. Remove cables from the frame Remove cables before removing R Heater Cover so that cables will not to be mess.
11. Remove RHeater Cover * Take care not to give damage on the cover or other parts.
12. Remove connector and Paper Sensor * Do not remove Paper Sensor R Bracket. It is the base for positioning Media Encoder.
Any of same colors will do.
OK
NG
2. Reassemble Paper Sensor

Bottom:Connected to thermostat of heater Assy
Red: Pre-heater Blue: Printheater
Black: After-heater
A screw washer is inside of the cover.
* Caution: See the above illustration for right connection.
3- 137
JV5-130S/160S

[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
3. Test R. PAPER Sensor

#TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER #SENSOR TEST R.PAPER
<ENT> :OFF :OFF
]/[
] : SW
<ENT> <ENT>
]/[
] :
Shield light around sensor part to check ON/OFF

:ON
]/[
] : SW
#SENSOR TEST R.PAPER
1. Select TEST Start with Maintenance Open Mode and select TEST.
2. Check ON/OFF display of LCD with R.PAPER. Shield light around sensor part and check sensor display of LCD.
3- 138
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-12. Media Rotary Encoder Assembly

Content Remove Media rotary encoder under the platen (Print heater). Major scale operation. Conduct with more than 2 oersins. Tools & jigs Fixing pin (for roll screen) Glove Work Flow
1. Remove Drying fan Assembly ( P. 3- 139 ) 2. Remove Media Rotary Encoder Assembly ( P.3- 141 ) 3. Reassemble Rotary Encoder Assembly ( P. 3- 144 ) 4. Rotary Encoder Decentering Compensation ( P. 3- 145 )
P Heater Assy.
Media Rotary Encoder Assembly
1. Remove Drying fan Assembly

1. Remove connectors (x2) on lower side of the printer. Remove connectors for dryer fan and exhaust duct connected to the BOX relay PCB. 2a. Remove Open and close cover Assy. Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and remove left side of the cover.
Right
Roll screen Loosen (x2)
Notice: If a spring of roll screen is released, winding becomes difficu-lut. Take care until it is fixed with a pin.
Right
3a. Loosen screws (x2) shown in the picture. Loosen screws (x2) fixing right roll holder plate.
Right
3b. Release lock of stop plate for holder plate in the left side.
Left
3- 139
JV5-130S/160S
Left
Loosen (x2) Exhaust cover L (M507882) CS 6x15 P4x12 SMW Exhaust cover R holder
Right
Right
4. Remove roll screen from shaft bush of support fitting. * When the roll screen is removed, the spring is released. Wind up the spring at assembling.
5. Remove exhaust cover L. Remove lower screw with hexagonal wrench, and tighten upper screws (x2) to remove cover.
6a. Remove exhaust cover R. Remove screw to fix exhaust cover R to exhaust cover R holde.
Loosen (x2)
Left
Drying fan Assy. 130/160 (M007141/40)
Exhaust cover R (M507881) Mini knob x2 (KS-15x16-A) Mini knob
6b. ~ Remove exhaust cover R. ~ Loosen upper screws (x2) to remove exhaust cover R.
7a. Remove Dryer FAN Assy from stayes in both sides. Remove right and left mini-knobs and remove the belt lock screw.
7b. ~ Remove Dryer FAN Assy ~ * Conduct with 2 persons not to drop the Dryer FAN Assy.
Right
Left
Left
P4x12 SMW (x2) Drying fan stay R (M507879)
Exhaust cover bracket (M507883) P4x12 SMW (x5)
Screw (x2)
Drying fan stay L (M507880)
8. Remove exhaust cover bracket.
9. Remove drying fan stay L. * As the part is heavy, work with more than 3 personnel.
10. Remove drying fan stay R.
Right
3- 140
Overhaul of Sensors
2. Remove Media Rotary Encoder Assembly
Behind
1. Shut off the main power. * As the front switch does not cut the power to the heater PCB, there is a fear for getting electric shock.
MF Cover R (M507164)
Loosen (x6)
Loosen (x2)
P4x12 SMW (x8) Loosen (x3)
3. Remove Left Cover. Loosen lower screws (x2) and remove the screws shown in the picture to remove the cover.
4. Remove Rear Cover L. Loosen lower screws (x3) and remove the screws shown in the picture to remove the cover.
Left Right
Right
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
6a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move the fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from the pin hole.
6b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ Remove the pin from the left sgaft hole to remove the front cover.
7. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove Y Cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
3- 141
JV5-130S/160S
P4x12 SMW (x3)
P4x12 SMW (x4)
Maintenance Space Cover (M507182)
H Harness Cover (M507183)
Remove in arrow direction.
8. Remove H Harness Cover.
9. Remove Maintenance Space Cover. Loosen the screws (x4) to remove Maintenance Space Cover in the arrow direction.
10a.Remove the connectors shown right from Heater PCB.
Release clamps (x8) P3x10 SMW (x4)
Body Color Black Blue Blue (Heater Side)
Qty 4 4 1
10b. ~ Connector List ~ Print Heater: Blue Connector After Heater: Black Connector
11. Release cable clamps (x8).
12a.Loosen the screw for A Heater Cover Assembly. Upper: P3 x 10 SMW (x4) Lower: P4 x 12 SMW (x4)
Take out cable.
Left
Right
Release connector. Loosen (x4) P4x12 SMW (x4) Caution: Hold A Heater Cover with a hand on loosening screws to prevent cover from falling.
12b. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~ 130S: A Heater Cover 130 Assembly (M006927) 160S: A Heater Cover 160 Assembly (M006925)
13a.Remove A Heater Cover Assembly. Take cable out of clamp.
13b.Release Heater Connector. * Be careful not to damage the surface of A Heater Cover.
3- 142
Overhaul of Sensors
P Heater Assembly B3x10 Ni (x24)
Lead through bush after releasing all clamps.
Release clamp (x8) Media Plate (M507157) Lead through bush.
14. Loosen the screws (x24) for P Heater Assembly. * Slide Media Plate and certainly loosen the lower screws.
15a.Process Heater Cable. Release all clamps for Heater cable (Blue) on the left of printer to lead through bush.
15b. ~ Process Heater Cable. ~
Release connector
Media Rotary Encoder Assembly (E300468)
Put through bush
Release clamps(x2) P Heater Assembly
Release connector and clamps to lead through bush.
16. Process Thermistor Cable. Release connector of Thermistor and cable from clamps to lead through bush.
17. Remove P Heater Assembly. * Carefully use both hands to handle cables so as to prevent them from hanging.
18a.Loosen the screws (x4) for Media Rotary Encoder.
P4x12 SMW (x4) CN9
Media Rotary Encoder Assembly (E300468)
18b. ~ Loosen the screws. ~
19. Disconnect the connector (CN9) of Rotary Encoder. Remove connector of CN9 from the Main PCB.
20. Remove Rotary Encoder Assembly.
3- 143
JV5-130S/160S
Fix screws with pushing
3. Reassemble Rotary Encoder Assembly

Media Plate (M507157)
* Be sure to reassemble Media Plate on reassembling P Heater Assembly. Follow the next procedure to smoothly reassemble.
1. Tighten the upper screws pressing Plate against the back.
Pull plate
Left
Smooth moving Push slide bar
2. To tighten the lower screws, pull Plate toward you and press Slide Bar against the back.
3. Put on the other in the same way. * After assembling, confirm that it moves smoothly with sliding it horizontally.
* Run Heater Cables (Blue) around each clamp on each end in front of printer.
Right
Any of same color will do.
L: Exhaust duct Assy side (White)
Red: Pre-heater
Lower:Connect to Thermostat of each Assembly

Blue: Printheater Black: After-heater
R : Dryer FAN Assy side (Black)
* Remove loosening of cables referring to the above to connect to Heater PCB.
* Caution: Refer to the above illustration to ensure right connection.
* Connector connection printer lower side is shown in the picture above.
3- 144
Overhaul of Sensors
OK
NG
Front Side
Back Side
Without fan label
With fan label
* Check front side and back side at assembling the Dryer FAN Assy and set that front side comes top. Operation with 2 persons.
Left
* Wind the spring and fix it with a pin, and after fixing to hold fitting, take the pin out at assembling the roll screen.
Roll screen Fix with pushing
* At fixing loosen roll screen hold fitting, fix the screw with pushing the roll screen to inward.
Right
Content
4. Rotary Encoder Decentering Compensation

* Execute MEDIA ENCODER of ADJUST (MAINTENANCE MODE) for Desentering Compensation(Automatic).
Execution of automatic decentering compensation Tools The following media* is recommended Premium Photo paper (SPC-0213) Pet Gloss (SPC-0111) * If corresponding media can not be arranged, use firm paper as much as possible,. paper hard to feed such as arpaulin is not allowed.

[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
L.*> FUNCTION SET UP FUNCTION #ADJUST #ADJUST HEAD ADJUST
<ENT> <ENT> <ent>
]/[
] : SW
[ENTER] : Set
]/[
] : SW
* Use cut sheet media instead of roll paper as using of the roll paper may cause bad influence on decentering compensation because of back tension. Use media having more than 800mm of feed direction.
1. Select ADJUST. Start with the Maintenance Open Mode and select ADJUST. * Execute after completing Media Detection.
3- 145
JV5-130S/160S
#ADJUST MEDIA ENCODER <ENT> #MEDIA ENCODER ADJUST START :ent
[ENTER] : Set [ENTER] : Exec. [END] : Ret.
0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 8:0 9:0 COMPLETED :ent
End screen at normal
[ENTER] / [END] :End
**** ADJUST NOW **** PLEASE WAIT #MEDIA ENCODER ADJUST START :ent (Displayed at
(Approx. 2 min.)
compensation)
2. Select MEDIA ENCODER to execute compensation. * Do not touch JV-5 during the decentering compensation. Correct adjust values can not be obtained because of vibration or tension.
3. After confirming normal end, press [END] plural of times to turn the power OFF.
3- 146
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-13.
Behind
Right
1. Remove Front Cover Sensor L
2a. Remove Front Cover L. Open the cover, move the fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from the pin hole.
Front Cover L (M601940/41) P 4 x 12 SMW
P2 x 12 SMW
Front Cover Sensor Bracket L (M507521)
3. Remove Front Cover Sensor BKT L

Remove the screw to remove the front cover sensor BKT L with the sensor.
4. Remove the front Cover Sensor L. Release the connector, and remove screws fixing the Front cover sensor L.
Switch dog L (M507519)
2. Reassemble Front Cover Sensor L

Front Cover Sensor Bracket L
* After assembling the front cover, make sure that SW dog does not contact to the front cover sensor BKT.
3- 147
JV5-130S/160S

[JV5-01]
3. Test Front Cover Sensor

#TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER #SENSOR TEST FRONT COVER
<ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
[FUNCTION]
(to Next)
:OFF [ ] / [ ] : SW :OFF
Open/Close Front cover to check ON/OFF
<ENT> [ ] / [ ] :SW <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
(to Next)
:ON
2. Confirm ON/OFF display of LCD with FRONT COVER Open/close the front cover to sensor display of LCD.
3- 148
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-14.
Front Cover Sensor R
Behind
Right
1. Remove Front Cover Sensor R
P 4 x 12 SMW
P 2 x 12 SMW (x2)
Front Cover Sensor R Front Cover Sensor Bracket R (M507520)
3. Remove the Front Cover Sensor BKT R Remove the screw to remove the front cover sensor BKT R with the sensor.
4. Remove the Front Cover Sensor R. Release the connector, and remove the screw fixing the front cover sensor R.
Front Cover SenSwitch dog R sor Bracket R
2. Reassemble Front Cover Sensor R

(M507518)
* After assembling the front cover, make sure that SW dog does not contact to the front cover sensor BKT.
3- 149
JV5-130S/160S

[JV5-01]
3. Test Front Cover Sensor

#TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER #SENSOR TEST FRONT COVER
<ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
[FUNCTION]
(to Next)
:OFF [ ] / [ ] : SW :OFF
Open/Close front cover to check ON/OFF
(to Next)
#TEST CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [ ] :SW
:ON
2. Confirm ON/OFF display of LCD with FRONT COVER Open/close the front cover to confirm sensor display of LCD.
3- 150
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-15.
Left
1. Remove Maintenance Cover Sensor L

P 4 x 12 SMW
Maintenance Switch Bracket (M507534/7918)
2. Remove the screw fixing the Maintenance SW BKT. * After removing the screw, take care not to drop the Maintenance SW BKT.
Left
Positioning Boss
P2 x 10 SMW (x2)
2. Reassemble Maintenance Cover Sensor L

Maintenance Switch Bracket
3. Remove the Maintenance Cover Sensor L. Release the connector and remove screws (x2) of the Maintenance Cover Sensor L.
* When the Maintenance SW BKT is assembled to the main body frame, use the positioning boss for positioning.
Power ON
3. Test Maintenance Cover Sensor L
L.*>
[JV5-01]
* If no error in usual start, OK
1. Usual start of JV-5 If an error is not displayed on LCD, OK. If an error is displayed, check sensor assembling.
3- 151
JV5-130S/160S
3-4-16.
P 4 x 12 SMW
Right
1. Remove Maintenance Cover Sensor R

Maintenance Switch Bracket (M507534/7918)
2. Remove Screws Fixing the Maintenance SW BKT. * After removing screws, take care not to drop the Maintenance SW BKT.
P2 x 10 SMW (x2)
2. Reassemble Maintenance Cover Sensor R

Positioning Boss
Maintenance Switch Bracket
3. Remove Maintenance Cover Sensor R. Release the connector, and remove screws (x2) of the Maintenance Cover Sensor R.
* When the Maintenance SW BKT is assembled to the main body frame, use the positioning boss for positioning.
Power ON
3. Test Maintenance Cover Sensor R
L.*>
[JV5-01]
* If no error in usual start, OK.
1. Usual start of JV-5 If an error is not displayed on LCD, OK. If an error is displayed, check sensor assembling.
3- 152
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-17.
Ink Leakage Sensor
Content JV5-130S/160S uses total 3 of the same type ink leak sensors on right and left cable bears and on the station. At ink leak error, as no position of leaking is displayed though occurrence of leaking is displayed, corresponding sensor must be identified at first. Here, only replacement method of sensors is described. (Replace after taking mesaures for cause of ink leaking .) Tools & jigs Waste Cloth (Bemcot etc.) Gloves Conductive block (for sensor check) Work Flow
2. Remove Ink Leakage Sensor L ( P. 3- 154 ) 4. Remove Ink Leakage Sensor R ( P. 3- 154 ) 6. Remove Ink Leakage Sensor S ( P.3- 155 )
1. Identifying Sensor
(P . 3- 153 )
Identify cause and take action
Cleaning adjacent place
3. Reassemble Ink Leakage Sensor L (P. 3- 154 ) 5. Reassemble Ink Leakage Sensor R ( P. 3- 155 ) 7. Reassemble Ink Leakage Sensor S ( P. 3-156 )
8. Test Ink Leak Sensor ( P. 3- 157 ) 9. Reassemble Covers ( P. 3-157 )
Power ON.
Behind
1.
L.*>
Identifying Sensor
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
Sensor Name Sensor Position Ink Leakage Sensor L Bear Guide L end Ink Leakage Sensor R Bear Guide R end Ink Leakage Sensor S Station Ink tray Note : Here replacement procedure of ink
leak sensor is described. Replace sensor after taking measures for the cause of ink leaking according to the situation.

Make sure that there is no ink leaking on the left side of Bear Guide.

Make sure that there is no ink leaking on the right side of Bear Guide, or on ink tray of the station.
4. Hereinafter the step is branched. Remove corresponding sensor with referring to the table above. * When ink leaking position can not be identified, execute check of each sensor.
3- 153
JV5-130S/160S
Left
2. Remove Ink Leakage Sensor L

Procedure for replacing a ink leak sensor on the left end of the bear guide is described.
Ink detection PCB bracket (M507833)
Release connector
Loosen
Ink Leakage Sensor L (E104534)
1. Loosen screws (x2) of the ink detection PCB. Loosen screws f(x2) ixing the ink leak sensor L.
2. Remove the connector to remove the ink leak sensor L. * Take care not to stick ink to the connector. If ink stuck to the connector, replace harnes at the same time.
Cleaning
Do not touch pad faces
3. Reassemble Ink Leakage Sensor L

3. Ink detection PCB * Do not touch pad faces (x2). If touched, conduct cleaning with alchohl If ink sticks to the PCB, replace the PCB.
Conduct cleaning aroung ink leaking.
4. Remove Ink Leakage Sensor R

Procedure for replacing a ink leak sensor on the right end of the bear guide is described.
Ink detection PCB bracket (M507833) Rear Cover R (M507496) P4x12 SMW (x11) Loosen (x4) Loosen
1. Remove Rear Cover R. Loosen lower screws (x4) and remove the screw shown in the picture to replace the cover.
2. Loosen screws (x2) of the ink detection PCB. Replace the connector, and loosen screws (x2) fixing the ink leak sensor L.
Right
3- 154
Overhaul of Sensors
Release connector
Ink Leakage Sensor R (E104534)
3. Remove the connector to remove the ink leak sensor R. * Take care not to stick ink to the connector. If ink stuck to the connector, replace harnes at the same time.
4. Ink detection PCB. * Do not touch pad faces (x2). If touched, conduct cleaning with alchohl. If ink sticks to the PCB, replace the PCB.
Cleaning
Conduct cleaning aroung ink leaking.
5. Reassemble Ink Leakage Sensor R

6. Remove Ink Leakage Sensor S

Ink Tray (M601968)
TP3x8 F
Ink Leakage Sensor S (E104534)
Ink Tray (M601968)
Procedure for replacing a ink leak sensor on the station part is described.
1. Loosen screws of ink detection PCB. Remove the screw fixing the ink leak sensor S to ink tray.
2. Replace the connector to remove the ink leak sensor S. * Take care not to stick ink to the connector. If ink stuck to the connector, replace harnes at the same time.
3- 155
JV5-130S/160S
P4x25 SMW (x4)
Cleaning
Ink Tray (M601968)
3. Ink Detection PCB * Do not touch pad faces (x2). If touched, conduct cleaning with alchohl If ink sticks to the PCB, replace the PCB.
B4x25 (x4) Soak Up Pad Holder (M507890) x3
* Conduct cleaning of ink tray and replacement of station absorber according to degree of ink leak. Hereinafter the procedure is described.
1. Remove ink tray Remove screws (x4) to remove the ink tray from the station.
Station Soak Up Pad (M904829) x2
2. Remove the station absorber Remove screws (x3) and absorber binding boards (x3) to remove station absorbers (x2). * If dirt is significant , replace them.
3. Conduct cleaning of ink tray. Clean inside of the tray with cleaning fluid.
~ R side ~
~ Printer rear ~
7. Reassemble Ink Leakage Sensor S

Cable is streched lightly
CCW : Up
Make a circle
Notice: Cable slack is not allowed.
* When sensor cable is replaced or removed, check the followings.
1. Set the station at capping. Elevate the station to cap with turning the power ON or the method shown in the picture above.
2. Make a circle around the clamp while the zone of cable shown in the picture above is streched lightly. * Considering up/down move of the station, slack of cable is not allowed.
3- 156
Overhaul of Sensors
~ Printer rear ~
~ R side ~
3a. Arrange cable on clamp position shown in the drawing above, and connect the connector (CN9) to the side relay PCB.
3b. ~ Cabling and Connection ~
8. Test Ink Leak Sensor

Adjust Out- In sensor test, short-circuit line the right and left pad with the following method, and check ON/OFF display of LCD. Adjust Place a conductive block on Method pad faces on PCB to shortcircuit, and check LCD display. LCD change : OK LCD no change : NG Tool, Jig Conductive block

[JV5-01]
[FUNCTION]
<ENT> [ ] / [ ] : SW <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix (to Next)
#TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER #SENSOR TEST INK LEAK
<ENT> [ENTER] :Fix (to Next) :OFF [ ] / [ ] : SW :OFF
OK
NG
A screw washer is outside of the cover. A screw washer is inside of the cover.
#SENSOR TEST INK LEAK
:ON
2. Check ON/OFF display of LCD with INK LEAK. Short-circuit right and left pads and check LCD display. When there is a change in display, finish with [END] .
3- 157
JV5-130S/160S
3-4-18.
Waste Tank Sensor
Loosen
1. Remove Waste Tank Sensor
Remove Waste Ink Tank Waste Ink Tank Bracket Assy. (M007128)
1. Remove the Waste Tank * Take care not to contaminate ambit with waste fluid. Place a cap on the tank or discharge waste fluid from the tank before the operation.
P4x12 SMW (x3) Connector
2a. Remove the Waste Tank Assy. Loosen the screw shown in the picture above.
Plug coupler
2b. Remove screws (x3) * At removing the screw, take care not to drop the Waste Ink Tank Bracket Assy, and conduct operation with holding it with one hand.
2c. Remove the Connector.
3. Plug the Waste Tank Relay Pipe with waste cloth.
P4x12 SMW (x2)
B4x10
Waste Tank Sensor Bracket (M507299)
Waste Tank Sensor (OJ-796021-702F) x2
4. Remove the Waste Tank Sensor BKT Remove screws (x2), and remove the Waste Tank Sensor BKT from the Waste Tank Sensor Assy
5. Remove the Waste Tank Sensor Release the connector and remove the screw fixing the Waste Tank Sensor.
3- 158
Overhaul of Sensors
2. Reassemble Waste Tank Sensor

Sensor
Waste Tank Detection Shield Plate (M507322)
* Fix the sensor on the position where it does not contact to the Waste Tank Detection Light Shield Plate.
* At assembling the Waste Tank Sensor Assy, set the metal plate shown in the picture inside of a washer of loosen screw.

Not to pinch
3. Test Waste Tank Sensor

[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
<ENT> <ENT>
]/[
] : SW
]/[
] : SW
* At assembling the Waste Tank Sensor Assy, take care not to give damage on the cable caused by rolling the cable inside or pinching. (Make sure that the cable comes out from the right side of the Main body.)
#TEST SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST SET LEVER
<ENT> :OFF
#SENSOR TEST WasteTANK :OFF/OFF
No waste tank (or tank full)
]/[
] : SW
#SENSOR TEST WasteTANK :OFF/ON
Near Full (Tank presence
#SENSOR TEST WasteTANK :OFF/OFF :OFF/ON :ON /OFF :ON /ON #SENSOR TEST WasteTANK :ON/ON
Waste tank presence
2. Switch to WasteTANK
3. Assemble the waste Tank and up/ down it to check LCD display.
3- 159
JV5-130S/160S
3- 160
3-5.

Driving parts for JV5-130S/160S are shown below.
Part 3-5-1. X-axis Motor Assembly 3-5-2. X Pulley, X Belt 3-5-3. Y-axis Motor Assembly 3-5-4. Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt 3-5-5. Y Drive Belt 3-5-6. Wiper Motor 3-5-7. Station Motor 3-5-8. Head UD Motor 3-5-9. M Motor ~ LEFT ~
X Pulley Y-axis Motor Assembly
Reference page
p. 3 - 162 p. 3 - 165 p. 3 - 167 p. 3 - 171 p. 3 - 175 p. 3 - 179 p. 3 - 182 p. 3 - 184 p. 3 - 186
Wiper Motor
Y Drive Pulley
Head UD Motor Y-axis Motor Assembly
Station Motor
M Motor
3- 161
JV5-130S/160S
3-5-1. X-axis Motor Assembly

Behind
1. Remove X-axis Motor Assembly
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
XM Bracket (M507266)
3. Remove Left Cover. Loosen lower side screws (x2), and remove the screws shown in the picture to remove the cover.
4. Remove Rear Cover L. Loosen lower side screws (x3), and remove the screws shown in the picture to remove the cover.
5. Loosen the screws (x3) for XM Bracket.
X-axis Motor Assembly (M507266)
P3x10 SMW (x2)
2. Reassemble X-axis Motor Assembly

Reverse Steps 6 and 5 for reassembly.
Release connectors.(x2)
6. Release the connectors (x2) to Xaxis Motor.
7. Remove X-axis Motor Assembly. Loosen the screws (x2) to remove the motor assembly. Be careful of the assembly falling.
3- 162
Content
3. Adjust X Belt Tension
Target Tools
Adjust the tension of X Belt (between X-axis Motor and X Pulley). Wrong tension could slip motor or result in breakage of motor or belt due to rotation obstruction, or cause failure in media feed unit. 2-2.5 mm of flexure on applying force of 300gf with gage Tension Gage (x Kg)
OK NG NG
Put horizontally in the middle of pulleys.
Belt is vertically shifted.
Belt is slantingly engaged.
1. Engage X Belt between X Pulley and X-axis Motor Pulley. * Put the belt horizontally in the middle of pulleys.
Push perpendicular to the belt center at300gf.
Check bending amount ( 2~ 2.5 mm )
XM bracket
2a. Apply Tension Gage with the force of 300gf perpendicular to the belt in the center between the pulleys.
2b. Adjust XM Bracket so that the flexure of the belt comes within 22.5 mm.
2c. ~ Tension Adjustment ~ Laterally shift XM Bracket to adjust the tension to the proper value, and tighten the screws (x3).
Content
4. Adjust Motor Current

* If buzz is found on motor, conduct the following adjustment.
Adjust Contents Tools
Execute current adjust of Xmotor Adjust 2 items Minimize Hunting noise of X-motor at operation.
Stopr Adjust
Y Moving Adjus
t
No need
X Moving Adjustt
Execute Item on X-motor : Stop Adjust X-operation Adjust Execute Item on X-motor : Stop Adjust Y-operation Adjust
~ Motor Current Adjust Outline ~ * Adjust value varies on each motor and each machine * Adjustable range is within 130~160 on each motor.
3- 163
JV5-130S/160S

[JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
[ENTER] : Set
#MOTOR CURRENT STOP ADJUST <ent> #MOTOR CURRENT X MOVING ADJUST<ent> #X MOVING ADJUST S= 10mm/s X= 100mm A=0.20G
[ [
]/[
] : SW
L.*>
[ [ [
]/[ ] SW
] : VC
[ENTER] : Set
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST
<ent>
]/[
] : SW
0~255 (Input range)
] :[ENTER] : Ret
]/[ ]/[
] : XC ] :SW
[ENTER] : Set
[ENTER] : Ret.
1. Select MOTOR CURRENT in #ADJUST MODE * Start with the Maintenance Open Mode
2. Execute STOP ADJUST

Adjust electric current value of Xmotor and Y-motor so that Hunting noise of both motor is minimized on the station in not carriage out.
(At Xmotor drv.)
3a. Execute X MOVING ADJUST
#X MOVING ADJUST S= 10mm/s X= 100mm A=0.20G

[ [ ]/[ ]/[ ] : VC ] : Move
[ENTER] : Exec. [END] : Ret.
#XmovingADJUST *RUN* xxx (xxxx) S= 10mm/s A=0.20G X= 100mm
]/[
] : VC : Ret.
[END]
[END]
: Ret.
X-axis consecutive drive (X-mortar drive)

* Not cap OFF
[END]
End
3b. Input the following conditions and execute * Input the following conditions. Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/s Acceleration (A) : 0.2 G Length (X) : approx. 50 ~ 100 mm
3c. With listening to Hunting noise at X-motor driving, adjust value to minimize the noise. Check the noise of X-motor at the left back side of JV-5.
4. Presss [END] plural of times to end.
OK
NG
Put on covers after adjustment.
3- 164
3-5-2. X Pulley, X Belt

Behind
1. Remove X pulley and X belt
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
XM Bracket (M507266)
3. Remove Left Cover. Loosen lower side screws (x2), and remove the screw shown in the picture to remove the cover.
4. Remove Rear Cover L. Loosen lower side screws (x3), and remove the screw shown in the picture to remove the cover.
5. Loosen the screws (x3) for XM Bracket.
P4x12 SMW (x3)
SSWP 4x4 (x2)
P3x10 SMW (x2)
X Pulley Bracket (M507267)
X Pulley (M203155)
6. Remove X Pulley Bracket. Loosen the screws (x3) to remove X Pulley Bracket.
7. Remove X Pulley. Loosen the screws (x2) to remove X Pulley from X axis.
8. Remove X Belt. Loosen the screws (x2) for X-axis Motor Assembly to carefully remove the belt so as to prevent fall.
3- 165
JV5-130S/160S
Content
2. Reassemble X-axis Motor Assembly

Reverse the procedure of Steps 8 to 6 for reassembly.
3. Adjust X Belt Tension
Target Tools
Adjust the tension of X Belt (between X-axis Motor and X Pulley). Wrong tension could slip motor or result in breakage of motor or belt due to rotation obstruction, or cause failure in media feed unit. 2-2.5 mm of flexure on applying force of 300gf with gage Tension Gage (x Kg)
OK NG NG
Put horizontally in the middle of pulleys.

Push perpendicular to the belt center at300gf.
Check bending amount
( 2~ 2.5 mm )
Belt is vertically shifted.
Belt is slantingly engaged.
1. Engage X Belt between X Pulley and X-axis Motor Pulley. * Put the belt horizontally in the middle of pulleys.
2a. Apply Tension Gage with the force of 300gf perpendicular to the belt in the center between the pulleys.
2b. Adjust XM Bracket so that the flexure of the belt comes within 22.5 mm.
OK
NG
XM bracket
2c. ~ Tension Adjustment ~ Laterally shift XM Bracket to adjust the tension to the proper value, and tighten the screws (x3).
3- 166
3-5-3. Y-axis Motor Assembly

Behind
1. Remove Y-axis Motor Assembly
Right Cover (M507493) Loosen (x2) P4x12 SMW (x2) Release clamps. (x2)
P4x12 SMW (x7)
3a. Remove Right Cover. Loosen lower side screws and remove the following screws. Lower side : 2
3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ Right side face : 4 Right top side : 3
4. Release the clamps (x2) shown above. Release the clamps (x2) for Wash Cartridge Assembly.
P4x12 SMW (x3)
Be careful of tube disconnection
Lay Protection Sheet.
Caution: Lay Protection Sheet and put Wash Cartridge Assembly on it to keep from flaw or damage. Caution: Be careful of tube disconnection at the joint above to handle Wash Cartridge Assembly.
5a. Remove Wash Cartridge Assembly.

Loosen the screws (x3) to remove Wash Cartridge & Stay.
5b. Mount Wash Cartridge Assembly to the position shown above.
* Keep Wash Cartridge as joined with Stay.
3- 167
JV5-130S/160S
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Y-axis Motor Assy. (E300475) Release clamp.
YM Top Plate (M507260)
YM-spacer (M202665) x2
Release connectors. (x2)
6. Remove YM Top Plate.
7. Remove YM-spacers (x2).
8. Release clamp and connectors. Release the clamp for Y-axis Motor Cable and disconnect the connectors (x2).
Y drive transmission belt
Y-axis Motor Assembly (E300475)
P4x12 SMW (x2) YD Bracket D (M507154)
2. Reassemble Y-axis Motor Assembly

Follow the next procedure to reassemble Y-axis Motor Assembly.
9a. Remove Y-axis Motor Assembly. * Be careful of Y-axis Motor Assembly falling to loosen the screws (x2).
9b. ~ Y-axis Motor Assembly ~
Y drive transmission belt
OK OK NG
Horizontal in middle Horizontal but upper Shifted lower Slanting
P4x12 SMW (x2) YD Bracket D (M507154)
NG
1. Temporarily fix Y-axis Motor Assembly to YD Bracket D with the screws (x2).
2. Engage the belt between Y Drive Pulley and DM Pulley. * Belt must be horizontal in the middle of pulley width. (Upper shift is allowable.)
3. Reverse the steps 9 to 6 to reassemble YM Top Plate, and conduct the following adjustment.
3- 168
Content
3. Adjust Y-Drive Transmission Belt Tension
Target Tools
Adjust the tension of y-drive transmission belt (between Yaxis Motor and Y Drive Pulley Assembly). Wrong tension could slip motor or result in breakage of motor or belt due to rotation obstruction, or cause failure in media feed unit. Tension Gage (x Kg) Press in middle at right angle.
1. Apply the gage at right angle in the middle between Y-axis Motor Pulley and Y Drive Pulley Assembly to measure tension. * Target: XXX xx kg
P4x12 SMW (x2)
2a. Laterally shift Y-axis Motor Assembly until tension becomes right.
2b. Tighten the screws (x2) after Yaxis Motor is positioned.
Content
4. Adjust Motor Current

* If buzz is found on motor, conduct the following adjustment.
Adjust Contents Tools
Adjust electric current of Ymotor Adjust items are the following 2. Minimise Hunting noise at Ymotor driving.
Stop Adjust
YMoving Adjust
X Moving Adjust
No need
Execute item on X-motor: Stop Adjust X Move Adjust Execute item on Y-motor: Stop Adjust Y Move Adjust
~ Motor Current Adjust Outline ~ * Adjust value varies on each motor and each machine * Adjustable range is within 130~160 on each motor.
3- 169
JV5-130S/160S
[REMOTE]+[FUNCTION]+PowerON
L.*> [JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION]
[ENTER] : Set
#MOTOR CURRENT STOP ADJUST <ent> #MOTOR CURRENT Y MOVING ADJUST<ent> #Y MOVING ADJUST S= 10mm/s Y= 100mm A=1.00G
[ [
]/[
] : SW
#ADJUST HEAD ADJUST
[ [
]/[ ]/[
] : VC ] :SW
[ENTER] : Set
<ent>
]/[
] : SW
[ENTER] :Ret.
0~255 (Input Range)
]/[ ]/[
] : VC ] :SW
[ENTER] : Set
[ENTER] : Ret.
1. Select MOTOR CURRENT in #ADJUST MODE. * Start with the Maintenance Open Mode.
2. Execute STOP ADJUST Adjust electric current value of Xmotor and Y-motor so that Hunting noise of both motor is minimized on the station in not carriage out.
(At Y-motor driving)
3a. Execute Y MOVING ADJUST
#Y MOVING ADJUST S= 10mm/s X= 100mm A=1.00G

[ [ ]/[ ]/[ ] : VC ] : Move
[ENTER] : Exec. [END] :Ret.
#YmovingADJUST *RUN* xxx (xxxx) S= 10mm/s A=1.00G X= 100mm
]/[
] : VC : Ret.
[END]
[END]
: Ret
(Carriage Out)
[END]
End
Y-axis consecutive drive (Y-mortar drive) 3b. Input test conditions to execute * Input the following conditions. Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/s Acceleration (A) : 0.2 G Length (X) : approx. 50 ~ 100 mm
3c. With listening to Hunting noise at Y-motor driving, adjust value to minimize the noise. Check the noise of Y-motor at the left back side of JV-5.
4. Press [END] plural of times to end.
OK
NG
3- 170
3-5-4. Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt

Behind
1. Remove Y Drive Pulley and Y-Drive Transmission Belt
P4x12 SMW (x7) Maintenance Cover L (M601944)
3a. Remove Right Cover. Loosen lower side back and front screws and remove the following screws. Lower side : 2
3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ Right side face : 4 Right top side : 3
P4x12 SMW (x11) Left Cover (M507494)
Left Y-T SP Plate (M507262)
Right
Loosen (x2) Loosen (x2) B4x60 (x2) Y Drive Belt (M800885/6) Y-axis Motor
5. Remove Left Cover. Loosen lower side screws (x2), and remove the screws shown in the picture to remove the cover.
6. Remove Y-T SP Plate to release tension. * Loosen the screws alternately. Loosening only a screw could heavily burden the other to break spring.
7. Loosen the screws (x2) for Y-axis Motor Assembly.
3- 171
JV5-130S/160S
P4x12 SMW (x2) D Bracket U (M502708)
Right
Y Drive Belt
Y Drive Pulley Assembly (M006891)
O-ring
Y Drive TransmissionBelt
YD Bracket
Y Drive Transmission Belt
Notice: Take care not to lose the O-ring on the pulley.
8. Remove D Bracket U. Loosen the screws (x2) to remove D Bracket U.
9a. Remove Y Drive Pulley Assembly. Remove Y Drive Pulley Assembly from the axis of YD Bracket D.
9b. ~ Notices at Removing Pulley ~
2. Reassemble Y Drive Pulley and Y Drive Transmission Belt

Follow the next procedure to reassemble Y Drive Pulley and Y Drive Transmission Belt.
Y Drive Pulley Assembly (M006891)
OK
Horizontal in middle
OK
Horizontal but upper

NG
Shifted lower Slanting
NG
Y Drive TransmissionBelt
1. Reassemble Y Drive Pulley Assembly, and engage Y Drive Transmission Belt.
2. Reassemble D Bracket U, and adjust Y Drive Transmission Belt position. *Put the belt horizontally in the middle of pulley width. (Upper shift is allowable.)
Content
3. Adjust Y Drive Transmission Belt Tension
Target Tools
Adjust the tension of YDrive Transmission Belt (between Y-axis Motor and Y Drive Pulley Assembly). Wrong tension could slip motor or result in breakage of motor or belt due to rotation obstruction, or cause failure in media feed unit. Tension Gage (x Kg) Press in middle at right angle.
1. Apply the gage at right angle in the middle between Y-axis Motor Pulley and Y Drive Pulley Assembly to measure tension. * Target: XXX xx kg
3- 172
P4x12 SMW (x2)
2a. Laterally shift Y-axis Motor Assembly until tension becomes right.
2b. Tighten the screws (x2) after YAxis Motor is positioned.
Content
4. Adjust Y Drive Belt Alignment
Tools
Check and adjust the alignment of Y Drive Belt (between Y Drive Pulley Assembly - Y-T pulley). Improper assembling may cause belt dropping, motor idle running or bad print quality.
OK
OK

NG
NG
1a. Place Y Drive Belt on Y Drive Pulley and confirm that fitting is correct. * Place the belt on the position shown in the drawing horizontally at placing the belt.
Fix E-ring outside (Top/Bottom) Y-T pulley bracket
Y-T SP Plate (M507262)
3 2.0 mm
1b. ~ Check Pulley ~ * Place E-rings on top and bottom of the pulley outside of the blacket at fixing the pulley.
Left
Y-T pulley assy. (M006977)
B4x60 (x2)
Y Drive Belt (M800885/6)
2. Tighten screws (x2) of Y-T SPplate to increase the belt tension. * Loosen the screws alternately. Loosening only a screw could heavily burden the other to break spring.
3. Check Belt tension Part The gap between line A of Y-T pulley and Y-T BKT is 1 - 5mm, as a target.
3- 173
JV5-130S/160S
OK
NG
3- 174
3-5-5.
Y Drive Belt
Behind
1. Remove Y Drive Belt

P4x12 SMW (x7) Maintenance Cover L (M601944)
3a. Remove Right Cover. Loosen screws lower side back and front and remove the following screws. Lower side : 2
3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ Right side face : 4 Right top face : 3
P4x12 SMW (x11) Left Cover (M507494)
Open/Close Cover Assy (M007138/9) Loosen (x2)
5. Remove Left Cover. Loosen lower side screws (x2) and remove screws shown in the picture to remove the cover.
Right
Right
3- 175
JV5-130S/160S
Right
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
8. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove the Y Cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operations with 2 persons.
Left
Head Cover (M507559) P4x12 SMW (x2) B3x6 (x2)
CW: Down
9. Manually lower Station to move Carriage. Up: Counterclockwise (CCW) Down: Clockwise (CW)
10. Remove the head cover. Remove the right and left screws to remove the head cover.
Right
11. Separate the belt from the carriage. Remove screws (x2) shown in the picture and pull out the belt connection part in the Y-direction(the right of the carriage is the left)
Y-T Pulley Bracket (M507315) Do not loosen.
Belt Holder 1 B4x60 (x2) Y Drive Belt (M800885/6) Y-T Pulley (M205123) Belt Holder (M400161)
12. Remove Y-T SP Plate to release tension. * Loosen the screws alternately. Loosening only a screw could heavily burden the other to break spring.
13. Remove Y-T Pulley.
14. Remove the left and right Belt Holders 1 from Belt Holder.
3- 176
B4x8
Loosen
Pick with Slotted Screwdriver
Slide to remove.
Belt Holder S (M503786)
Belt Holder 1 (M400160)
15. Loosen the screw.
16. Disconnect Belt Holder S and Belt Holder 1. Insert Slotted Screwdriver to pick.
17. Slide Belt Holder S to remove. * Remove Belt Holders S on both ends. * See reassembly procedure for further steps.
Fix with tape.
2. Reassemble Y Drive Belt

Follow the next procedure for reassembly.
Old Belt New Belt New Belt
Make a circle with belt
Tape
1. Join new belt and old belt with tape.
2. Run the new belt around Carriage.
Engage the toothed surface of belt with Belt Holder 1.
Lead belt behind Carriage.
Belt holder 1 (M40060)
Belt Holder 1 Belt Holder (M400161)
3. Lead the belt behind Carriage after it ran around Carriage.
4. Engage the toothed surface at both ends of belt with Belt Holder 1, and tighten screw after mounting Belt Holder S.
5. Mount Belt Holders 1 (left and right) to Belt Holder.
3- 177
JV5-130S/160S
Put E-ring outside (upper/lower) Y-T Pulley Bracket
OK
OK

NG
Y-T Pulley (M205123)
NG
B4x60 (x2)
6. Assemble Y-T Pulley with Y-T Pulley Bracket. * Put upper and lower E-rings outside of each bracket.
* Put the belt horizontally as shown above.
7. Fix the Y-T SP Plate * Loosen the screws alternately. Loosening only a screw could heavily burden the other to break spring.
Belt Holder (M400161)
Y-T Bracket
3 2.0 mm
Screw Holes (x2) Y-T Pulley Bracket
8a. Align Belt Holder so that screws holes (x2) become in position, to reassemble.
9a. Check Belt Tension Part * When A-line plate end of Y-T pulley shown in the picture touches to Y-T BKT, return to 4 and move 1 belt ridge to inward. (If necessary, cut appropriately.)
9b. Check Belt Tension Part 2 The gap between Line A of the Y-T pulley and the Y-T BKT is 1 - 5mm, as a target.
OK
P4x12 SMW (x2)
NG
9c. ~ Tighten screws. ~
3- 178
3-5-6.
Wiper Motor
Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Wiper Motor
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
Right Cover (M507493) Loosen (x2) P4x12 SMW (x2) P4x12 SMW (x16) Loosen (x4) Rear Cover R (M507496)
3a. Remove Right Cover and Rear Cover R. Loosen screws on lower side of the right cover and remove screws shown in the picture.
3b. ~Remove the Right Cover ~ Remove the screws shown in the picture and remove the right cover first. * Take care not to drop the cover.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Right
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
5. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove the Y Cover F. * Take care not t o drop the cover. Operation eith more than 2 persons.
3- 179
JV5-130S/160S
Station Back Cover (M507375)
Wiper Wash Holder (M601841)
P4x12 SMW (x2) P4x12 SMW
6a. Remove Station Back Cover.
6b. ~ Station Back Cover~
7. Remove Wiper Wash Holder.
Behind
Disconnect connector. Wiper Unit Assembly
P4x12 SMW (x2) Disconnect connector.
8. Disconnect the connector from Wiper Sensor.
9. Disconnect the connector from Wiper Motor.
10. Loosen the screws (x2) to remove Wiper Unit Assembly.
Wiper Motor (E300495)
Wiper Unit Assembly P3x6 SMW (x4)
11a.Remove Wiper Motor.
11b.~ Remove Wiper Motor. ~
3- 180
OK
NG
2. Reassemble Wiper Motor

3- 181
JV5-130S/160S
3-5-7.
Station Motor
Power ON.
Behind
[ST.MAINTE]
1. Remove Station Motor
L.*>
[JV5-01]
Maintenance Cover R
(M601943) Right Cover (M507493) Loosen (x2) P4x12 SMW (x2) P4x12 SMW (x16) Loosen (x4) Rear Cover R (M507496)
3a. Remove the Right Cover and Rear Cover R. Loosen screws on back and front of lower side of the right cover and remove screws shown in the picture.
3b. ~Remove the Right Cover ~ Remove screws shown in the picture and remove the right cover first. * Take care not to drop the cover.
Behind
Station Motor (E300495) P3x6 SMW (x3)
Disconnect
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Motor Bracket (M507250)
4. Disconnect connector from Station Motor.
5. Remove Motor Bracket. remove screws (x2) from back side of the printerand remove the motor BKT.
6. Remove Station Motor. Remove screws (x3) and remove the station motor from the Motor BKT.
3- 182
OK
NG
2. Reassemble Station Motor

3- 183
JV5-130S/160S
3-5-8.
Head UD Motor
Behind
1. Remove Head UD MOTOR
Jumping Shaft
P4x12 SMW (x7)
3a. Remove Right Cover. Loosen screws on lower side right and left and remove the following screws. Lower side : 2
3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ Right side face : 4 Right top face : 3
4. Confirm that Carriage Assembly is capped. * The Jumping shaft on the head unit protrudes at the position shown in the picture.
Head UD Motor Bracket (M507210) Head Up and Down Motor Assembly (M007178)
P4x12 SMW (x3)
P3x6 SMW (x2)
5. Remove the Head UD Motor Remove the connector and remove screws (x3) of the head UD motor, and remove it with the motor.
6. Remove the Head UD Motor
3- 184
Lubrication
2. Reassemble Head UD MOTOR

Fitting hole
UD Jumping Shaft
* Lubricate UD Jumping Shaft Hole as appropriate. Amount: 2 drops Lubricant: Slider Grease
* To reassemble Head UD Motor Bracket, tighten screw so that UD Jumping Shaft smoothly put in/ out the hole. Gear engagement must have play.
Center deviance
0.5mm
Jumping Shaft Jumping Shaft Fitting Hole (Head UD Motor BKT)
* At assembling the head UD motor BKT, adjust the position so that the jumping shaft on the head unit can be inserted in the fitting hole straight. (Target :center deviance is within 0.5 mm)
~ Jumping Shaft~
3- 185
JV5-130S/160S
3-5-9.
M Motor
Behind
P3x6 SMW (x3) Take-up Cover (M507538)
1. Remove M Motor
2. Remove Take-up Cover.
P3x6 SMW
B4x10 (x2)
3a. Remove Winding Motor Unit Remove the left screw.
3b. ~Removing the Winding Motor Unit ~ Remove lower side screws (x2)
3c. ~Winding Motor Unit ~
C-10
C-10
Mini keeper
4. Remove the motor from the unit.
5. Remove the mini-keeper. Remove the C-ring toremove the mini-keeper.
6. Remove the C-ring.
3- 186
M Gear Holder Bracket -B (M507329) SSWP3x3 (x2)
Pin M Gear Holder Bracket -A (M507328)
7. Remove the pin from the motor shaft.
8. Remove M Gear Bearing BKT-A. Remove the M gear bearing BKT-A including the BKT-B and bearing.
9. Remove Stopper Screws (x2). Remove the stopper screws (x2) from the motor shaft.
P4x10 SMW (x4)
M motor
M motor shaft M Motor Bracket (M507327) (M205137)
10. Remove M Motor. Pull out the motor shaft and remove screws (x4) from the M motor BKT.
2. Reassemble M MOTOR
3- 187
JV5-130S/160S
3-6.
Overhaul of Other Parts
The followings are other parts forming the JV5-130S/160S..

Part 3-6-1. Cutter Unit Assy. 3-6-2. A Heater Cover Assy. 3-6-3. P Heater Cover Assy. 3-6-4. R Heater Cover Assy. 3-6-5. Wiper Wash Solenoid 3-6-6. SSR
Reference page
p. 3 - 189 p. 3 - 193 p. 3 - 198 p. 3 - 204 p. 3 - 206 p. 3 - 209
~ Head Assy ~
Cutter Unit Assy.
P Heater Cover Assy. R Heater Cover Assy.
SSR (x3)
Wiper Wash Solenoid
3- 188
3-6-1. Cutter Unit Assy.

Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Cutter Unit Assy.
L.*>
[JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
[ENTER]
Right
Right
Right
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Left
B3x6 (x2)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
4. Remove Y Cover F. Remove the right and left screws (x6) to remove the Y Cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
5. Remove the head cover. Remove the right and left screws to remove the head cover.
Right
3- 189
JV5-130S/160S
P3x10 SMW (x2)
Cutter Unit Assembly (M006952)
6. Remove the Cutter Assy
Content
2. Cutter Unit Positioning

* After assembling the cutter unit, execute the cutter unit positioning.
Tools
Adjust fixing position of cutter unit (vertical, horizontal) using a jig Height adjust jig (Media Jam/ Cutter unit height positioning tool) : OPT-J0108
Temp. joint (x2)
Cutter Unit
* If the jig can not be arranged, using of an intervenient having height of 7.5mm in the cutter unit side is allowed.
1. Set screws of the cutter unit at temporary joint state. * Temporary joint state is that the unit is held lightly.
Down clamp lever
Notice: Keep clamp lever down at adjusting. PG setting should be 1.5mm
Push to the end
2. Down the Clamp Lever
3. Set the Jig to the Platen Set 4 bosses of the jig in slots in slots back and front for platen media plate as shown in the drawing above.
4. Push the jig to the end After setting, slide the jig to head side to the end (to stop)
3- 190
Push down cutter too Cutter Unit
Slot for cutter tool
Height Adjust Jig
Height Adjust Jig
5a. djust cutter unit height
5b. Adjust the cutter unit position back-front. Decide the unit position so that the cutter tool meets the slot (with push down the cutter tool), anf fix it with a screw.
Note : On rare occasions, the tool comes out of the slot because of assembling accident errors or deifferences of part accuracies. In such a case, adjust again to the back-front optimum position where the tool always in whole slot on the platen
Head Unit
L end
Center
R end
6a. Check the Cutter Tool Position Move the head unit to each right, center and left end on the platen, and push down the cutter tool Assy to check back-front positioning.
6b. Re-adjusting of the Cutter Tool back-front positioning
Content
3. Encoder Test
Tools
Measure each of media presence position and no presence position with downing.. Media

[JV5-01]
L.*>
<ENT>
<ENT>
* f the media is too thin to read, use a media within the specifications range.
3- 191
JV5-130S/160S
#TEST ENCODER TEST
<ENT>
[ENTER] : Set [ ] / [ ] : SW [ENTER] : Set [ENTER] : Exec.
#ENCODER TEST LINEAR ENCODER <ent> #ENCODER TEST CUTTER ENCODER <ent> #CUTTER ENCODER CHECK :ent
#CUTTER ENCODER Result of a test. THICK = 0.5mm Pr=-247 Mr=-231
[END] :End
Pr : Measurement of Platen Mr: Measurement on Media
2. Execute CUTTER ENCODER. Select and execute CUTTER ENCODER of ENCODER TEST.
3. Confirm the test results and finish the test when there is no error.
4. Reassemble Cutter Unit Assy.

3- 192
3-6-2. A Heater Cover Assy.

1. Remove connectors (x2) on lower side of the printer. Remove connectors for drying fan and exhaust duct connected to the BOX relay PCB. 2a. Remove Open and close cover Assy. Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and remove left side of the cover.
Right
Right
Right
Left
Left
Right
Right
3- 193
JV5-130S/160S
Loosen (x2) Exhaust cover R (M507881)
Left
Drying fan Assy. 130/160 (M007141/40)
Mini knob Belt Screw
7a. Remove Dryer FAN Assy from stayes in both sides. Remove right and left mini-knobs and remove the belt lock screw.
Right
Left
Left
Screw (x2)
Right
Behind
2. Remove A Heater Cover Assy.
3- 194
Right
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
3. Remove Left Cover. Loosen lower side screws (x2) and remove the screw shown in the picture to remove the cover.
4. Remove Rear Cover L. Loosen lower side screws (x3) and remove the screw shown in the picture to remove the cover.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
P4x12 SMW (x3)
H Harness Cover (M507183) Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
6. Remove Y Cover F. Remove the right and left screws (x6) to remove the Y Cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
P4x12 SMW (x4)
Body Color Black
Qty 4
9a. Remove the connectors shown right from Heater PCB.
9b. ~ Connector List ~ After Heater: Black Connector
3- 195
JV5-130S/160S
Loosen (x4) P4x12 SMW (x4) Caution: Hold A Heater Cover with a hand on loosening screws to prevent cover from falling.
11b. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~
Take out cable.
Left
Right
Release connector.
12c. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~ 130S: A Heater Cover 130 Assembly (M006927) 160S: A Heater Cover 160 Assembly (M006925)
3. Reassemble A Heater Cover Assy.

Red: Pre-heater
* Refer to the above illustration to ensure right connection.
Blue: Print heater
Black: After-heater
3- 196
OK
NG
Without fan label
Front
With fan label
Back
R :DryerFAN Assy side (Black)
* Connector connection of lower side of the printer is as shown in the picture above.
Left
Right
4. TestConfirm
* Check operation of heater&dryer&exhaust FAN at the final on-line test in repairing.
3- 197
JV5-130S/160S
3-6-3. P Heater Cover Assy.

1. Remove connectors (x2) on lower side of the printer. Remove connectors for drying fan and exhaust duct connected to the BOX relay PCB. 2a. Remove Open and close cover Assy. Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and remove left side of the cover.
Right
Right
Right
Left
Left
Right
Right
3- 198
Loosen (x2) Exhaust cover R (M507881)
Left
Drying fan Assy. 130/160 (M007141/40)
Mini knob Belt Screw
7a. Remove Dryer FAN Assy from the roght and left stayes. Remove the right and left miniknobs and remove the belt lock screw.
Left
Right
Left
Screw (x2)
Right
Behind
2. Remove P Heater Cover Assy.
3- 199
JV5-130S/160S
Right
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
3. Remove Left Cover. Loosen screws (x2) on the lower side and remove the screws shown in the picture to remove the cover
4. Remove Rear Cover L. Loosen screws (x3) on the lower side and remove the screws shown in the picture to remove the cover.
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
P4x12 SMW (x3)
H Harness Cover (M507183) Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
6. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove the Y Cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
P4x12 SMW (x4)
Body Color Black Blue Blue (Heater Side)
Qty 4 4 1
9a. Remove the connectors shown right from Heater PCB.
9b. ~ Connector List ~ Print Heater: Blue Connector After Heater: Black Connector
3- 200
Loosen (x4) P4x12 SMW (x4) Caution: Hold A Heater Cover with a hand on loosening screws to prevent cover from falling.
11b. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~ 130S: A Heater Cover 130 Assembly (M006927) 160S: A Heater Cover 160 Assembly (M006925)
Take out cable.
Left
Right
P Heater Assembly B3x10 Ni (x24)
Release connector.
13. Loosen the screws (x24) for P Heater Assembly. * Slide Media Plate and certainly loosen the lower screws.
Lead through bush after releasing all clamps.
Release connector
Release clamp (x8) Lead through bush.
Put through bush
Release clamps(x2)
Release connector and clamps to lead through bush.
14a.Process Heater Cable. Release all clamps for Heater cable (Blue) on the left of printer to lead through bush.
14b. ~ Process Heater Cable. ~
15. Process Thermistor Cable. Release connector of Thermistor and cable from clamps to lead through bush.
3- 201
JV5-130S/160S
P Heater Assembly
16a.Remove P Heater Assembly. * Carefully use both hands to handle cables so as to prevent them from hanging.
16b.~ P Heater Assembly ~
Fix screws with pushing
3. Reassemble P Heater Cover Assy.

* Be sure to reassemble Media Plate on reassembling P Heater Assembly. Follow the next procedure to smoothly reassemble.
1. Tighten the upper screws pressing Plate against the back.
Pull plate
Left
Move smoothly Push slide bar
2. To tighten the lower screws, pull Plate toward you and press Slide Bar against the back.
3. Put on the other in the same way. * After assembling, slide it to the right and left to confirm moving smoothly.
* Run Heater Cables (Blue) around each clamp on each end in front of printer.
Right
3- 202
Lower:Connect to Thermostat of each Assembly
Red: Pre-heater
* Caution: Refer to the above illustration to ensure right connection.
Blue: Printheater
Black: After-heater
R :DryerFAN Assy side (Black)
* Connector connection on the lower side of the printer is as shown in the picture.
OK
NG
Without fan label
Front
With fan label
Back
Left
4. TestConfirm
* Check operation of heater&dryer&exhaust FAN at the final on-line test in repairing.
Right
3- 203
JV5-130S/160S
3-6-4. R Heater Cover Assy.

Behind
1. Remove R Heater Cover Assy.
P4x12 SMW (x2) PR-guide 130/160 (M507425/7308)
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
3. Remove Left Cover. Loosen lower side screws (x2) and remove the screw shown in the drawing to remove the cover.
4. Remove Rear Cover L. Loosen lower side screws (x3) and remove the screw shown in the drawing to remove the cover.
5a. Remove the PR Guide 130/160 Remove the right and left screws (x4).
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Red Red(heater side)
Connector Color
qty
2 1
5b. ~ Remove PR Guide ~ * Conduct with 2 persons not to drop the cover.
6a. Remove connectors descrived in the right from the heater PCB. Remove connectors (CN7, CN15, CN16).
6b. ~ Connectors ~
3- 204
P4x12 SMW
Loosen the screw
7. Remove the Relay Connector Remove the relay connector of thermistor at station side.
8. Remove Screws on lower side of the R Heater Cover Assy 130S : 4 160S : 5
9. Loosen Screws on upper side of the R Heater Cover Assy in front side of the printer. 130S : 6 160S : 7
R Heater Cover 130S/160S assy.
R Heater Cover 130S/160S assy. (M006926/M006924)
10. Remove Cables from the Frame Remove cables before the heater cover replacing so that cables are not in mess at the replacing.
11a.Remove R Heater Cover * Take care not to give damage on the cover or other parts in the vicinity.
11b. ~ R Heater Cover assy. ~
Any of same colors will do.
OK
NG
2. Reassemble R Heater Cover Assy.

Bottom:Connected to thermostat of heater Assy
Red: Pre-heater
* Caution: See the above illustration for right connection.
Blue: Printheater
Black: After-heater
3- 205
JV5-130S/160S
3-6-5. Wiper Wash Solenoid

Power ON
L.*> [JV5-01] #HD.MAINTENANCE FILL UP INK <ent>
[ ]/[ ] [ENTER] [ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
1. Discharge Washing Fluid
[ST.MAINTE]
MAINTENANCE ST.MAINTENANCE <ent> MAINTENANCE HD.MAINTENANCE <ent>
#HD.MAINTENANCE MaintWashLiquid<ent> MaintWashLiquid FILLING UP <ent> MaintWashLiquid DISCHARGE <ent>
[ ]/[ ] [ENTER]
1. Turn the power to the JV-5 On, and get into the MAINTENANCE MUENU.
2. Select DISCHARGE of MAINTENANCE Washiliquid.
Remove washing liquid cartridge

It'sBeingDischarged. PLEASE WAIT ******--------------
3. Remove the washing liquid cartridge to discharge washing liquid.
Behind
2. Remove Wiper Wash Solenoid
3- 206
Right
Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
4. Remove Y Cover F. Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove the Y Cover F. * Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.
Left
P4x12 SMW Front cover sensor R
Down Clamp Lever
Left
Right
Loosen (x4) P4x12 SMW
Tilt
KB Cover (M601945) Loosen P4x12 SMW
5. Down the Clamp lever.
6a. Remove KB Cover. Loosen the right 4 screws.
6b. ~ Remove KB Cover 2 ~ Remove the screw on upper side of the front cover sensor R, loosen lower side screws and tilt to the front, and remove the screw fixing the KB cover shown in the picture.
Left
Loosen (x3) P4x12 SMW KB Cover (M601945) Not to contact Release connector Wiper wash holder (M601841)
P4x12 SMW
6c. ~ Remove KB Cover 3 ~ Loosen screws (x3) to remove the KB cover with taking care not to hit the dryer unit.
7. Remove the Connector Remove the connector of wiper washing solenoid from the Relay Connector.
8. Remove the Wiper Washi Holder * Take care not to drop washing liquid in the tube on parts in the vicinity.
3- 207
JV5-130S/160S
Remove tube
P3x6 SMW (x2)
9a. Remove the Wiper Wash Solenoid Assy Remove screws (x2) , remove the wiper wash solenoid while the tube is connected to.
9b. ~ Wiper Wash Solenoid Assy. ~
10a.Remove the Tube * Take care not to drop washing liquid in the tube on parts in the vicinity.
Wiper Wash Solenoid Assy. (E104400)
3. Reassemble Wiper Wash Solenoid

10b. ~ Wiper Wash Solenoid Assy. ~
Main Power ON (Back)
4. Wash Liquid Filling
Power SW ON
L.*> [JV5-01]
#HD.MAINTENANCE FILL UP INK <ent> [ ]/[ ]
[ST.MAINTE]
#HD.MAINTENANCE MaintWashLiquid<ent> [ENTER] MaintWashLiquid FILLING UP <ent> [ENTER]
MAINTENANCE ST.MAINTENANCE <ent> [ ]/[ ] MAINTENANCE HD.MAINTENANCE <ent> [ENTER]
Execute wash liquid filling
1. Turn the power to the JV-5 ON, and get into the MAINTENANCE MENU.
2. Fill Wash Liquid. * As for the detail of changing of screens at filling, see the Instruction Manual.
3- 208
3-6-6.
SSR
Behind
MF Cover C 160/130 Loosen (160:8 , 130:6)
1. Remove SSR
P4x12 SMW (160:12 , 130:10)
1. Shut off the main power. * As front switch does not cut the power to heater PCB, there is a fear of getting electric shock.
2. Remove MF Cover C Remove the cover in the cap station side on the back of the printer. 130S : MF Cover C 130 (M507418) 160S : MF Cover C 160 (M507165)
P2x10 SMW (x2)
SSR bracket (M507168)
SSR x3
3. Pull out the Cables (x4) of SSR. Pull out cables connected SSR.
4a. Remove SSR Remove screws (x2) to remove SSR from the SSR BKT.
4b. ~ SSR ~
From IO PCB (Either top or bottom)
2. Reassemble SSR
From heater PCB (Either top or bottom)
* Connect the connector referring to the drawing above, and take care not to set wrong side.
* If the cables have extra length, make a circle with a clamp not to touch AC.
3- 209
JV5-130S/160S
OK
NG
3- 210
CHAPTER 4 Troubleshooting
Contents
4-1. Outline ......................................................................... 4-2

4-1-1. Rough identification of the source of the trouble 4-2 4-1-2. Checking procedure ............................................... 4-2
4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed .... 4-4
4-2-1. Error messages and corrective measures ............ 4-4 4-2-2. Warning messages and corrective measures ..... 4-15
4- 1
4-1. Outline
This chapter describes the troubleshooting for JV5-130S/160S. Before starting work, read and understand thoroughly the instructions given below and also in 1-1. Precautions in Maintenance ( p. 1- 2 ).
4-1-1. Rough identification of the source of the trouble

At the beginning of troubleshooting, it is necessary to identify roughly which functions the trouble relates to. Problems can be roughly classified into those that relate to the printer itself and those that involve the connection between the printer and the host computer. Problems with the printer itself The cause of the trouble can be identified by executing appropriate functions or using test functions. 2. Problems concerning the connection to the host computer Hardware: Broken wire or faulty contact of cables Software: Transmission by improper application setting
1.
In the standard setting of JV5-130S/160S, priority is given to the host computer. Check the settings on the host computer to see if there is any improper parameter setting.
4-1-2. Checking procedure

START
Refer to Precautions in Maintenance (
P . 1- 2 )
Is there error message? No Is the trouble related to print quality? No
Yes
4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed (
P . 4-4 )
Yes
Rough identification of error source Execute appropriate functions or use test functions of JV5-130S/160S
( See p.4- 4 )
Do the above functions operate normally? Yes
No
Troubles on the host computer side If this troubleshooting cannot correct the trouble, check to see if the same trouble occurs with another host computer (if possible).
4- 2
Outline
This section describes troubleshooting procedures for the problems for which error messages are displayed.
1. Identifying the error category
The causes of errors can be classified into the following categories: Handling error on the host computer side Trouble on the host computer side Trouble with the interface cable Printer handling error Printer mechanical trouble Printer hardware trouble Printer firmware trouble
2. Initial action
Refer to the error message, and judge whether the trouble lies on the host computer side or on the printer side. Has any of the interface conditions (Printer model setting, command, communication conditions, etc.) been changed? Does the trouble occur under specific conditions? Does the same trouble occur repeatedly?
3. Failure on the printer side
Take the following steps to repair the printer. Replace the defective part (sensor, etc.) or make the necessary adjustment. Replace the main PCB.
4. Repair at the factory
If the error recurs even after the corrective measures specified here are taken, return the printer to the factory of MIMAKI for repair.
4- 3
4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed

4-2-1. Error messages and corrective measures
<Error messages and corrective measures >
Display ERROR ERROR No. ERROR MAIN ROM 01
ERROR MAIN RAM 02 ERROR POWER +3.3V 03 POWER +5V
POWER +24V
POWER +42V
ERROR FLASH ROM 04 ERROR SD-RAM 06 ERROR HEAD (----) 07 VOLTAGE (----)
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Cause Descriptions in the manual Remedy (for reference) Replace the main PCB with a new one. An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the control circuit board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. (ROM) In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the control circuit board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. (RAM) In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. Replace the power supply PCB with a new An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. one. control circuit board. (Power supply voltage In a case of recurrence, contact your Replace the main PCB with a new one. local distributer to call for service. +3.3V) An error occurred on the control circuit board. (Power supply voltage +5V) An error occurred on the control circuit board. (Power supply voltage +24V) An error occurred on the control circuit board. (Power supply voltage +42V) After uploading parameters, initialize all An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the control circuit board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. parameters. (Parameter ROM) In a case of recurrence, contact your * If the state is not restored, replace the main local distributer to call for service. PCB with a new one. An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the Replace the main PCB with a new one. control circuit board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. Replace the memory PCB with a new one. (SDRAM) In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. Reconfirm the head temperature with An error was detected in Turn the power OFF and turn the power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. #TEST>TEMPERATURE.CHK>NOZthe head connection. ZLE TEMP. (Abnormal temperature In a case of recurrence, contact your In case of recurrence. execute the followlocal distributer to call for service. was detected) ings. An error was detected in Make sure that corresponding head FPC, the head connection. head relay PCB are connected in the right (Abnormal voltage was way. detected) Replace the corresponding head with a new one. Replace the slider PCB with a new one.
1. 1. 2. 1. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.
4- 4
Troubles for which error messages are displayed

<Error messages and corrective measures
Cause ERROR ERROR No. ERROR LinearENAn error occurred in 08 CODER: SENSOR detection by the linear encoder. (Counting impossible) LinearENAn error occurred in CODER: DIR. detection by the linear encoder. (Wrong orientation) LinearENAn error occurred in CODER: COUNT detection by the linear encoder. (Read-out count error) ERROR FPGA ERROR An error occurred on the 09 control circuit board. (FPGA PDC) HDC ERROR An error occurred on the (----) control circuit board. (FPGA HDC) ERROR COMMAND The printer received 10 ERROR some data other than command data. Display
(continued)
>
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Descriptions in the manual Remedy (for reference) Make sure that linear encoder scale and Turn the power OFF and turn the power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. encoder PCB are placed in the right positions. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. Replace the encoder PCB with a new one.
1. 2.
Turn the power OFF and turn the power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. Securely connect the interface cable in position. Use an interface cable conforming to the specifications.
1.
Replace the main PCB with a new one. Replace the corresponding HDC PCB with a new one. Replace the main PCB with a new one. When the state is not recovered even if untreated data is cleared, execute the followings. Check the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifications, cable length, etc.) Replace the USB PCB with a new one. Replace the main PCB with a new one. When the state is not recovered even if untreated data is cleared, execute the followings. Check the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifications, cable length, etc.) Replace the USB PCB with a new one. Replace the main PCB with a new one. When the state is not recovered even if untreated data is cleared, execute the followings. Check the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifications, cable length, etc.) Replace the USB PCB with a new one. Replace the main PCB with a new one. Mak sure that the transmission data is in MRL-III command system (data ripped for JV-5). Check the command system set with [MACHINE SETUP] [MRL COMMAND].
1.
2. 1.
2.
3. 4.
ERROR PARAMETER 11 ERROR
Any parameter outside the range of acceptable numeric values was received.
Turn the power OFF and turn the power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service.
1.
2.
3. 4.
ERROR MAINTENANCE 12 COMMAND
(This error does not occur on site.)
1.
2.
3. 4.
ERROR MRL COMMAND Received data does not Transmit data with the command sys16 follow the command tem corresponding to the system. system set in the device.
1.
2.
4- 5

Display ERROR No. ERROR 20
(continued)
>
ERROR 21 ERROR 23
ERROR 24 ERROR 25
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Cause Descriptions in the manual ERROR Remedy (for reference) I/F BOARD 01 An error occurred in the Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a interface between the I/F power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. new one. board and the control In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. board. local distributer to call for service. I/F BOARD 02 An error occurred in the interface between the I/F board and the control board. I/F BOARD 03 An error occurred in the interface between the I/F board and the control board. I/F BOARD 04 An error occurred in the interface between the I/F board and the control board. I/F NONE No I/F board is attached Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a to the control board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. new one. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. local distributer to call for service. 1. Make sure that the connection to the host HOST I/F Time out error occurred Make sure that the cables are conPC is correct. during communication nected correctly and there is no occurbetween the host com- rence of an error in the host PC. 2. Make sure that there is no occurrence of an puter and the interface error in the host PC, or the application runs board for IEEE-1394 normally. connection. I/F INITIAL An error occurred in ini- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a tial operation of the I/F power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. new one. board and control board. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. local distributer to call for service. Make sure that the host PC and the USB Check that the host PC supports the FULL-SPEED An error occurred in cable follow the USB2.0 interface standard. communication between USB2.0 interface. (Communication the host computer and can be resumed without changing any the interface board for setting. However, it is recommend to use the connection in High-Speed USB2.0 connection. (Full-Speed mode con- mode.) nection) PACKET SIZE An error occurred in Make sure that the cables are con1. Make sure that the connection to the host OVER communication between nected correctly and there is no occurPC is correct. the host computer and rence of an error in the host PC. 2. Make sure that there is no occurrence of an the interface board for error in the host PC, or the application runs USB2.0 connection. normally. USB PROTOCOL An error occurred in communication between the host computer and the interface board for USB2.0 connection. USB ENVIRON- An error occurred in MENT communication between the host computer and the interface board for USB2.0 connection. USB DATA An error occurred in communication between the host computer and the interface board for USB2.0 connection.
4- 6

Display
(continued)
>
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Cause ERROR Descriptions in the manual ERROR Remedy No. (for reference) ERROR OPERATION Improper operation was Perform correct operations. 1. It is notified that wrong operation is con30 ERROR conducted on the operaducted. tion panel. ERROR DATA REMAIN As received data which Change setting function after executing 1. Explain that any of the operating condiall received data or clearing the data. tions cannot be changed if data that have 34 is not drawn remains, not been drawn remains. setting of Function Feature can not be changed. ERROR MOTOR ALARM The X-motor was over- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check friction of X (Y)-axis motor. 40 X loaded. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor with a new In a case of recurrence, contact your one. local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Check friction of X (Y)-axis motor. ERROR MOTOR ALARM The Y-motor is overTurn the power OFF and turn the 41 Y loaded. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor with a new In a case of recurrence, contact your one. local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the main PCB with a new one. ERROR X OVER CUROvercurrent in the XTurn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check friction of X (Y)-axis motor. 42 RENT motor was detected. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor with a new In a case of recurrence, contact your one. local distributer to call for service. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Check friction of X (Y)-axis motor. ERROR Y OVER CUROvercurrent in the YTurn the power OFF and turn the 43 RENT motor was detected. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor with a new In a case of recurrence, contact your one. local distributer to call for service. Replace the main PCB with a new one. ERROR CAPPING : SEN- An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check that the cap sensor functions prop45 SOR capping control. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. erly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST. (Sensor trouble) In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the cap sensor with a new one. local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the slider PCB with a new one. 1. Make sure that the adjusting value of CAPPING : An error occurred in #ADJUST>CAPPING is set correctly. PARAMETER capping control. (Improper parameter adjusted value) ERROR WIPER An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check that the wiper sensor functions 46 wiper control. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. properly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Check that the wiper motor functions local distributer to call for service. properly with #TEST>MOTOR TEST. 3. Make sure that there is no friction on the guide rail caused by sticking of ink. 4. Replace the wiper sensor with a new one. 5. Replace the stepping motor with a new one. 6. Replace the IO PCB with a new one. 1. Check that the station sensor works propERROR STATION An error occurred in sta- Turn the power OFF and turn the 47 tion control. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. erly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Check that the cap motor works properly local distributer to call for service. with #TEST>MOTOR TEST. 3. Check that up/down operation of the station is smooth. 4. Replace the station sensor with a new one. 5. Replace the stepping motor with a new one. 6. Replace the IO PCB with a new one. ERROR CUTTER SOLE- An error occurred in cut- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check that up/down operation of the cutter 49 NOID ter control. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. is smooth. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service.
4- 7

Display
(continued)
>
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Cause ERROR Descriptions in the manual ERROR Remedy No. (for reference) 1. Make sure that there is no gap between the ERROR MEDIA DETECT Paper could not be If the same error message appears 50 detected. again even after setting the media prop- end faces of platen and platen rubber. The media set position erly, contact your local distributor to 2. Execute #TEST>PAPER SENSOR to call for service. obtain sensor values at the media exist or media itself is not position and media non-exist position. proper. When the difference of values is more than 50, detection is allowed. If the difference is smaller, execute the followings. 3. Clean the paper width sensor or replace with a new one. 4. Replace the slider PCB with a new one. THICKNESS Media thickness could Input the media thickness or select the Make sure that operation of the cutter is DETECT not be detected. END key and execute media detection proper at detection. again. Or, make sure that the scale and the encoder PCB are placed on the right positions. At recurrence after checkings above mentioned, execute the followings. 1. Replace the encoder PCB with a new one. 2. Replace the slider PCB with a new one. * This error may occur when thin media is used. 1. Check that the Y origin sensor works propERROR Y-ORIGIN Y-origin could not be Turn the power OFF and turn the 51 detected. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. erly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the Y origin sensor with a new local distributer to call for service. one. 3. Replace the IO PCB with a new one. ERROR HEAD HEIGHT Head height origin could Make sure that the scale and the encoder PCB 53 ORIGIN not be detected. are placed on the right positions. Check the vertical operation of the head unit with manual operation (smoothness of operation). At recurrence after checkings above mentioned, execute the followings. 1. Replace the encoder PCB with a new one. 2. Replace the slider PCB with a new one. 1. Check that the jam sensor works properly ERROR MEDIA JAM Paper jam was detected. Dissolve media jamming. with #TEST>SENSOR TEST. 54 If the error is still displayed after dissolving, contact your local distributer 2. Check whether the error is detected at to call for service. inversion in Y SERVO TEST. If it is detected, check a spring in the unit. 3. Replace the jam sensor with a new one. 4. Replace the slider PCB with a new one. 5. Replace the HDC PCB in slot 1 with a new one. ERROR POSITION An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the Make sure that the scale and the encoder PCB 58 ENCODER:DIR detection by the posipower ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. are placed on the right positions. tion encoder. In a case of recurrence, contact your At recurrence after checkings above menlocal distributer to call for service. (Wrong orientation) tioned, execute the followings. 1. Replace the encoder PCB with a new one. POSITION An error occurred in 2. Replace the slider PCB with a new one. ENCODER:CNT detection by the position encoder. (Read-out count error)
4- 8

Display
(continued)
>
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Cause ERROR Descriptions in the manual ERROR Remedy No. (for reference) ERROR CUTTER An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the Make sure that the scale and the encoder PCB 59 ENCODER detection by the cutter power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. are placed on the right positions. Check the encoder. In a case of recurrence, contact your vertical operation of the head unit with manlocal distributer to call for service. ual operation. (Wrong orientation) At recurrence after checkings above mentioned, execute the followings. 1. Replace the encoder PCB with a new one. 2. Replace the slider PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the wind-up PCB with a new one. ERROR TAKE-UP VOLT- An abnormal voltage of Turn the power OFF and turn the 64 AGE the take-up motor was power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. detected. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. E70 FPGA FPGA Configuration (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one. fails. ported after the releasing, this error
E71 SD-RAM Abnormal operation in SD-RAM
does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) 1. Make sure that memory PCB is connected 2. Replace the memory PCB with a new one. 3. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Make sure that the ROM file is transmit-
properly.
E74 E75 E76 E77
TRANS DATA I/F NONE I/F INITIAL I/F BOARD
Received data is not Ver- (As the support functions will be supsion Up file ported after the releasing, this error
does not arise on site i n the present.) I/F board is not installed. (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.)
ted.
1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one. 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
new one. new one. new one.
Abnormal operation in I/ (As the support functions will be supF board ported after the releasing, this error An error occurred in the communication between the main PCB and the I/ F board. A time out error occurs in the communication between the host PC and the I/F board. ROM0 Erase error ROM1 Erase error ROM0 Write error ROM1 Write error Verify error Hash check error ROM Erase error
E78
HOST I/F
new one.
E80 E81 E82 E83 E84 E85 E90
ROM0 ERASE ROM1 ERASE h'******** h'******** h'******** ROM HASH h'********
new one.
4- 9

Display ERROR ERROR No. E92 h'********
E95 E98 E99 E111 MODE SHIFT
(continued)
>
Cause
ROM Write error
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Descriptions in the manual Remedy (for reference) (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a ported after the releasing, this error new one.
does not arise on site i n the present.) 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
E114
does not arise on site i n the present.) I/F FORMAT Wrong version up data. (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) VERSION DATA Wrong version up data. (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.) NCU ROM 00 Dot check F-ROM (As the support functions will be supERASE error ported after the releasing, this error (at Version Up) does not arise on site i n the present.) NCU ROM 01 Dot check F-ROM VER- (As the support functions will be supported after the releasing, this error IFY error does not arise on site i n the present.) (at Version Up) NCU ROM 02 Dot check F-ROM (As the support functions will be supWRITE error ported after the releasing, this error (at Version Up) does not arise on site i n the present.) NCU ROM HASH Hash check error (As the support functions will be sup(at Version Up) ported after the releasing, this error does not arise on site i n the present.)
Transition to the version (As the support functions will be supup mode is not allowed. ported after the releasing, this error
new one. ted.
1. Make sure that the ROM file is transmit-
1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
one.
one.
one. one.
ERROR NCU I/F 00 116 NCU I/F 01
An error occurred in communication between the NCU PCB and the control board.
E119
NCU NONE
NCU is not connected (at Version Up)
Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check the parameter upload, Using state power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. and report the result to the development If the error occurs frequently, contact department. your local distributor to call for ser1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new vice. one. (Operation can be resumed after turn- 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. ing off the nozzle missing detection function.) (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Make sure that the connection cables are ported after the releasing, this error connected properly.
does not arise on site i n the present.)
ERROR ENVIRONMENT The ambient temperature 120 TEMP(LO) is outside the permissible temperature range (too low). ERROR ENVIRONMENT The ambient temperature 121 TEMP(HI) is outside the permissible temperature range (too high). An error occurred in ERROR MEDIA 134 ENCODER: SEN- detection by the media encoder. SOR (Counting impossible) MEDIA An error occurred in ENCODER:DIR. detection by the media encoder. (Wrong orientation) An error occurred in MEDIA ENCODER: ORI- detection by the media encoder. GIN (Origin detection impossible)
Adjust the ambient temperature of the Operation under the temperature among the printer. guaranteed operation temperature range is To continue operation without chang- recommended. ing the ambient conditions, press the [ENTER] key.
1. Replace the media encoder with a new Select NORMAL in [MediaFeed one. SETUP] [FEED METHOD] 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. Or turn the power OFF and turn the power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service.
4- 10

Display ERROR No. ERROR 135
(continued)
>
ERROR 142
ERROR 143
ERROR 144
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Cause Descriptions in the manual ERROR Remedy (for reference) MEDIA FEED An error occurred in 1. Check that the media has been set UNUSUAL media feed. properly. 2. Using [SET UP] - [MediaFeed SETUP] - [MOVEMENT TEST], perform testing to see if the media is compatible with direct feed. If the state is not recovered with the procedures above mentioned, execute the followings. Select NORMAL in [SET UP] [MediaFeed SETUP] [FEED METHOD] Turn the power OFF and turn the power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. 1. Make sure that there is no ink leaking both INK LEAK Ink leakage was Turn the power OFF and turn the detected. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. insides of bear and the station. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Check that the INK LEAK sensor works local distributer to call for service. properly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST. 3. Wipe off stains on the ink leak sensor PCB. CARTRIDGE An abnormal voltage of Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the ink unit PCB with a new one. SOLENOID the ink cartridge valve power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. solenoid was detected. In a case of recurrence, contact your 1. Replace the IO PCB with a new one. WASH CART. An abnormal voltage of local distributer to call for service. SOLENOID the cleaning cartridge valve solenoid was detected. CARTRIDGE SET An ink cartrdge is not Set an ink cartridge. It is explained that leaving a state without set! set. ting a cartridge may cause inability of ink sucking because needles of the slot are dehydrated. ERROR COM(This error does not occur on site.) Confirm the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specificaMAND tions, cable length and so on) ERROR PARAM(This error does not occur on site.) Make sure that PRM file, parameter data corETER respond to version of the device. ERROR DATA (This error does not occur on site.) Confirm the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifications, cable length and so on) ERR PRM. (This error does not occur on site.) Make sure that PRM file, parameter data corSHORTAGE respond to version of the device.
4- 11

Display ERROR ERROR No. ERROR NCU DETECT 00 160
NCU DETECT 01
(continued)
>
NCU DETECT 02
NCU DETECT 03
NCU DETECT 04
ERROR NCU 161 EXCHANGE NCU CONSUMPTION
ERROR NCU LINE 162 VOLTAGE
ERROR NCU SENSOR 163 NCU SENSOR DETECT
ERROR NCU FPGA 164 ERROR
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Cause Descriptions in the manual Remedy (for reference) NCU detection error Printing can be resumed after turning There is a nozzle row that can not discharge occurred. off the nozzle missing detection func- ink. Identify the row with the test drawing and conduct cleaning of the row. tion. (Improper parameter value) Turn on the nozzle missing detection function again before starting to print Check the parameter upload, Using state and NCU detection error the next and subsequent print files. occurred. report the result to the development departIf the error occurs frequently, contact ment. (Improper parameter your local distributor to call for servalue) vice. 1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new NCU detection error Turn the power OFF and turn the occurred. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. one. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one. (FPGA error) local distributer to call for service. NCU detection error Printing can be resumed after turning 1. Make sure that the Flushing fan works occurred. off the nozzle missing detection funcproperly. tion. (Reference position 2. Replace the flushing box with a new one. judgment) Turn on the nozzle missing detection function again before starting to print Dust adhered around the head may cause the NCU detection error the next and subsequent print files. occurred. NCU detection error. In such a case, instruct If the error occurs frequently, contact the operator to clean around the head fre(Reference position your local distributor to call for serquently. judgment) vice. LD consumption curProlonged use is allowed. 1. Replace the nozzle detection sensor with a rent is close to the If the error occurs frequently, contact new one. threshold value. your local distributer to call for service. LD consumption current Turn the power OFF and turn the is not below the thresh- power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. old value. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. * Operation can be resumed after turning off the nozzle missing detection function. Power supply voltage Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the nozzle detection sensor with a error. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. new one. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new local distributer to call for service. one. * Operation can be resumed after turning off the nozzle missing detection function. Sensor detection level Prolonged use is allowed. 1. Clean a lens cover of the nozzle detection dropped. If the error occurs frequently, contact sensor. your local distributer to call for service. 2. Replace the nozzle detection sensor with a new one. Sensor detection error. Turn the power OFF and turn the 3. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new one. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. * Operation can be resumed after turning off the nozzle missing detection function. 1. Replace the nozzle sensor with a new one. FPGA configuration Turn the power OFF and turn the failure. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new In a case of recurrence, contact your one. local distributer to call for service. * Operation can be resumed after turning off the nozzle missing detection function.
4- 12

Display
(continued)
>
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Cause ERROR Descriptions in the manual ERROR Remedy No. (for reference) ERROR HEAD MEMORY An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check the head memory cable, head relay 200 (----) head unit memory. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. PCB. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the head memory with a new one. local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the slider PCB with a new one. 4. Replace the HDC PCB in slot 1 with anew one. 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one. ERROR BACKUP MEM- An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the 201 ORY backup memory. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. In a case of recurrence, contact your local distributer to call for service. ERROR DEVICE CONThe system configura- Contact your local distributor to call 1. Identify a place where the error occurs 202 STRUCTION tion is not supported by for service. with [RESULTof DIAGNOSIS]. the model judgment at system start. * Press the [ENTER] key to display the details of the error. * Press the [ENTER] key again to enable the system to be started after changing the configuration to a supported one. 1. Make sure that 2 memory PCB are placed. Turn the power OFF and turn the ERROR SDRAM SIZE SD-RAM with a size power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the memory PCB with a new one. 203 large enough for the In a case of recurrence, contact your printer has not been 3. Replace the main PCB with a new one. local distributer to call for service. mounted.
* When there is available SD-RAM mounted, the printer can be started without expanding SD-RAM. However, printing speed may drop depending on the resolution. A short circuit of the Turn the power OFF and turn the Short-circuit of one of the following cable. interlock cable was power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. Replace the corresponding cable with a new detected. In a case of recurrence, contact your one. local distributer to call for service. Front cover sensor R cable (Keyboard) Maintenance cover sensor cable (Keyboard) Cover sensor L cable (Ink unit PCB) 1. Replace the IO PCB with a new one. An abnormal tempera- Turn the power OFF and turn the ture of the media heater power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the corresponding SSR with a is detected. In a case of recurrence, contact your new one. An abnormal tempera- local distributer to call for service. 1. Replace the slider PCB with a new one. ture of the head heater 2. Replace the corresponding head heater was detected. with a new one. The head heater is disconnected. Trouble has occurred with the thermistor of the head heater. 1. Check the state with sensor test. An error in the sensor Turn the power OFF and turn the power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Make sure that the direction of waste ink for the waste ink tank In a case of recurrence, contact your was detected. tank is correct, local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the sensor with a new one. 4. Replace the IO PCB with a new one.
ERROR INTERLOCK 210 SENSOR
ERROR HeaterTEMP 211 (--/--/--) HeadWARM. TEMP. (----) HeadWARM. BREAK(----) HeadWARM. THERM(----) ERROR WASTE INKtank 212 SENSOR
4- 13

Display
(continued)
>
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Cause ERROR Descriptions in the manual ERROR Remedy No. (for reference) ERROR Y COORDIAn error was detected Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Make sure that the position of media is 250 NATES during scanning opera- power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. correct. tion. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. make sure that there is no bend on the local distributer to call for service. Paper width sensor. 3. When the state is not recovered, check parameter upload and using state, and report the result to the development department. 1. Confirm the error with memory check ERROR SYSTEM ERROR A system error occurred. Turn the power OFF and turn the 251 power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. (Main.SRAM, Main.FROM). In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. When the state is not recovered, check local distributer to call for service. parameter upload and using state, and report the result to the development department.
4- 14
4-2-2. Warning messages and corrective measures

<Warning messages and corrective measures >
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Display Cause Descriptions in the manual Remedy (for reference) An open cover was detected. Check the front cover and maintenance 1. Make sure that the cover sensor works properly with #TEST>SENSOR covers. TEST cover sensor. If the same error message appears again even after closing all the covers, 2. Make sure that the toggle pushes the contact your local distributor to call for lever of the cover sensor firmly. Close a cover. service. 3. Make sure that the cables are connected properly. 4. Replace the cover sensor with a new one. No media was detected. Set media. 1. Check that the paper sensor R works properly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST. 2. Make sure that connection of the ** NO MEDIA ** cables is correct. 3. Replace the paper sensor R with a new one. !EXCHANGE BAT- The battery of RTC has run Contact your local distributor to call 1. Replace the battery with a new one TERY down. for service. having the same model number. Time to replace the wiper in Replace the wiper with a new one. 1. Make sure that wiper replacement is the capping station with a new conducted with MAINTE* Execute [ST.MAINTENANCE] L.1> [JV5-01] one has come. NANCE>ST.MAINTENANCE. [WIPER EXCHANGE]. !Replace a WIPER (The wiping count has reached the specified value.) The nozzle recovery cannot be Perform test printing. If nozzle missing L.1> [JV5-01] expected because the printer is serious, execute [ST.MAINTENANCE] - [NOZZLE WASH] for has been left standing for a !Do TEST DRAW maintenance. prolonged period of time. The power to the heaters is off. Turn on the power to the heaters. 1. Check that the heaters work properly with #TEST>HEATER TEST. If the same error message appears Heater Power OFF again even after turning on the power to the heaters, contact your local distributor to call for service. A heater is disconnected. Contact your local distributor to call 1. Check that the heaters work properly with #TEST>HEATER TEST. (This example shows that pre- for service. PRE PRT AFT heater is disconnected.) 2. Make sure that fuse of heater PCB is not blown out. BREAK **C **C 3. Replace the SSR or IO PCB with a new one. The thermistor of a heater is Contact your local distributor to call 1. Check that the heaters work properly defective. for service. with #TEST>HEATER TEST. PRE PRT AFT (This example shows that the 2. Make sure that connection of cables is THERM **C **C thermistor of pre-heater is correct. defective.) 3. Replace the IO PCB with a new one. L.*> !NC [JV5-01] There is a problem with the On the NCU>COND.INDICATION NCU. display, check the current error in the R.*> !NC [JV5-01] NCU. The heads are positioned too *Media can't be CUT* high to permit media cutting. Cut the media by manual operation.
4- 15

<Warning messages and corrective measures
Display Cause
(continued)
>
L.*> [JV5-01] Ink for one supply path has NEAR END MCYK---- been nearly used up. R.*> [JV5-01] NEAR END MCYK---L.*> [JV5-01] Ink for one supply path has INK END ----KYCM been completely used up. R.*> [JV5-01] INK END ----KYCM L.*> !CAR [JV5-01] There is a problem with installed ink cartridges. (If this occurs together with R.*> !CAR [JV5-01] any other warning, the display shows [L.*> !CAR/TNK/ WSH/NC instead of [JV5-**].) L.*> !TNK [JV5-01] There is a problem with the waste ink tank. (If this occurs together with R.*> !TNK [JV5-01] any other warning, the display shows [L.*> !CAR/TNK/ WSH/NC instead of [JV5-**].) L.*> !WSH [JV5-01] There is a problem with the installed cleaning solution cartridge. (If this occurs together with R.*> !WSH [JV5-01] any other warning, the display shows [L.*> !CAR/TNK/ WSH/NC instead of [JV5-**].) The ink of the ink cartridge has been nearly used up. INK NEAR END MMCC ---- ---- ----
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Descriptions in the manual Remedy (for reference) Replace the cartridge for the supply path corresponding to the indicated color. * Printing is permitted without replacing the cartridge (until INK END is displayed). However, the printer returns to local mode every completion of printing one file. Replace the cartridge for the supply path corresponding to the indicated color.
Check the content of the warning by displaying it using the guidance function.
Check that the waste ink tank has been installed and it is not full.
Check that the cleaning solution cartridge has been set properly.
Replace the cartridge generating the warning with a new one.
INK END ---- YYKK ---- ----
The ink of the ink cartridge has Replace the cartridge generating the been completely used up. warning with a new one.
NON-ORIGINAL INK ---- ---- KKYY ----
The ink cartridge is not MIMAKI genuin. Or, the ink IC chip can not be read.
Replace the warned cartridge with a MIMAKI genuine one, or insert the cartridge again.
If the error occurs frequently after replacing cartridges or when the cartridge has sufficient ink, execute the followings. 1. Check that the cartridge end sensor works properly with #TEST>INK CARTRIDGE. 2. Check the end board of the cartridge. 3. .Replace the sensor with a new one. If the error occurs frequently after replacing cartridges or when the cartridge has sufficient ink, execute the followings. 1. Check the end board of the cartridge. 2. Replace the sensor with a new one. If the error occurs frequently after replacing cartridges or when the cartridge has sufficient ink, execute the followings. 1. Make sure that #TEST>INK CARTRIDGE>INK-IC CHECK is performed properly. 2. Replace the ID point of contact PCB with a new one.
4- 16

(continued)
>
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Display Cause Descriptions in the manual Remedy (for reference) The IC chip of the ink cartridge Remove the cartridge generating the If the error occurs frequently after cannot be read normally. warning once and install it again. replacing cartridges or when the cartridge has sufficient ink, execute the folIf the same warning message still appears, contact your local distributor lowings. WRONG INK IC to call for service. 1. Make sure that #TEST>INK CAR---- ---- ---- CCMM TRIDGE>INK-IC CHECK is performed properly. 2. Replace the ID point of contact PCB with a new one. The ink of the ink cartridge is Check the ink type of the cartridge Kind of INK different in type from the ink generating the warning. ---- ---- ---- ---currently supplied. The ink of the ink cartridge is Check the ink color of the cartridge Color of INK different in color from the ink generating the warning. ---- ---- ---- ---currently supplied. WRONG CARTRIDGE There is trouble with an Check the cartridge generating the installed ink cartridge. warning. ---- ---- ---- ---An ink cartridge has not been Install an appropriate cartridge in the If the error occurs frequently after installed in the slot. slot generating the warning. replacing cartridges, execute the followings. NO CARTRIDGE 1. Check that the cartridge exist/non---- ---- ---- ---exist sensor works properly with #TEST>INK CARTRIDGE. 2. If it does not work properly, replace the sensor or IO PCB with a new one. The specified expiration date Replace the cartridge generating the of an ink cartridge has passed. warning with a new one. Expiration * The cartridge may be used until one ---- ---- ---- ---month passes after the specified expiration date. The expiration date of an ink The red LED blinks. cartridge has passed (one Replace the cartridge generating the Expiration:1MONTH month has passed after the warning with a new one. specified expiration date). ---- ---- ---- ---* The cartridge may be used until two months pass after the specified expiration date. The expiration date of an ink Replace the cartridge generating the Expiration:2MONTH cartridge has passed (two warning with a new one. months have passed after the ---- ---- ---- ---specified expiration date). INK REMAIN ZERO Remaining amount of ink in an Replace the cartridge generating the ink cartridge is zero. warning with a new one. ---- ---- ---- ---The waste ink tank is full or Install a waste ink tank or replace with 1. Make sure that the waste ink tank is has not been installed. a new one. installed properly. 2. Check that the waste ink tank sensor !WasteTANK works properly with #TEST>SENFULL/NONE SOR TEST. 3. If it does not work properly, replace the sensor or IO PCB with a new one. The waste ink tank is nearly Replace the waste ink tank with a new 1. Make sure that the waste ink tank is full. one. installed properly. 2. Check that the waste ink tank sensor !NearFULL WASTE works properly with #TEST>SENTANK SOR TEST. If it does not work properly, replace the sensor or IO PCB with a new one.
4- 17

(continued)
>
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual) Display Cause Descriptions in the manual Remedy (for reference) The cleaning liquid cartridge is Replace the cleaning solution cartridge 1. Check that the cartridge end sensor empty. with a new one. works properly with #TEST>WASH CARTRIDGE. !Wash Liquid END 2. If it does not work properly, replace the sensor or IO PCB with a new one. The cleaning liquid cartridge Install the cleaning solution cartridge. 1. Check that the cartridge exist/nonhas not been installed. exist sensor works properly with #TEST>WASH CARTRIDGE. !WashLiquidCart.NONE 2. If it does not work properly, replace the sensor or IO PCB with a new one. There is trouble with cleaning Check the cleaning solution cartridge. !WRONG WASH CART. liquid cartridge. Cleaning solution has not been Supply the cleaning solution. ** Washing liquid ** supplied. Execute [MAINTENANCE] ** un-filling up. ** [HD.MAINTENANCE] - [FILL UP INK].
4- 18
CHAPTER 5 Explanation of Electrical Parts
Contents
5-1. Outline ......................................................................... 5-2

5-1-1. Operation Explanation ............................................. 5-3 5-1-2. Power Supply ........................................................... 5-4
5-2. Circuit Board Specifications ...................................... 5-5

5-2-1. 5-2-2. 5-2-3. 5-2-4. 5-2-5. 5-2-6. 5-2-7. 5-2-8. 5-2-9. 5-2-10. 5-2-11. 5-2-12. 5-2-13. 5-2-14. 5-2-15. 5-2-16. 5-2-17. 5-2-18. 5-2-19. 5-2-20.
Main PCB ................................................................ 5-5 USB Board ............................................................... 5-6 I/F Connection Board .............................................. 5-6 HDC PCB ................................................................ 5-7 IO PCB ..................................................................... 5-7 Ink Unit PCB ........................................................... 5-8 Slider PCB ............................................................... 5-9 Heater PCB ............................................................ 5-10 Keyboard PCB ....................................................... 5-10 Dot Detection PCB ................................................ 5-11 Encoder PCB ......................................................... 5-11 Paper Width Sensor PCB ....................................... 5-11 Take-up PCB .......................................................... 5-11 Box Relay PCB ...................................................... 5-12 Side relay PCB ....................................................... 5-12 Head relay PCB ..................................................... 5-13 Head memory PCB ................................................ 5-13 LED PCB ............................................................... 5-13 Ink Leak Sensor PCB ............................................. 5-13 Memory PCB ......................................................... 5-13
5-3. Electronic block diagram ......................................... 5-14
5- 1
JV5-130S/160S
5-1.
Outline
JV5-130S/160S is provided with the circuit boards shown below.

Part 5-2-1. Main PCB 5-2-2. USB Board 5-2-3. I/F Connection Board 5-2-4. HDC PCB 5-2-5. IO PCB 5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB 5-2-7. Slider PCB 5-2-8. Heater PCB 5-2-9. Keyboard PCB 5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB ~ Left ~
Ink Leak Sensor PCB Ink Unit PCB
Reference page
p. 5 - 5 p. 5 - 6 p. 5 - 6 p. 5 - 7 p. 5 - 7 p. 5 - 8 p. 5 - 9 p. 5 - 10 p. 5 - 10 p. 5 - 11
5-2-11. Encoder PCB 5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB 5-2-13. Take-up PCB 5-2-14. Box Relay PCB 5-2-15. Side relay PCB 5-2-16. Head relay PCB 5-2-17. Head memory PCB 5-2-18. LED PCB 5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB 5-2-20. Memory PCB
Part
Reference page
p. 5 - 11 p. 5 - 11 p. 5 - 11 p. 5 - 12 p. 5 - 12 p. 5 - 13 p. 5 - 13 p. 5 - 13 p. 5 - 13 p. 5 - 13
~ Head Assy ~
Encoder PCB
Slider PCB
Encoder PCB
Head memory PCB (x4) ID point of contackt PCB (x16) LED PCB (x2)
Encoder PCB
Head relay PCB (x4)

Paper Width Sensor PCB
Ink Leak Sensor PCB
Keyboard PCB Heater PCB
Ink Leak Sensor PCB
HDC PCB (x4)
ID point of contackt PCB (Wash Cartridge)

Side relay PCB
Drying fan fork PCB (x2) Power Supply PCB
Dot Detection PCB
Box Relay PCB Take-up PCB
Memory PCB (x2)

I/F Connection Board Main PCB
IO PCB
USB Board
Fig.5-1
5- 2
Outline
5-1-1.
Operation Explanation
The slider of JV5-130S/160S consists of four heads arranged staggered from each other, each of which has nozzles arranged in eight rows, 180 nozzles (at 180-dpi intervals) per row. Ink is ejected from the ink chamber by vibrating the piezoelectric elements of the heads. For this vibration waveform, the printer uses variable waveform which can permit 4-step expressions (L, M, S and none). The heads are driven by the HDC PCB that are provided for the heads, respectively. The four HDC PCB are connected to the main PCB in the electrical circuit box. One HDC PCB, which drives one head, generates the drive signal (COM waveform) that is applied in common to all the piezoelectric elements of one row of nozzles. The drive signal is generated for the eight rows of nozzles. FPGA (HDC) is mounted on each HDC PCB. Each FPGA (HDC) applies the COM waveform in synchronization with the scale interval of the linear scale and simultaneously sends the nozzle data to the head. By adjusting the time for applying the COM waveform for each head, the print position in the Y direction can be adjusted within the range of one dot. In addition, ink discharging performance is different from head to head. Therefore, the COM waveform is automatically corrected based on the registered head ID or the ID registered on the head memory, other information and the detected ambient temperature. (There may be a case where no ink is ejected if the head ID is not registered correctly.) The main PCB has FPGA (PDC), which takes charge of image processing and controls the SDRAM picture memory (PRAM). The PRAM is mounted on the memory PCB. One memory PCB has a capacity of 512 MB and the printer permits mounting of a maximum of four memory PCB (2 GB). Of the data output from the host PC, the command part is analyzed by the CPU and the image part is transferred to the memory. The PRAM is a ring memory and when data for one scanning session has been accumulated, the heads start scanning. One scanning session forms an image only in 180 dpi (eight or six colors) or in 360 dpi four colors) in the X direction. Therefore, the printer completes the image in the targeted resolution while feeding the media by a required distance. JV5 has many devices (stepping motors and sensors) that require communication with the main PCB. However, the routing of the wires and the replacement of the main PCB would be difficult if such devices are all connected to the main PCB directly. To avoid such difficulty, the printer is equipped with the IO PCB and ink unit PCB, which use serial communication with the main PCB, thus reducing the number of signals. The signals are processed by the FPGA (PDC) mounted on the main PCB. The missing nozzle detection unit (NCU) consists of the unit that emits a laser beam and detects an ink drop and the dot detection PCB, which analyzes the data. By emitting a laser beam at an angle and at fixed intervals, missing nozzles can be detected during printing.
Nozzle Arrangement of Head (Rear View)
HEAD
Paper feeding direction
Scanning direction
Fig.5-2
5- 3
JV5-130S/160S
5-1-2.
Power Supply
Board name: Power supply PCB assembly (E300428) The input value and output values of power supply are as follows:
Input AC100V - AC240V, 50/60Hz Output +3.3V, 5.6 A +5V, 15.5 A +24V, 10.0 A +42V, 10.5 A +5VSB, 3.5 A
Note: Take care that the input specification for JV-5 is AC200V-AC240V thoug the input specification for the power PCB is AC100V-AC240V.
<Connector pin assignment table and volume numbers> PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Voltage +42V +42V +24V +24V GND GND GND GND GND GND +5V +3.3V PIN 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Voltage +42V +42V +24V GND GND GND GND GND GND +5V +5V +3.3V
<Volume No.> Voltage +42V +24V +5V +3.3V Volume No. VR4 VR1 VR2 VR3
Note: Adjust to be 5% of power voltage.
<Auxiliary power connector> PIN Voltage 1 +5VSB 2 GND 3 Remote control input
5- 4
Circuit Board Specifications
5-2.
5-2-1.
Main PCB
Board name: Main PCB assembly (E104082) The CPU is SH-3 (RISC, 200MHz) made by Hitachi. A program for the CPU is written in flash memory. Version up of this program is easily executed on site through I/F. The CPU downloads the version up to PRAM to execute writing in the flash memory. When receive data is read, The CPU write the data in picture memory. After execution of required processes, the data is transmitted to the HDC PCB with 8 bit width. Receiving the data, the HDC creates driving COM signals for head 1 ~ 4 and nozzle data, and transmits each data to the slider PCB via HDC FPC cable. X, Y-axis motor driving circuit and other IO circuits are also included.
<Block diagram around main PCB>
Fig.5-3
5- 5
JV5-130S/160S
Main PCB Connector Signals

<Main PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 6 X-axis motor encoder CN2 5 Y-axis motor encoder CN3 3 X-axis motor CN4 2 Y-axis motor CN5 32 Keyboard PCB CN6 20 Dot detection PCB CN7 10 Option heater CN8 28 Ink unit PCB CN9 6 Media rotary encoder CN10 4 F/W debug CN11 64 HDC PCB 1 CN12 64 HDC PCB 2 CN13 64 HDC PCB 3 CN14 64 HDC PCB 4 CN15 72 SDRAM memory 1 CN16 72 SDRAM memory 2 CN17 72 SDRAM memory 3 CN18 72 SDRAM memory 4 CN19 80 USB/1394I/F CN20 24 Main power source CN21 3 Main power source CN22 4 IO PCB CN23 38 IO PCB CN24 10 Auxiliary CN25 100 Debug board CN26 8 G/A debug * As for arrangement of each pin, see the tables below.
Pin
Connected to:
X-ENC Y-ENC X-MOT Y-MOT KEY DOT HEATER INKUNIT M-ENC F/W HDC1 HDC2 HDC3 HDC4 SDRAM1 SDRAM2 SDRAM3 SDRAM4 POWER SUB-POW IO-POW IO SUB G/A
Silk display
Color: Black
Notice
Color: Black
Not used
Not used Not used Main power Sub-power IO power IO signal Not used Not used Not used
5-2-2. USB Board

Board name: USB PCB assembly (E103711) USB PCB or 1394 board can be connected. Each of them has a CPU on I/F board and program is written in flash memory of the CPU. Therefore, version up of the I/F-CPU is conducted with download from the host computer. This board supports the duplex.
5-2-3. I/F Connection Board

Board name: I/F connection board assembly (E103701) The main PCB and I/F board are connected together.
5- 6
5-2-4. HDC PCB

Board name: HDC PCB protection panel assembly (E104537) A board to generate driving signals for head. One HDC can drive 1 head. In order to remove heat generated at creating COM wave form, a cooling fan is used. Installed to be vertical to the main PCB.
HDC PCB connector signals

<HDC PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6 CN7
Pin
40 40 40 40 64 2 2
Slider PCB Slider PCB Slider PCB Slider PCB Main PCB Thermistor 1 Thermistor 2
Connect to:
Silk display
Notice
Not used Not used
5-2-5. IO PCB
Board name: I/O PCB assembly (E104085) Controlling I/O of sensors, stepping motors and fans.
IO PCB Connector Signals

< IO PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10 CN12 CN13 CN14 CN15 CN16 CN17 CN18
Pin
38 6 4 30 2 2 3 28 3 3 18 26 12 16 6 2 2
Main PCB For CPLD Main PCB Harness (Take-up, unreel) AUX. AD1 AUX. AD2 Paper sensor F Harness (Station) Cross paper sensor AUX. Input 1 Side relay PCB Box relay PCB Harness (SSR, HDC cooling fan) Box relay PCB AUX. SSR AUX. AD3 AUX. AD4
Connected to:
MAIN BOARD POW WIND/FEED F-PAPER Harness1 A-PAPER
Silk display
Notice
Not used Not used Not used Not used Station harness Color: Blue Not used Color: Yellow Color: Red Color: Blue Color: Black Not used Not used Not used
SideRelay Board BoxRelayBoard 1 Harness 2 BoxRelayBoard 2
Note: As for arrangement of each pin, see the tables below.
5- 7
JV5-130S/160S
5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB

Board name: Ink unit PCB assembly (E104086) Arranged rear face of the ink cartridge. Solenoid, ID, near end sensor, existence sensor and LED PCB and cover sensor of 16 ink cartridges are connected. The main PCB is connected to with a cable.
Ink Unit PCB Connector Signals

<Ink unit PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10 CN11 CN12 CN13 CN14 CN15 CN16 CN17 CN18 CN19 CN20 CN21 CN22 CN23 CN24 CN25 CN26 CN27 CN28 CN29 CN30 CN31 CN32 CN33 CN34 CN35 CN36 CN37 CN38 CN39 CN40 CN41 CN42 CN43
Pin
6 28 6 7 8 8 8 8 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
LED PCB Main PCB CPLD Cover sensor LED1~4 LED5~8 LED9~12 LED13~16 Ink cartridge 1 Ink cartridge 2 Ink cartridge 3 Ink cartridge 4 Ink cartridge 5 Ink cartridge 6 Ink cartridge 7 Ink cartridge 8 Ink cartridge 9 Ink cartridge 10 Ink cartridge 11 Ink cartridge 12 Ink cartridge 13 Ink cartridge 14 Ink cartridge 15 Ink cartridge 16 AUX. AUX. Ink solenoid 1 Ink solenoid 2 Ink solenoid 3 Ink solenoid 4 Ink solenoid 5 Ink solenoid 6 Ink solenoid 7 Ink solenoid 8 Ink solenoid 9 Ink solenoid 10 Ink solenoid 11 Ink solenoid 12 Ink solenoid 13 Ink solenoid 14 Ink solenoid 15 Ink solenoid 16
Connected to:
LED BOARD MAIN BOARD COVER (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) IN1 IN2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
Silk display
Notice
Not used
Not used Not used
5- 8
5-2-7. Slider PCB

Board name: Slider PCB assembly (E104591) Arranged in the head cover. FFC from HDC is connected to relay signals to head. I/O and encoder PCB of each paper width sensor, cutter solenoid are also connected.
Slider PCB Connector Signals

<Slider PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10 CN11 CN12 CN13 CN14 CN15 CN16 CN17 CN18 CN19 CN20 CN21 CN22 CN23 CN24 CN25 CN26 CN27 CN28 CN29 CN30 CN31 CN32 CN33 CN34
Pin
3 3 3 4 4 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 80 80 80 80 5 5 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Cap height sensor Jam sensor 1 Jam sensor 2 Paper width sensor Registry guide sensor HDC PCB 1 (CN1) HDC PCB 1 (CN2) HDC PCB 1 (CN4) HDC PCB 3 (CN1) HDC PCB 3 (CN2) HDC PCB 3 (CN4) HDC PCB 2 (CN1) HDC PCB 2 (CN2) HDC PCB 2 (CN4) HDC PCB 4 (CN1) HDC PCB 4 (CN2) HDC PCB 4 (CN4) Head relay PCB Head relay PCB Head relay PCB Head relay PCB Linear encoder Cutter solenoid Position encoder AUX. 1 Cutter solenoid Blow off fan 2 AUX. 2 AUX. 3 Blow off fan 1 LED AUX. 4 Driller solenoid AUX. 5
Connected to:
Cap HIGH JAM1 JAM2 PAPER E.G TOMBO
Silk display
Color: Red Color: Blue Color: Yellow (Not used) Color: Black Color: White (Not used)
Notice
HEAD1 HEAD3 HEAD2 HEAD4 L-ENC CUT-ENC POS-ENC SUB1 P-CUTTER FAN2 SUB2 SUB3 FAN1 LED SUB4
Color: Red Color: Yellow Color: Blue Color: White (Not used) Color: Green Color: Orange (Not used) Color: White (Not used) Color: White (Not used) Color: Orange (Not used) Color: Red (Not used) Color: White (Not used) Color: Gray (Not used) Color: White (Not Used)
5- 9
JV5-130S/160S
5-2-8. Heater PCB

Board name: Heater PCB assembly (E104043) Arranged in the electric equipments. Power from AC power source is relayed to each heater.
Heater PCB Connector Signals

<Heater PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10 CN11 CN12 CN13 CN14 CN15 CN16 CN17 CN18 CN19 CN20 CN21 CN22
Pin
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Power plug (Inlet) Power supply PCB SSR (Print) SSR (Pre) SSR (After) Thermostat (Print) Thermostat (Pre) Thermostat (After) Wire heater -1 Wire heater -2 Wire heater -3 Wire heater -4 Wire heater -5 Wire heater -6 Pre aluminum foil heater R1-1 Pre aluminum foil heater R1-2 Pre aluminum foil heater R2-1 Pre aluminum foil heater R2-2 After aluminum foil heater A1-1 After aluminum foil heater A1-2 After aluminum foil heater A2-1 After aluminum foil heater A2-2
Connected to:
POW BOARD SSR-P SSR-R SSR-A TMS-P TMS-R TMS-A (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4)
Silk display
Notice
Not used Color: Blue Color: Red Color: Yellow Color: Blue Color: Red Color: Yellow Color: Blue Color: Blue Color: Blue Color: Blue Color: Blue (Not used) Color: Blue (Not used) Color: Red Color: Red Color: Red (Not used) Color: Red (Not used) Color: Yellow Color: Yellow Color: Yellow Color: Yellow
5-2-9. Keyboard PCB

Board name: Keyboard PCB assembly (E104089) Comprising 2 of 20 characters x 2 lines LCD and key switches for each, connected to the main PCB with a keyboard cable.
Keyboard PCB Connector Signals

<Keyboard PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6
Pin
32 3 4 3
Main PCB Front cover sensor R Remote switch Maintenance cover sensor
Connected to:
Silk display
Notice
Color: Black
5- 10
5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB

Board name: Dot detection PCB assembly (E104091) Arranged on back side of the keyboard cover. Connected to the nozzle check unit (NCU) to detect nozzle missing and communicates with the main PCB in serial.
Dot detection PCB Connector Signals

<Dot detection PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
Pin
100 9 8 20
Debug board NCU AUX. power source Main PCB
Connected to:
Silk display
to NCU to MAIN
Not used Not used
Notice
5-2-11. Encoder PCB

Board name: Encoder PCB assembly (E103961) There are total 3 boards, namely a board for linear scale placed behind the slider, a board for head up/ down placed in the left side of the slider, and a board for paper thickness detection placed near the cutter solenoid.
5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB

Board name: Paper width sensor PCB assembly (E103960) Placed near the cutter solenoid, and including a sensor for paper width detection.
5-2-13. Take-up PCB

Board name: Take-up PCB assembly (E104087) Placed in the take-up device. M motor and Take-up switch are connected. Serial communication is conducted with the IO PCB to control.
Take-up PCB Connector Signals

<Take-up PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10
Pin
6 16 3 3 4 6 2 5 9 3
For CPLD IO PCB
Connected to:
Silk display
Take-up switch M motor
IO SEN1 SEN2 STEP M-SW L-ENC MOT
Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
Notice
5- 11
JV5-130S/160S
5-2-14. Box Relay PCB

Board name: Box relay PCB assembly (E104351) Relaying the connection between pump motor, FAN etc. and the IO PCB. Placed in the electric equipment box in the front.
Box relay PCB Connector Signals

<Box relay PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10
Pin
26 16 9 8 4 8 2 14 7 6
IO PCB IO PCB Pump 1, 2 Pump 3, 4 Drying fan Exhaust fan Flushing box fan Adsorption fan, Thermistor Wiper sensor, Solenoid Waste tank sensor
Connected to:
to IO to IO PUMP 1,2 PUMP 3,4 EXH-F2 EXH-F3 FB-FAN FAN WIPE TANK
Silk display
Notice
Color: Black
5-2-15. Side relay PCB

Board name: Side relay PCB assembly (E104352) Relaying connection between the solenoid, sensors etc. and the IO PCB. Placed on the right side face viewing from the front.
Side Relay PCB Connector Signals

<Side relay PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10 CN11
Pin
18 2 4 3 2 2 4 2 3 3 3
IO PCB Cap valve solenoid Head up/down motor Y origin sensor ID point of contact PCB Cartridge solenoid Detection machine assembly I/C, Y Motor cooling fan Ink leak sensor 1 Ink leak sensor 2 Ink leak sensor 3
Connected to:
to IO CAP-SOL HEAD-M Y-HOME WASH-ID WASH-SOL WASH-CAT M-FAN ST-LEAK Y-LEAK1 Y-LEAK2
Silk display
Notice
Color: Black
Not used
5- 12
5-2-16. Head relay PCB

Board name: Head relay PCB assembly (E104237) Relaying connection between the slider PCB and the head FPC.
Head Relay PCB Connector Signals

<Head relay PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN4 CN3 CN5 CN6 CN7
Pin
35 31 80 11 2 2 3
Head FFC Head FFC Slider PCB Head memory PCB Head memory PCB Head memory PCB Head memory PCB
Connected to:
Silk display
Notice
Not used Not used Not used
5-2-17. Head memory PCB

Board name: Head memory PCB assembly (E104428) Head ID information is stored. Assembled to be integrated into the head.
Head memory PCB connector signals

<Head memory PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
Pin
3 11 2 2
Head warm thermistor Head relay PCB Head warm heater Head warm heater
Connected to:
Silk display
Notice
5-2-18. LED PCB

Board name: LED PCB assembly (E104088) A control LED (green) and an error LED (Red) are equipped on each slot, and 2 LED PCBs are used.
LED PCB Connector Signals

<LED PCB connector signals>
CN No
CN1 CN2
Pin
6 Ink unit PCB 6 LED PCB
Connected to:
ENTER EXIT
Silk display
Notice
5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB

Board name: Ink leak sensor PCB assembly (E104534) Three of the board are used, namely, on both sides in the cable bear guide and on the cap in the station.
5-2-20. Memory PCB

Board name: Memory PCB assembly (E104090) 1 board has the capacity of 512 MB, and 2 boards are mounted on the main PCB.
5- 13
JV5-130S/160S
5-3. Electronic block diagram

CN6 CN7 *After the number of lots, it absorbs it to the slider PCB. CN8 CN9 CN10 Cutter Encoder PCB Position Encoder PCB Bottom Point Sensor Paper Width Sensor Cutter actuator assy. JAM Sensor N.C CN25 CN32 CN34 CN22 RED CN23 YELLOW CN24 BLUE CN1 RED CN4 BLACK CN26 GREEN CN11 CN12 CN13 CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
HDC PCB 1 HDC PCB 3 HDC PCB 2 HDC PCB 4
CN11
5V PCB
CN13
Linear Encoder PCB
CN12
CN2 CN3 BLUE YELLOW CN14 CN15 CN16
Slider PCB
CN18 CN27 N.C CN30 N.C CN19 CN20 CN21
CN14
Head Rekay PCB

CN1CN2 CN3 CN2 Head Memory PCB Head Heater x2 Thermistor
Head Rekay PCB

Head Rekay PCB

Head Rekay PCB CN17

16 x 40- Conductor HDC FPCs
Media Rotary Encoder
CN9
INK HEAD 1
INK HEAD 3
CN10: INK1 CN11: INK2 CN12: INK3 CN13: INK4 CN14: INK5 CN15: INK6 CN16: INK7 CN17: INK8 CN28: SOL1 CN29: SOL2 CN30: SOL3 CN31: SOL4 CN32: SOL5 CN33: SOL6 CN34: SOL7 CN35: SOL8 CN18: INK9 CN19: INK10 CN20: INK11 CN21: INK12 CN22: INK13 CN23: INK14 CN24: INK15 CN25: INK16
INK HEAD 2
INK HEAD 4
Keyboard PCB
CN5 CN4 CN6 BLACK CN3 IF Connection PCB CN5
INK Cartridge (x16)

Presence /Near End Sensor x16
Remote switch Front Cover Sensor R Maintenance Cover Sensor R
Solenoid Valve x 16 INK Cartridge Solenoid ID Point of Contact PCB x4
CN36: SOL9 CN37: SOL10 CN38: SOL11 CN39: SOL12 CN40: SOL13 CN41: SOL14 CN42: SOL15 CN43: SOL16
USB2.0
USB PCB
Front Cover Sensor L Maintenance Cover Sensor L
CN19
CN6: ID1
CN4 BLACK
ID Point of Contact PCB x4
INK Unit PCB

CN7: ID2 CN26 N.C
Y-axis Motor
WHITE CN2 WHITE BLACK BLACK
X-axis Motor
CN4 CN1 BLACK CN3 BLACK CN8
ID Point of Contact PCB x4
CN8: ID3
CN2 ID Point of Contact PCB x4 CN9: ID4 CN3 (For CPLD)
Power Supply PCB

DC3.3V DC 5V DC24V DC42V DC5VB
CN1 CN4 CN5 CN20 CN21
LED PCB
CN2 CN1
LED PCB
CN2 CN1
CN1
After Heater
Power Supply Switch SSR (Rear) SSR (Print) Power Supply Socket SSR (After) RY1 1 2 6 3 5 4
Heater PCB
CN4 RED CN3 BLUE CN5 BLACK CN1 CN7
RED RED BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK
Thermostat CN19 CN20 CN21 CN22
Thermistor
Print Heater
Thermostat Thermistor
CN16
CN8
CN15 RED CN6 CN12 CN11 CN10 CN9
Rear Heater
Thermostat Thermistor
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
5- 14
Electronic block diagram
External Connector Group Steel Plate CN7 Dsub9pin
OPTION
External Heater
Main PCB
SDRAM Slot 4 CN18 SDRAM Slot 3 CN17 SDRAM Slot 2 CN16 SDRAM Slot 1 CN15 N.C
N.C N.C N.C N.C Memory PCB (512MB) Memory PCB (512MB) N.C Reel Out IF CN4 Dsub15
CN3 CN4 CN10 CN7
Take-up PCB
CN5
N.C
CN9
Take-up Motor
CN6 CN1 CN2 (For CPLD) CN8
Wind Roll SW ASSY (CW/CCW/OFF) N.C
IO PCB
CN12 CN3
Dsub15
CN1
CN2 CN8
N.C N.C
CN22
Origin Sensor CN23 CN1
CN4
CN3
Head U/D Motor
Station INK Leak Sensor PCB Bear Guide (L/R) INK Leak Sensor PCB
Side Relay PCB

CN9 CN5 CN6 CN7
Wash Cartridge
ID Point of Contackt PCB Solenoid Valve Presence Sensor & Near End Sensor Exhaust Fan R
Dot Detection PCB

CN6 CN4 CN1 (For DEBUG BOARD) (For single CN3 purpose power supply) CN5 (For DEBUG) CN2 CN2 (For CPLD)
CN10 CN11
INK Leak Sensor PCB
Exhaust Fan L
NCU
OPTION
Deodorization FAN x2
CN15 2pin BLACK 4pin BLACK CN5 2pin BLACK CN5 Clamp Sensor Paper Sensor Bottom Point Sensor CN8 CN7 CN9 BLUE N.C N.C N.C CN7 CN9 CN2 CN13 CN1 CN6
MD8pin
Dry Fan Assy
MD4pin
BOX Relay PCB

CN10
Drying Fan Fork PCB
Drying Fan Fork PCB
Steel Plate Relay
Waste Tank Sensor 1 Waste Tank Sensor 2
FB FAN
Wiper Sensor Wiper Wash Solenoid
Station Motor
CN25 (For DEBUG BOARD) CN10 (For F/W RS) CN26 (For G/A)
Wiper Motor
To R Heater Thermistor
CN3 BLACK
Pump Motor 1 Pump Motor 2 Pump Motor 3 Pump Motor 4
3pin WHITE CN8
CN4
BLACK CN14 2pin HDC Cooling Fan 3pin WHITE 2pin BLACK To A Heater Thermistor To RY1 To SSR x3 To P Heater Thermistor
Absorption Fan x3
5- 15
5- 16
A B C D E F
A Heater Cover Assy. ............................... 3- 193 Adjust Head Stagger ................................... 3- 23 Adjustment of the head angle ........................ 3- 20 Adjustment tools .......................................... 1- 4 BasisHEADheight ...................................... 3- 12 Bottom Point Sensor ................................. 3- 115 BOX Relay PCB ........................................ 3- 90 Box Relay PCB .......................................... 5- 12 Cap Base 1H ............................................. 3- 38 Cap Head assy. .......................................... 3- 37 Cap Sensor .............................................. 3- 117 Capping adjusting ....................................... 3- 14 Clamp Sensor .......................................... 3- 113 Cutter Unit Assy. ..................................... 3- 189 Damper Assembly ...................................... 3- 57 Dot Detection PCB .......................... 3- 96, 5- 11 Drop Position Correction ............................. 3- 26 Drying Fan Fork PCB ............................... 3- 106 Electronic block diagram ............................. 5- 14 Encoder PCB ............................................. 5- 11 Enter Head ID ........................................... 3- 18 Filling of Ink ............................................. 3- 19 Front Cover Sensor L ................................ 3- 147 Front Cover Sensor R ................................ 3- 149
Ink Unit PCB .................................... IO PCB ...........................................
3- 98, 5- 8 3- 78, 5- 7
J L
Jam Sensor
............................................. 3- 121
Keyboard PCB
................................ 3- 92, 5- 10
LED PCB .....................................
3- 103, 5- 13
M Motor ................................................ 3- 186 Main PCB ........................................ 3- 70, 5- 5 Maintenance Cover Sensor L ..................... 3- 151 Maintenance Cover Sensor R ..................... 3- 152 Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly .............. 3- 42 Media Rotary Encoder Assembly ................ 3- 139 Memory PCB ............................................ 5- 13
O P
Origin Sensor ..........................................
3- 110
P Heater Cover Assy. ............................... 3- 198 Paper Sensor ........................................... 3- 136 Paper Thickness Encoder .......................... 3- 125 Paper Width Sensor ................................. 3- 119 Paper Width Sensor PCB ............................ 5- 11 Power PCB .............................................. 3- 85 Power Supply ............................................. 5- 4 Pump Motor Assembly ............................... 3- 35
R S
R Heater Cover Assy.
............................... 3- 204
HDC PCB ........................................ 3- 77, 5- 7 Head memory PCB ..................................... 5- 13 Head Relay PCB ........................................ 3- 81 Head relay PCB ......................................... 5- 13 Head UD Motor ....................................... 3- 184 Head Unit ................................................... 3- 7 Head Up/Down Encoder ............................ 3- 132 Heater PCB .................................... 3- 88, 5- 10
S Pump Assembly ...................................... 3- 33 Side Relay PCB ........................................ 3- 99 Side relay PCB .......................................... 5- 12 Slider PCB ....................................... 3- 82, 5- 9 Specifications of the main unit ....................... 1- 5 SSR ...................................................... 3- 209 Station Motor .......................................... 3- 182 Sucker BOX ............................................. 3- 61
I/F Connection Board .................................... 5- 6 ID Point of Contact PCB ............................ 3- 101 Ink Leak Sensor PCB .................................. 5- 13 Ink Leakage Sensor .................................. 3- 153
Take-up PCB ................................ 3- 105, Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly
5- 11 1- 4
USB Board ................................................. 5- 6 USB PCB ................................................. 3- 79
W X Y
Wash Cartridge Assembly ........................... 3- 51 Waste Tank Sensor ................................... 3- 158 Wiper Motor ........................................... 3- 179 Wiper Sensor .......................................... 3- 112 Wiper Wash Solenoid ............................... 3- 206 X Belt .................................................... X Pulley ................................................. X-axis Motor Assembly ............................ Y Drive Belt ........................................... Y Drive Pulley Assembly .......................... Y Encoder .............................................. Y-axis Motor Assembly ............................ Y-Drive Transmission Belt ........................
3- 165 3- 165 3- 162
3- 175 3- 171 3- 129 3- 167 3- 171
D500306-2.00-29092006 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD. 2006
IG TM FW1.20

Mimaki JV5 Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mimaki JV5 Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

Color Inkjet Printer

About this Maintenance Manual

CHAPTER 1 Outline of Maintenance

CHAPTER 2 Operation Principle and Functions

CHAPTER 3 Overhaul / Adjustment

CHAPTER 5 Explanation of Electrical Parts

Color Inkjet Printer

~ Rear ~ (Reorder: M903239)

Operation Principle and Functions

2-2. Functions .................................................................................................... 2-26

2-3. Operation Flow .......................................................................................... 2-50

2-50 2-51 2-52 2-54 2-57 2-61 2-68

3-2. Overhaul of Ink-related Parts .................................................................... 3-6

Color Inkjet Printer

3-3. Overhaul of PCBs ....................................................................................... 3-69

3-4. Overhaul of Sensors ................................................................................. 3-109

3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts ....................................................................... 3-161

3-5-8. Head UD Motor ........................................................................... 3-184 3-5-9. M Motor ....................................................................................... 3-186

3-6. Overhaul of Other Parts ......................................................................... 3-188

3-189 3-193 3-198 3-204 3-206 3-209

Explanation of Electrical Parts

5-2. Circuit Board Specifications ....................................................................... 5-5

5-3. Electronic block diagram .......................................................................... 5-14

Color Inkjet Printer

CHAPTER 1 Outline of Maintenance

1-1. Precautions in Maintenance ...................................... 1-2

Color Inkjet Printer JV5-130S/160S

1-1. Precautions in Maintenance

1-1-2. Preliminary checks

Color Inkjet Printer JV5-130S/160S

1-2. Tools required for maintenance work

1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly

1-2-2. Adjustment tools

OPT-J0094 OPT-J0096 OPT-J0097 OPT-J0098 OPT-J0099 OPT-J0108

Specifications of the main unit

1-3. Specifications of the main unit

Total 16 IC chip mounted cartridgs (Special solvant ink)

At 6-color, 1760cc for only CM

Color Inkjet Printer

Installed in the machine (Class 2 as a unit)

Outside dimen- (W) sion (D) (H)

CHAPTER 2 Operation Principle and Functions

Functions ................................................................... 2-26

Operation Flow ......................................................... 2-50

Color Inkjet Printer

Initial operation I/F Board Detection

Origin Point Detection

<Operation sequence at original point detection>

The following required resources are checked.

<Required RAM size> 1GB (2 SDRAM boards in the expansion slot)

Color Inkjet Printer

I/F Board Detection

2-1-4. Media Detection

<Media detection operation sequence>

Up the lever to stop the detection.

4 Media length inputting

2-1-5. Sequence of Maintenance Function

2 Maintenance (Wiper) 3 Maintenance (Nozzle wash)

3. Pump tube is locked.

and servo motor-OFF.

Color Inkjet Printer